WO2025236933A1 - Group display method and apparatus in application program, and storage medium and computer program product - Google Patents
Group display method and apparatus in application program, and storage medium and computer program productInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025236933A1 WO2025236933A1 PCT/CN2025/088021 CN2025088021W WO2025236933A1 WO 2025236933 A1 WO2025236933 A1 WO 2025236933A1 CN 2025088021 W CN2025088021 W CN 2025088021W WO 2025236933 A1 WO2025236933 A1 WO 2025236933A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- link
- target
- application
- target group
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F16/00—Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor
- G06F16/90—Details of database functions independent of the retrieved data types
- G06F16/95—Retrieval from the web
- G06F16/955—Retrieval from the web using information identifiers, e.g. uniform resource locators [URL]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L51/00—User-to-user messaging in packet-switching networks, transmitted according to store-and-forward or real-time protocols, e.g. e-mail
- H04L51/04—Real-time or near real-time messaging, e.g. instant messaging [IM]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L51/00—User-to-user messaging in packet-switching networks, transmitted according to store-and-forward or real-time protocols, e.g. e-mail
- H04L51/48—Message addressing, e.g. address format or anonymous messages, aliases
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L51/00—User-to-user messaging in packet-switching networks, transmitted according to store-and-forward or real-time protocols, e.g. e-mail
- H04L51/52—User-to-user messaging in packet-switching networks, transmitted according to store-and-forward or real-time protocols, e.g. e-mail for supporting social networking services
Definitions
- This application relates to the field of data processing technology, and in particular to a group display method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product in an application.
- users are often divided into groups.
- groups When managing groups within an application, users can either enter the group name in a fixed search area to find the target group, or directly access the group via a group link (e.g., a message from another user containing a link to the target group). In the latter method, users only see the link and must click it to learn about the group and its basic information. This results in low efficiency in group management and information delivery.
- This application provides a group display method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product in an application, which can improve information transmission efficiency.
- a group display method in an application applied to a terminal of a first object, the method comprising:
- the application displays a first page containing the target group name of the target group, the target group name having a link tag for an entry link of the target group, the entry link being created by a second object in the target group and associated with the target group name of the target group at the time of creation;
- the session page for the target group is displayed.
- a group display device in an application applied to a terminal of a first object, the device comprising:
- the first display module is configured to display a first page in the application, the first page containing the target group name of the target group, the target group name having a link tag for an entry link of the target group, the entry link being created by a second object in the target group and associated with the target group name of the target group at the time of creation;
- the second display module is configured to display basic information about the target group in response to a dwell operation triggered around the target group name;
- the third display module is configured to display the session page of the target group in response to a trigger on the link tag.
- an electronic device including a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program, and the processor executes the computer program to implement the group display method in the application described above.
- a computer-readable storage medium the storage medium storing a computer program that, when executed by a processor, implements the group display method in the application described above.
- a computer program product including a computer program that is read and executed by a processor of a computer device, causing the computer device to perform the group display method in the application described above.
- this embodiment when a user (the terminal of the first object) accesses a first page with a group link (entry link), the group link on the first page is displayed as the target group name with a link marker. At this time, the user can intuitively know which group this entry link represents, making the entry link created and shared by the second object more concrete. Furthermore, this embodiment also sets up automatic display of the target group's basic information when the user hovers around the target group name. This allows the user to preview the basic information of the target group without triggering the entry link and opening the target group's conversation page. By previewing the basic information, the user can understand what kind of group it is and determine whether they want to enter the group's conversation page. Finally, when the user decides to enter the group's conversation page, triggering the link marker on the first page to enter the target group's conversation page improves the efficiency of group information transmission.
- Figure 1 is a system architecture diagram of the group display method applied in an application according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figures 2A-2D illustrate schematic diagrams of the group display method in an application according to an embodiment of the present application, applied in a scenario where group display is triggered based on a session group;
- Figures 2E-2H illustrate schematic diagrams of the group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application being applied in a scenario where group display is triggered based on announcement information;
- Figure 3 is a flowchart of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figures 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of enabling and disabling name display on a terminal of a first object according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figures 5A-5C are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying an entry link as a target group name with a link tag according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figures 6A-6C are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying entry links as target group names with link tags according to object preferences in one embodiment of this application;
- Figure 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating the implementation process of displaying an entry link as a target group name with a link tag according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 8 is a flowchart of a terminal that determines a target group including a first object according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 9 is a flowchart of a session page displaying a target group according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figures 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying a session page for a target group according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 11 is a flowchart of a session page displaying a target group according to another embodiment of this application.
- Figure 12 is a flowchart of generating an authorization response according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figures 13A-13C are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying a session page for a subgroup according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 14 is an overall flowchart of a session page displaying a target group according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 15 is a flowchart of creating an entry link according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 16 is a flowchart of determining whether a group string satisfies a first condition according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a predetermined relationship lookup table according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figures 18A and 18B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of creating an entry link according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 19 is an overall flowchart of creating an entry link according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 20 is a flowchart of creating an entry link according to another embodiment of this application.
- Figures 21A and 21B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of creating an entry link according to another embodiment of this application.
- Figure 22 is a flowchart of a second verification of subgroup links according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 23 is a flowchart of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 24 is a flowchart of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup according to another embodiment of this application.
- Figures 25A and 25B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of determining subgroup links of each target subgroup according to another embodiment of this application;
- Figure 26 is an overall flowchart of creating an entry link according to another embodiment of this application.
- Figure 27 is a flowchart of displaying an entry link as a target group name with a link marker according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 28 is an overall flowchart of displaying group name and basic group information according to another embodiment of this application.
- Figure 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating the implementation details of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 30 is a block diagram of a group display device in an application according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 31 is a terminal structure diagram of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 32 is a server structure diagram of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application.
- An application is a software program that runs on a computer or mobile device and is designed to provide users with specific functions or services.
- the application's homepage displays the names of multiple target groups, each accompanied by a link pointing to an entry point to that group. These entry points are created by a secondary object within the group (such as an administrator or designated user) and associated with the group name.
- a secondary object within the group such as an administrator or designated user
- the application displays basic information about the group, such as its description and number of members. If the user triggers a link, the application redirects to the group's session page, enabling the user to communicate and interact with other members within the group.
- Figure 1 is a system architecture diagram of the group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application. It includes an object terminal 140, an Internet 130, a gateway 120, an application server 110, etc.
- the target terminal 140 includes various forms such as desktop computers, laptops, PDAs (personal digital assistants), mobile phones, in-vehicle terminals, home theater terminals, and dedicated terminals. Furthermore, it can be a single device or a collection of multiple devices.
- the target terminal 140 can communicate with the Internet 130 via wired or wireless means to exchange data.
- the target terminal 140 has an application platform for various target terminals to perform social activities, resource interaction, and information exchange.
- Application server 110 refers to a computer system that can provide certain services to object terminal 140. Compared to ordinary object terminal 140, application server 110 has higher requirements in terms of stability, security, and performance.
- Application server 110 can be a high-performance computer in a network platform, a cluster of multiple high-performance computers, a portion of a high-performance computer (e.g., a virtual machine), or a combination of portions of multiple high-performance computers (e.g., virtual machines).
- Application server 110 contains various types of services, and the implementation of each service of application server 110 is often associated with some intermediate database or storage medium.
- Application server 110 is used to create links to at least one group based on a group link creation operation of an object terminal, and determine the method of displaying group links to other object terminals.
- Application server 110 is also used to display group information or group session windows based on the interactive operations of other object terminals.
- Gateway 120 also known as an internetwork connector or protocol converter, is a computer system or device that acts as a translator, enabling network interconnection at the transport layer. It bridges the gap between two systems using different communication protocols, data formats, languages, or even completely different architectures. Gateways can also provide filtering and security functions. Messages sent from target terminal 140 to application server 110 are forwarded to the corresponding server via gateway 120. Messages sent from application server 110 to target terminal 140 are also forwarded to the corresponding target terminal 140 via gateway 120.
- the embodiments of this application can be applied in various scenarios, such as the scenario of triggering group display based on session group as shown in Figures 2A-2D, and the scenario of triggering group display based on announcement information as shown in Figures 2E-2H.
- the group members are Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- the session message is a group link of Group A shared by Object 1.
- the group members are Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- the group link previously sent by Object 1 will be displayed as a group name with a link marker, which is "Badminton Interest Group”.
- Object 2's previously sent "Received” message will also display the link marker, which refers to the interactive underline located below the group name "Badminton Interest Group”.
- the group members are Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- Object 3 hovers the mouse over "Badminton Interest Group” in the basketball interest group's chat page, a tooltip window will appear on the chat page.
- This tooltip window will display information such as "Group members: 10; Already joined: Yes; Group owner's nickname: xxx1". Based on this, Object 3 clicks on the group name "Badminton Interest Group” and triggers the link to open the badminton interest group's chat page.
- the group members include object 3, object 11, object 3 and object 4.
- object 3 double-clicks the group name "Badminton Interest Group" and triggers the link tag, a new session window will be displayed in the application platform.
- This session window is the session page of the Badminton Interest Group.
- Figures 2A-2D above illustrate the display and preview of group links shared by various objects in the application's session page. This allows objects to know the names of groups shared by other objects within the session page, and to learn the basic information of the group without entering the group's session page. Furthermore, users can directly navigate to the group's session page based on the group link, improving the efficiency of group search.
- Figure 2E shows the application announcement page of the application platform.
- the page displays multiple announcements posted at different times and by different individuals.
- Announcement 2 includes a text message "Xxxxxxx” and a link "https://example.com/group?7895”
- Announcement 3 includes two images, Image 1 and Image 2.
- the link in Announcement 1 conforms to the format requirements for group links, indicating entry to group A. However, the link in Announcement 2 does not meet the format requirements for group links and is a regular link.
- the application announcement bar page will display three announcements.
- the link information of announcement 1 is displayed as the group name of group A with a link mark.
- the group name of group A is "Badminton Interest Group”;
- announcement 2 is still displayed as a text message "Xxxxxxx” and a link message "https://example.com/group?7895";
- announcement 3 is still displayed as an image message consisting of image 1 and image 2.
- FIGS 2E-2H above illustrate the display and preview of group links shared by various objects on the group announcement page of the application. This allows objects to know the group name indicated by the group link in the announcement page and to know the basic information of the group without entering the group's session page.
- the group display method of this application embodiment satisfies the need to preview group information related to group links shared by other objects in multiple scenarios such as chat windows, group announcements, documents, or favorite content, making the display scenarios of group information more diverse. Furthermore, the group display method of this application embodiment provides sharing and preview functions for groups, which can effectively improve the efficiency of group information transmission.
- a group display method in an application is provided, applied to the terminal of a first object.
- the group display method in this application is commonly used in scenarios such as group sharing and group display in general applications, such as the group display scenarios shown in Figures 2A-2D and 2E-2H.
- This application embodiment provides a solution based on setting entry links for each group, allowing users to preview group information before joining, thereby improving information transmission efficiency.
- a group display method in an application may include:
- Step 310 Display the first page in the application.
- the first page contains the target group name of the target group.
- the target group name has a link tag for the entry link of the target group.
- the entry link is created by the second object in the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
- Step 320 In response to a dwell action triggered around the target group name, display basic information about the target group;
- Step 330 In response to a trigger on a link tag, display the session page for the target group.
- Steps 310-330 are described in detail below.
- a first page is displayed in the application.
- the first page contains the target group name of the target group, which has a link tag for the target group's entry link.
- the entry link is created by a second object of the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
- the first page is a content page within the application. It contains entry links to the target group.
- a target group refers to a group of objects that have been successfully registered in an application and possess the same or similar characteristics.
- a target group can be a group of multiple objects with the same interests or hobbies, or a group of multiple objects performing the same task.
- An entry link is a string consisting of a fixed-format string and a random string corresponding to each group. Entry links are used to link to the target group's session page, allowing objects to quickly navigate to or access the target group's session page.
- the second object is another object terminal that has been successfully registered in the application and is distinct from the first object terminal.
- the target group name is used to indicate the title content of the target group and is used to distinguish the target group from other groups.
- Link tags are used to provide an object with an entry link to trigger the target group, allowing it to access or join the target group's session page.
- the first page is a content page containing the target group name.
- This name is a link marker pointing to an entry link created by a second object of the target group and associated with the target group name upon creation.
- a target group refers to a group of object terminals that have successfully registered in the application and possess the same or similar characteristics. For example, a target group could be a group of multiple objects with the same interests or hobbies, or a group of multiple objects performing the same task.
- the entry link is a string consisting of a fixed-format string and random strings corresponding to each group. Its function is to link to the target group's session page, enabling the object to quickly navigate to or access the target group's session page.
- the second object is another object terminal that has been successfully registered in the application and is distinct from the first object.
- the target group name indicates the target group title content and distinguishes the target group from other groups.
- the link tag provides the object with an entry link to trigger the target group, allowing it to access or join the target group's session page.
- the first page could be a news feed page containing the target group names of the groups the user follows. These names have entry links, created by the group's administrator (the second object) and associated with the group name upon creation.
- the first page is a content page within the application containing entry links to the groups.
- Groups can be interest groups composed of users with similar interests or project groups composed of users performing the same task.
- the entry link is a string consisting of a fixed-format string and a random string corresponding to each group. Its purpose is to link to the group's session page, allowing users to quickly navigate to or access the group's session page.
- the second object is another object terminal that has been successfully registered in the application and is distinct from the first object.
- the group name indicates the group's title content and distinguishes it from other groups.
- the link tags provide users with entry links to the group to access or join its session page.
- a link tag could be an underscore below the group name, or a graphical interactive control before or after the group name.
- the server when the terminal of the first object accesses the application and opens any content page in the application, the server, with authorization, will display the content page that the terminal of the first object wants to access as the first page in the application.
- the first page may include text, images, videos, or entry links to target groups, etc.
- the server determines that the entry link in the first page was created by a second object of the target group and associated with the target group name at creation time, the entry link is displayed as the target group name with a link tag in the first page of the application. This ensures that the first page seen by the first object's terminal includes the target group name, which has a link tag for the target group's entry link. This allows the object to intuitively understand what kind of group the entry link indicates based on the target group name, and provides a link tag for the object to trigger and access the group's session page.
- displaying the first page in the application significantly improves user convenience for participating in group activities by providing an intuitive and easily accessible interface.
- the link to the target group name not only clearly identifies the group's theme and purpose but also simplifies user navigation to the group session page through a directly linked entry link.
- This design based on behavioral analysis and interface design principles, enhances user experience by reducing the complexity and time required for user operations.
- the combination of a fixed format and random strings for the entry link ensures its security and uniqueness, preventing unauthorized access and facilitating the detection and management of group access traffic.
- the participation of a second object in creating the entry link increases the flexibility of social interaction and management within the group, allowing it to better adapt to the needs and preferences of different users. Overall, this design, through careful technical arrangement, optimizes the user interface and enhances social interaction, thereby increasing the application's attractiveness and user satisfaction.
- step 320 in response to a dwell action triggered around the target group name, basic information about the target group is displayed.
- a dwell operation triggered around a target group name refers to a dwell operation triggered in a target area of the first page.
- the target area is an area on the first page where the distance between the display position of the target group name and the target group name is less than a distance threshold.
- the basic information is used to prompt the first object whether to trigger the link tag.
- a target object refers to an object used to interact with the application's pages. Examples include a mouse, a stylus, or a user's finger.
- the area surrounding the target group name refers to the region that the server can sense and confirm as valid for the target object's stay operation.
- a first page contains the name of the target group, surrounded by a specific target area.
- a target object such as a mouse, stylus, or finger
- the application responds by displaying basic information about the target group. This basic information is intended to prompt the user whether they should trigger a link to access or join the target group's session page.
- the target area is defined based on the display location of the target group name. Specifically, it is the area whose distance from the name's display location is less than a preset distance threshold. This distance threshold is set by the application developer based on user experience and design requirements to ensure that users can easily obtain basic information about the group when operating near the target group name.
- the application detects this stay and triggers the display of basic information about the target group.
- This information may include the group's description, number of members, latest activities, etc., to help the user understand the group's content and activity level, thereby deciding whether to visit or join the group.
- the first page is a dynamic news feed displaying the names of various groups the user follows.
- Each group name is surrounded by a target area; when the user hovers their mouse over this area, the application displays basic information about the group. For instance, if the user hovers their mouse near the "Photography Enthusiasts" group name, a tooltip pops up displaying the group's description (e.g., "Welcome all photography enthusiasts to join, share your photos, and exchange photography tips.”), current number of members (e.g., "5000+ members"), and the group's latest activity (e.g., "Latest photo sharing: Beautiful sunset photos”).
- the group's description e.g., "Welcome all photography enthusiasts to join, share your photos, and exchange photography tips.”
- current number of members e.g., "5000+ members”
- the group's latest activity e.g., "Latest photo sharing: Beautiful sunset photos”
- This basic information helps users quickly understand the group's content and activity level, deciding whether to click the group name link to join or view more details.
- This design not only improves the user experience but also increases group visibility and attractiveness, encouraging users to participate in more social activities. Simultaneously, it reduces the likelihood of users accidentally clicking on group names, enhancing application usability and user satisfaction.
- the area surrounding the target group name i.e., the target region
- the target region can be defined as the rectangular region formed by extending the four sides of the outer rectangle of the target group name outward at equal distances.
- a dwell operation refers to keeping a target object in its current position for a certain period of time. Dwell operations include, but are not limited to, hovering and long-pressing.
- the basic information of the target group is used to indicate the specific content of the target group. For example, the number of group members, the group type, the group creation date, and who has administrative privileges in the group are all within the scope of the basic information of the target group.
- the basic information about a target group consists of key data about the group, providing an overview and basic attributes.
- This information typically includes the number of group members, reflecting the group's size and activity level; the group type, such as an interest group, work team, or study group, which helps users understand the group's nature and purpose; the group's creation date, which shows how long the group has existed and sometimes reflects its maturity and stability; and the individuals with administrative privileges within the group, identifying the group's administrators or leaders responsible for maintaining group order and managing group content.
- This basic information is very useful to users because it helps them quickly assess whether they want to join or participate in a particular group, while also providing group administrators with the essential information needed to manage the group.
- the terminal of the first object can control the target object to stay at any position on the application's interface. Therefore, when the terminal of the first object sees a target group name displayed with a link tag in the application, the terminal of the first object can control the target object to stay around the target group name, allowing the server to detect the target object's position. Then, the server will obtain the target object's position on the application's interface.
- the server identifies whether the target object's location is within the range of a predefined target group name, until the target object stays around the target group name for a predetermined time.
- the server then extracts the basic information of the target group and displays it in the application's interface in the form of a message window, so that the terminal of the first object can understand what kind of group the target group is without joining the target group.
- the system when a user hovers over a target area on the first page, the system displays basic information about the target group.
- the system displays basic information about the target group.
- users can quickly understand its content and nature without leaving the current page. This not only improves the user experience and reduces the need for users to switch between different pages, but also increases the likelihood of user participation in group activities.
- This interaction method also improves information visibility, enabling group administrators to manage groups more effectively, while also helping to prevent accidental clicks, thus enhancing application usability and user satisfaction.
- step 330 in response to a trigger on a link tag, the session page for the target group is displayed.
- a conversation page refers to a window for members of a target group to communicate and exchange information.
- the object when an object wants to access a target group, the object triggers a link marker in the application. Based on this, the server receives the object's trigger operation on the link marker, displays the target group's session page in the application, so that the object can view the session content of each member of the target group and communicate with each member of the target group in the session page.
- the application when a user triggers a link next to the target group name on the application's homepage, the application responds by displaying the target group's conversation page.
- This conversation page is a specially designed window for group members to engage in real-time or asynchronous conversational communication.
- a user wants to access the target group, they click or tap the link in the application. Once the user triggers the link, the application sends this action to the server.
- the server retrieves the conversation page data for the target group associated with that link. This data may include a list of group members, historical conversation records, the status of currently online members, etc.
- the server sends this data back to the application, which renders the target group's conversation page on the user's device.
- the user can now view the group members' conversation content on this page, including both the latest messages and historical records. Furthermore, users can enter their own messages on the conversation page to communicate with other group members in real time.
- the group link on the first page is displayed as the target group name with a link marker.
- the user can intuitively know which group this entry link represents, making the entry link created and shared by the second object more concrete.
- the target object mouse, stylus, etc.
- the basic information of the target group is automatically displayed to the user. This allows the user to preview the basic information of the target group without triggering the entry link and opening the target group's conversation page.
- steps 310-340 The above is a general description of steps 310-340. The specific implementations of steps 310, 320, and 330 will be described in detail below.
- step 310 Detailed description of step 310
- a first page is displayed in the application.
- the first page contains the target group name of the target group, which has a link tag for the target group's entry link.
- the entry link is created by a second object in the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
- this application provides a scheme that controls the display format of entry links based on the settings of a second object during its creation. This improves the diversity of entry link display and thus enhances information display security.
- the first page in the application is typically a content-rich page containing the names of multiple target groups.
- Each name is accompanied by a link marker for an entry point, which users can click or tap to access the corresponding group session page.
- These entry points are created by a second entity within the group (typically a group administrator or creator) and are associated with the group name at creation time.
- a second entity within the group typically a group administrator or creator
- directly displaying the entry point as the target group name with the link marker could pose security risks. For example, this could make it easier for unauthorized users to discover and join these private groups, potentially leading to the leakage of sensitive information or compromise of group privacy.
- this application proposes a scheme to control the display format of the entry link based on the settings of a second object during its creation.
- group administrators can choose different entry link display formats according to the group's privacy settings and security requirements. For example, they can choose to hide the entry link, displaying it only after specific operations or permission verification; or they can choose to display the entry link in an encrypted or obfuscated form to reduce the risk of it being discovered by unauthorized users.
- This scheme increases the diversity of entry link display, allowing group administrators to flexibly control the visibility and access methods of the entry link according to different group needs and security conditions. Furthermore, this also helps to improve the security of information display and protect the privacy and security of group members. In this way, the application can ensure the security and privacy of the group while providing convenient group access functions.
- the target group name of the first page in step 310 is determined in the following way:
- the link tag of the entry link will be constructed as the target group name.
- the second object when the second object creates an entry link for the target group and associates the entry link with the target group name, it is desired that the target group name is only visible to certain fixed object terminals.
- the second object can add the terminal name or terminal identifier of each object terminal that can directly view the target group name through the entry link in the name display enable editing area of the entry link creation settings interface. Based on this, when the terminal name or terminal identifier of the first object's terminal is added to the name display enable editing area, when the first object's terminal accesses the first page, the entry link on the first page will directly display the target group name with the link marker, instead of the original form of the entry link.
- the entry link on the first page will retain its original display form and will still be displayed as a link.
- the second object when an entry link is created by a second object (such as a group administrator) of the target group, the second object can choose during the creation process whether to enable name display for the first object's terminal. If name display is enabled, the entry link's link marker will be constructed as the target group name. This means that when the first object views the first page on their terminal, they will see a group name with a link marker, instead of the original link format.
- the second object can specify which terminal names or identifiers are allowed to see the group name in the entry link creation settings interface. These terminal names or identifiers are typically associated with specific users or devices.
- the entry link will be displayed as the target group name with a link marker when the first object accesses the first page, and can be directly clicked or touched to access the group session page. Conversely, if the first object's terminal name or identifier is not added to the edit area for enabling name display, the entry link will retain its original link format and be displayed as a regular link instead of the group name.
- This design allows group administrators to control which users or devices can access the group in a more intuitive way, thereby improving the display diversity of entry links and the security of information display.
- the application can flexibly control the display format of the entry link according to the group administrator's settings, which not only ensures the privacy and security of the group, but also provides a more convenient and intuitive way for specific users to access the group.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and associates it with the group name.
- the administrator wants only specific user devices to see the group name, while other users only see the raw link.
- the administrator adds the device names or device identifiers of the user devices allowed to view the group name in the "Enable Name Display" edit area. For example, the administrator adds the device identifiers of users A and B.
- users A and B access the application's first page, they will see the group name "Photography Enthusiasts" with a link next to it. They can click or tap the name to directly access the group's session page.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that the display format of the entry link is controlled according to the settings of the second object during its creation.
- the terminal of the first object When the terminal of the first object is set by the second object to have its name displayed, the terminal of the first object will directly receive the target group name indicated by the entry link when accessing the first page, thus understanding the meaning of the entry link more intuitively.
- the terminal of the first object When the terminal of the first object is not set by the second object to have its name displayed, the entry link seen when accessing the first page is just an ordinary link, and its meaning cannot be intuitively understood.
- This method can improve the display diversity of entry links, thereby improving the security of information display.
- this application provides a scheme that uses different target group names to indicate the same group for different objects, thereby improving the flexibility of group information display.
- the target group name of the first page in step 310 is determined in the following way:
- the group name specified by the second object for the terminal of the first object when creating the entry link is determined as the target group name corresponding to the terminal of the first object, wherein the second object specifies different group names for different object terminals when creating the entry link.
- the target group when the second object creates an entry link for the target group and associates the entry link with the target group name, the target group is set to be displayed to different objects with different linked target group names via the entry link. Simultaneously, the target group name seen by each object is defined, assigning different target group names to different object terminals. Based on this, when the first object's terminal accesses the first page, the entry link is displayed with the target group name corresponding to the first object's terminal, according to the second object's settings.
- a second object such as a group administrator
- they can specify different group names for different object terminals. This means that when different users access the first page, the group names they see may differ, depending on the settings of the second object.
- the second object can specify a unique group name for each object terminal. For example, the second object can specify "Photography Club” for user A's terminal and "Photography Community" for user B's terminal, even though both names point to the same target group.
- the application will display the entry link with the target group name corresponding to the first object's terminal, based on the second object's settings.
- the first object is user A, they will see the group name "Photography Club” with a link on the first page; if the first object is user B, they will see the group name "Photography Community” with a link.
- This allows group administrators to flexibly display group names based on different users or devices, thereby improving user experience and group attractiveness. It also provides group administrators with a personalized way to interact and communicate with different user groups. In this way, the application can better meet the needs and preferences of different users, and enhance user engagement and satisfaction.
- the second object when specifying different target group names for different object terminals, can be set so that each object has a different target group name, making the target group names seen by different objects completely different, or different group names can be set according to groups, so that the target group names seen by each object in a group are the same, but the target group names seen by objects in different groups are different.
- Object 1 when Object 1 creates an entry link for a tennis interest group, it configures the display settings for this entry link on the application platform.
- Object 1 sets the group name displayed to members through the tennis interest group's entry link to be "Tennis Enthusiasts Alliance"; and the group name displayed to members to be "Tennis Exchange Group”.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- Object 2 is not a member of the tennis interest group.
- the content sent by Object 1 displayed on the conversation page is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag.
- the group name with the link tag is "Tennis Exchange Group”.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- Object 3 is a group member of the tennis interest group.
- the content sent by Object 1 displayed on the conversation page is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag.
- the group name with a link tag is "Tennis Enthusiasts Alliance”.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and associates it with the group name.
- the administrator wants to assign different group names to different user devices based on users' interests and preferences.
- the administrator can assign a unique group name to each user device. For example, the administrator can assign "Yoga Enthusiasts" to user devices that like yoga, “Strength Training Fanatics” to user devices that like strength training, and "Aerobics Enthusiasts" to user devices that like cardio, even though all three names point to the same target group.
- This design allows group administrators to flexibly display the group name based on users' interests and preferences, thereby improving user experience and group attractiveness. It also provides group administrators with a personalized way to interact and communicate with different user groups. In this way, the application can better meet the needs and preferences of different users, enhancing user engagement and satisfaction.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that when the second object creates the entry link for the target group, it provides a channel to set different target group names for different object terminals, so that the second object can specify different target group names for different objects as needed, and use different target group names to indicate the same group for different objects, which can improve the flexibility of group display information.
- this application provides a scheme that allows the display format of entry links to be controlled according to the object's preferences when the second object is created. This makes the displayed target group names more in line with the preferences of each object, improving the display diversity of entry links.
- the target group name of the first page in step 310 is determined in the following way:
- the candidate group name that corresponds to the first object preference of the terminal of the first object among the multiple candidate group names is determined as the target group name, wherein the multiple candidate group names are associated with the entry link when the second object creates the entry link.
- the first object preference is used to indicate the habitual preferences of the terminal of the first object in the display of group names.
- the first object preference includes, but is not limited to, the object's preference for font, font size, format, etc. when displaying group names.
- Candidate group names are used to indicate different naming methods for the same target group.
- a second object such as a group administrator
- creates an entry link they can set multiple candidate group names for the same target group.
- These candidate group names represent different naming methods for the same group, designed to meet the preferences of different users regarding group name display. These preferences include, but are not limited to, font type, font size, format, etc.
- the application first collects the group name display preferences of the first user's terminal. This is typically determined through the user's settings or usage habits within the application. For example, a user might have selected a specific font and size in the settings, or frequently chosen a certain display format in past use. Next, the application analyzes these preferences and matches them against multiple candidate group names set by the second user for the entry link. Each candidate group name may have different display settings, such as different fonts, sizes, or formats. The application's goal is to find the candidate group name that best matches the first user's preferences. Once a matching candidate group name is found, the application displays this name as the target group name on the first user's terminal.
- the first user sees a group name that matches their display preferences, thereby improving user experience and satisfaction.
- the ability to display group names based on the user's personalized needs enhances user interaction and application satisfaction. Simultaneously, it demonstrates the application's attention to and responsiveness to user personalization needs, contributing to an improved overall user experience.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and sets multiple candidate group names for this entry link to suit different users' display preferences.
- candidate group names include: “Gourmet,” using an elegant font and a large font size, suitable for users who prefer a formal style; “Foodie Paradise,” using a lively font and a medium font size, suitable for younger users who prefer a relaxed style; and “Cooking World,” using a professional font and a smaller font size, suitable for users interested in cooking and appreciating technical details.
- Each candidate group name corresponds to different display settings to meet the preferences of different users.
- the application detects User A's device preferences. Assume User A prefers a formal font and a large font size. Therefore, the application will display "Gourmet" as the target group name on User A's device.
- the application detects that User B prefers a lively font and a medium font size. Therefore, the application will display "Foodie Paradise” as the target group name on User B's device.
- the third user visits the first page, the application detects that User C prefers a professional font and a small font size.
- the application will display "Cooking World” as the target group name on User C's device.
- Group administrators can provide personalized group name displays for each user based on their display preferences, thereby improving user satisfaction and engagement. This also demonstrates the application's attention to and responsiveness to users' personalized needs.
- the group display parameters set by each object in the application are obtained from the server's background logs. These parameters include the display font, font size, and display mode of the group name.
- objects whose similarity in group display parameters exceeds a predetermined threshold are grouped into the same set, and a candidate group name corresponding to the group display parameters is set for each set.
- the entry link is displayed as the corresponding candidate group name.
- Each candidate group name is used to indicate the target group.
- the set to which the first object's terminal belongs based on the first object's preferences is first determined, and the candidate group name corresponding to the set is displayed as the target group name with a link tag, ensuring that the displayed target group name is adapted to the first object's terminal's preferences.
- the application platform when creating an entry link for a tennis interest group, the application platform configures the display settings for this entry link.
- the users are divided into two groups. The first group consists of users who prefer to display the full group name, including users 2, 11, 5, 6, etc.
- the second group consists of users who prefer to display the abbreviation, including users 3, 4, 5, 15, etc.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- the content sent by Object 1 displayed on the conversation page is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag.
- the group name with the link tag is "A City and B City Tennis Interest Exchange Group”.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- the chat page displays the content sent by Object 1, which is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag.
- the group name with the link tag is "A+B City Tennis Group”.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that when the second object creates the entry link, it selects the target group name to be displayed for each object according to the object's preferences. For different objects, the same group is displayed with different names, making the displayed target group name more in line with the preferences of each object. This can improve the display diversity of the entry link and enhance the user experience of the object in the application.
- step 320 Detailed description of step 320
- step 320 in response to a dwell action triggered around the target group name, basic information about the target group is displayed.
- the target area is an area on the first page where the distance between the display location of the target group name and the target area is less than a distance threshold, and the basic information is used to prompt the first object whether the link tag is triggered.
- the basic information of the target group includes at least one of the information set when the second object creates the target group and the information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on the basic information extraction rules.
- the information set when the second object creates the target group is the group information that the second object wants the object to be able to preview without opening the session page.
- the information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on basic information extraction rules is group information that can be previewed before the session page is opened, selected by the application platform based on various factors such as the target group's group type and group security level.
- the information set when the second object creates the target group and the information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on the basic information extraction rules may overlap.
- the information to be displayed by both is the same, the information only needs to be displayed once.
- the system when a user (the first object) triggers a hover action within a target area on the first page, the system displays basic information about the target group.
- the target area is the region on the first page whose distance from the display location of the target group name is less than a distance threshold.
- the second object (such as a group administrator) sets information when creating the target group.
- This information is group information that the administrator wants users to preview without opening the session page, and may include the group's description, purpose, rules, etc.
- the application platform extracts information from the target group based on basic information extraction rules. This information is filtered by the application platform based on various factors such as the target group's group type and security level, and can be previewed before opening the session page. For example, for a public group, the application platform might extract the group's latest discussion topics or activities; while for a private group, the platform might extract the number of members or the administrator's profile.
- the group administrator (the second user) created an entry link and set the target group name "Photography Tips Exchange” for this entry link.
- the administrator wants users to be able to preview some basic information about the group without opening the session page.
- the first user visits the application's first page, they see the group name "Photography Tips Exchange” with a link.
- User A hovers their mouse over the target area near the group name (the area less than a distance threshold from the displayed position of the group name), triggering a hover action.
- the application displays basic information about the target group on User A's device.
- This information includes: Group description: "Welcome photography enthusiasts to join, share and learn photography tips, and exchange experiences.” This information was set by the administrator when creating the group, hoping that users can understand the purpose and content of the group without opening the session page.
- Latest discussion topic "How to take beautiful sunset photos?” This is group information that the application platform filters based on group type and security level, which can be previewed before opening the session page. It helps users understand the group's activity level and the topics discussed. If there is overlap between the information set by the administrator when creating the group and the information extracted by the application platform (for example, the administrator also mentions the latest discussion topic), the application will ensure that the same information is displayed only once to avoid redundancy.
- User A can preview the basic information of the group without opening the conversation page, helping them decide whether to open the conversation page and participate in the group discussion.
- This design improves the user experience, allowing users to obtain the necessary information without delving into the group, helping them make decisions about whether to join or participate.
- it also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and its flexibility in managing group information.
- the basic information extraction rules are set as follows: multiple score ranges are defined based on the target group's security score, and each score range corresponds to a specific information item to be extracted.
- the security score is determined based on the target group's group type. Each group type has a pre-defined score value.
- the score is 60 for sports groups, 40 for food groups, and 80 for gaming groups.
- the target group's security score is between 0 and 40
- the extracted information includes the number of members and the group's creation time.
- the target group's security score is between 80 and 100
- the extracted information includes the current number of members and the maximum number of members allowed in the group.
- the application platform determines which information items to extract based on the group's security score.
- the security score is pre-set based on the group type; different group types have different security score values. For example, a sports group might have a security score of 60, a food group might have 40, and a gaming group might have 80.
- the platform divides these security scores into multiple score ranges and assigns corresponding information items to each range. For example:
- This range may correspond to a lower security level.
- the platform may extract some basic information, such as the number of people in the group and the creation time. This information is relatively public and will not disclose sensitive content.
- This range likely corresponds to a medium level of security.
- the platform may extract more information, such as the group's latest activities or discussion topics. This information can help users understand the group's activity level and discussion content.
- This range may correspond to a higher security level, and the platform may extract more detailed information, such as group rules or administrator contact information. This information helps users understand the group's management methods and participation requirements.
- This range likely corresponds to the highest security level.
- the platform may extract more sensitive information, such as the current number of members in the group and the maximum number of members allowed. This information helps users understand the size of the group and whether there is still room for new members.
- the platform When a user pauses within the target area on the first page, the platform extracts relevant information based on the target group's security score and displays it to the user. For example, if a gaming group has a security score of 80, the platform might extract information such as the current number of members and the maximum number of members, displaying this information to the user. This helps users understand the group's basic information and security level without opening the chat page, allowing them to decide whether to join the group. It also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and its flexibility in managing group information.
- the basic information of the target group is displayed when the mouse hovers around the target group name with the link mark in the session page.
- the basic information of the target group includes "Group members: 10; Has anyone joined: Yes; Group owner nickname: xxx1", etc.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- hovering the mouse over the linked target group name in the session page displays basic information about the target group. Specifically, when Object 3 hovers the mouse over the linked group name "Badminton Interest Group" sent by Object 1 in the basketball interest group's session page, the linked target subgroup names of the three target subgroups included in the badminton interest group will be displayed. These three subgroup names are "Badminton Interest Group 1,” "Badminton Interest Group 2,” and "Badminton Newcomer Training.”
- the advantage of this embodiment is that by setting up a preview function in the application for the entry link displayed as the target group name with a link mark, users can preview the basic information of the group without opening the group's session page, understand what kind of group it is, and thus decide whether to join the group. Furthermore, by setting specific content for the basic group information for single and multiple target groups, the efficiency of group information transmission and the diversity of information display can be improved.
- step 330 Detailed description of step 330
- step 330 in response to a trigger on a link tag, the session page for the target group is displayed.
- this application provides a scheme based on triggering to directly display the session page.
- step 330 specifically includes:
- the session page for the target group is displayed.
- the server when the terminal of the first object triggers the link tag through the target object, the server first detects the trigger event generated by the interaction between the target object and the link tag. Then, based on the trigger event, and with authorization, the information of each member of the target group is compared with the information of the terminal of the first object to determine whether the terminal of the first object is a member of the target group. If it is determined that the target group includes the first object, the session page of the target group is directly displayed in the application, allowing the terminal of the first object to directly view the session records of other group members and engage in conversations with other group members.
- the application when a user (the first object) clicks or touches a link in the application via their terminal, if the link points to a group (the target group), the application performs a series of steps to determine if the user has permission to view the group's session page.
- the application detects this triggering event when the user interacts with the link via their terminal. This event could be a click, touch, or other form of interaction.
- the application checks if the user has permission to view the target group's session page. This typically involves verifying whether the user is a member of the target group.
- the application may communicate with a server requesting verification of the user's membership.
- the server compares the user's terminal information with the target group's member list to determine if the user is a member of the target group. This may involve checking the user's account information, group invitation status, or other membership verification mechanisms.
- the application will directly display the target group's conversation page.
- This page typically contains information such as group history, member list, and group announcements. Users can view the conversation history of other group members and communicate with them in real time.
- the application may display a message informing the user that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This entire process ensures that only members of the target group can view and participate in the group's conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. At the same time, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Photography Enthusiasts Group" for this entry link.
- the administrator wants users who click this link to directly view the group's conversation page if they are already members of the group.
- the first object visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join Photography Enthusiasts Group” link.
- User A is interested in photography and decides to click the link.
- the application sends a trigger event to the server.
- the server first detects this trigger event and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with user A's terminal information. Assuming user A is already a member of the "Photography Enthusiasts" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. Upon receiving the notification, the application will directly display the "Photography Enthusiasts" group's conversation page. User A can view the conversation records of other group members on the conversation page and communicate with other group members in real time. If user B clicks the same link, but user B is not a member of the "Photography Enthusiasts" group, the server will detect this and notify the application.
- the application may display a message informing user B that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This ensures that only group members can view and participate in group conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. Simultaneously, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that when the terminal of the first object is detected to have triggered the link mark through the target object, and the target group is determined to include the first object, the session page of the target group is directly displayed according to the triggering operation without setting any intermediate links, so that the terminal of the first object can quickly access the session page of the target group, thereby improving the efficiency of information transmission.
- the target group including the first object is determined in the following manner:
- Step 810 Obtain the candidate terminal identifier of each candidate object terminal in the target group
- Step 820 If the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object is found to be consistent with a candidate terminal identifier, then the target group is determined to include the first object.
- Steps 810-820 are described in detail below.
- step 810 the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal in the target group are obtained.
- Candidate object terminals refer to the various object terminals that have been registered on the application and belong to the group members of the target group.
- Candidate terminal identifiers are used to identify candidate terminals in order to distinguish different candidate terminals.
- the basic information of each group in the application and the information related to group members are recorded in the server's background log. Based on this, with authorization, the information related to group members of the target group can be obtained from the server's background log, and the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal (group member) in the target group can be extracted from the information related to group members.
- obtaining the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal in the target group is a crucial step in the application. This involves identifying the terminals of group members to distinguish different member terminals.
- Each user registered on the application has a unique terminal identifier, which can be a device ID, user account ID, or other unique identifier. These identifiers are used to uniquely identify each user terminal on the server side.
- the basic group information and group member information of each group in the application are recorded in the server's background log. This information includes the group ID, group name, group description, list of group members, and their terminal identifiers. To protect user privacy and data security, group member information can only be obtained from the server's background log with authorization.
- the group member information of the target group can be obtained from the server's background log. This includes the group ID, group name, group description, and terminal identifiers of group members. From the group member information, the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal in the target group can be extracted. These identifiers are used to uniquely identify each group member's terminal in the application to facilitate operations such as message push and session management. When extracting and using these terminal identifiers, relevant privacy regulations and policies must be followed to ensure the security and privacy of user data are not compromised. Applications can obtain the terminal identifiers of individual group members within a target group, thereby enabling precise management and personalized services for group members. This not only improves the user experience of the application but also enhances group interactivity and cohesion.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join the Dance Lovers Group” for this entry link.
- the administrator wants users who click this link to directly view the group's conversation page if they are already members of the group.
- the first object visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join the Dance Lovers Group” link.
- User A is interested in dance and decides to click the link.
- the application sends a trigger event to the server.
- the server first detects this trigger event and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with user A's terminal information.
- the server will confirm this and notify the application.
- the application will directly display the "Dance Lovers" group's conversation page. User A can view the conversation history of other group members on the conversation page and communicate with other group members in real time.
- the server will detect this and notify the application.
- the application may display a message informing user B that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This design ensures that only group members can view and participate in group conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. At the same time, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
- the application can accurately identify and manage group members. Based on the basic group information and member-related information recorded in the server's backend logs, the accuracy and reliability of the data are ensured.
- the extracted candidate terminal identifiers not only distinguish different group member devices but also provide the foundation for efficient message push and session management. This precise terminal identification mechanism helps improve user experience, enhance group interactivity and cohesion, and also helps maintain group security and privacy.
- step 820 if the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object is determined to be consistent with a candidate terminal identifier, then the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object.
- the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate terminal are compared with the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object.
- a candidate terminal identifier matches the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object, it indicates that the terminal of the first object is a member of the target group, and the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object.
- no candidate terminal identifier matches the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object, it indicates that the terminal of the first object is not a member of the target group, and the target group is determined to exclude the terminal of the first object.
- the process of determining whether a user (first object) belongs to a target group in an application is as follows: The application obtains candidate terminal identifiers for all group members in the target group. These identifiers are unique and used to identify the terminal device of each group member. The application then compares these candidate terminal identifiers one by one with the terminal identifier of the first object. The comparison process is implemented by an algorithm, typically performing an exact match between the two identifier strings. If a candidate terminal identifier is found to be exactly the same as the terminal identifier of the first object during the comparison, the application can determine that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group. The determination process is based on the uniqueness and accuracy of the terminal identifiers.
- Terminal identifiers are typically generated by the application to ensure that each terminal device has a unique identifier. Therefore, by comparing terminal identifiers, it is possible to accurately determine whether a user belongs to a group. If no candidate terminal identifier is found to be the same as the first object's terminal identifier during the comparison, the application determines that the first object's terminal is not a member of the target group. This means that the user cannot view or participate in the group's sessions, thus protecting the privacy and security of the group. This is typically triggered when a user attempts to access the group session page. This ensures that only legitimate group members can access group content, while providing users with a safe and private communication environment.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group” to this entry link.
- the administrator wants users who click this link to directly view the group's conversation page if they are already members of the group.
- the first object visits the application's homepage, they see the group name with the "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group” link.
- User A is interested in technology and decides to click the link.
- the application sends a trigger event to the server.
- the server first detects this trigger event and, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with user A's terminal information. Assuming user A is already a member of the "Tech Enthusiasts" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. Upon receiving the notification, the application will directly display the "Tech Enthusiasts" group's conversation page. User A can view the conversation records of other group members on the conversation page and communicate with other group members in real time. On the other hand, if user B clicks the same link, but user B is not a member of the "Tech Enthusiasts” group, the server will detect this and notify the application.
- the application may display a message informing user B that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This ensures that only group members can view and participate in group conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. Simultaneously, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that it uses a terminal identifier comparison method to determine whether the terminal of the first object is a member of the target group.
- the comparison is simple and can determine whether the target group includes the terminal of the first object in a relatively accurate and quick manner.
- this application provides a solution that sets a confirmation step before displaying the session page, which can effectively prevent the page from being accidentally triggered and thus improve the accuracy of information display.
- step 330 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 910-920:
- Step 910 In response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, display an inquiry message
- Step 920 In response to an affirmative answer to the query message, display the session page for the target group.
- Steps 910-920 are described in detail below.
- step 910 in response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, an inquiry message is displayed.
- the query message is used to ask the terminal of the first object whether to display the session page of the target group.
- the server when the terminal of the first object triggers the link mark through the target object, the server detects this triggering event and determines through comparison that the target group includes the terminal of the first object. Then, the server displays a pop-up window on the application to the terminal of the first object to ask for a query message, so as to ask the terminal of the first object to reconfirm whether to access the session page of the target group.
- a target object typically a group administrator or other group member
- the application performs the following steps to display a prompt message:
- the application detects this trigger event when the target object clicks or touches the link marker. This event may be a click, touch, or other form of interaction.
- the application communicates with the server to request verification that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group.
- the server performs the verification based on stored group member information. If the server confirms that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group, the application displays a prompt message as a pop-up on the first object's terminal.
- This message may say: "Do you want to view the 'Target Group' session page?"
- the first object's terminal user will see this prompt message and can choose "Yes” or "No”.
- This step allows the user to make a final confirmation before accessing the group session page, increasing user control and privacy protection. If the user selects "Yes”, the application displays the target group's session page. If the user selects "No”, the application cancels the operation, and the user is not directed to the group session page. This increases user engagement and control, ensuring that the user has sufficient choice before accessing the group session page. It also enhances the user experience of the application, making users feel safer and more secure. At the same time, it demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Movie Lovers Group” for this entry link.
- the administrator wants users who are already members of the group to be able to directly view the group's session page after clicking this link.
- the first object visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join Movie Lovers Group” link.
- User A is interested in movies and decides to click the link.
- the application sends a trigger event to the server.
- the server first detects this trigger event, and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's terminal.
- the server will confirm this and notify the application.
- the application will display a pop-up message on user A's terminal asking: "Do you want to view the 'Movie Lovers' group's session page?"
- user A can choose "Yes” or "No”. If user A chooses "Yes”, the application will directly display the "Movie Lovers” group's session page.
- User A can view other group members' conversation history on the conversation page and communicate with them in real time. If User A selects "No,” the application will cancel the operation, and User A will not be redirected to the group conversation page. This ensures that users have full choice before accessing the group conversation page, increasing user engagement and control. At the same time, it also improves the application's user experience, making users feel safer and more secure.
- both user experience and data security can be improved.
- This feature relies on server-side verification of group member eligibility, ensuring that only legitimate group members receive the prompt message.
- the application provides the user with a final confirmation opportunity before accessing the group session page, enhancing user engagement and control, while simultaneously promoting effective communication and interaction among group members. This provides the application with a more secure, private, and efficient group management mechanism.
- step 920 in response to an affirmative answer to the query message, the session page for the target group is displayed.
- the session page of the target group is displayed to the terminal of the first object.
- the terminal of the first object responds negatively to the query message, indicating that the triggering of the link tag by the target object may be a mistake, and the terminal of the first object does not want to access the session page of the target group, the query message is closed, the session page of the target group is not displayed, and the page currently displayed on the application platform remains unchanged.
- the user when the terminal of the first user receives a prompt message, the user can choose whether to confirm access to the target group's session page. If the terminal user of the first user selects "Yes” or "Confirm,” the application sends this response back to the server. Upon receiving a positive response, the server verifies the validity of this selection and confirms that the user does indeed have permission to access the target group's session page. After successful verification, the application displays the target group's session page on the terminal of the first user, allowing the user to begin viewing and participating in group discussions. If the terminal user of the first user selects "No" or "Cancel,” the application sends this response back to the server.
- the server Upon receiving a negative response, the server records this selection and confirms that the user does not wish to access the target group's session page. Based on this selection, the application closes the prompt message and maintains the currently displayed page, preventing the user from being redirected to the group session page. This ensures that users have sufficient choice before accessing the group session page, avoiding inconvenience caused by accidental triggering. It improves the user experience of the application, making users feel safer and more secure. Simultaneously, it demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Travel Photography Group” for this entry link.
- the administrator wants users who are already members of the group to be able to directly view the group's session page after clicking this link.
- the first object visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join Travel Photography Group” link.
- User A is interested in travel photography and decides to click the link.
- the application sends a trigger event to the server.
- the server first detects this trigger event, and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's terminal.
- the server will confirm this and notify the application.
- the application will display a pop-up message on user A's terminal asking: "Do you want to view the 'Travel Photography' group's session page?"
- user A can choose "Yes” or "No”. If user A chooses "Yes”, the application will directly display the "Travel Photography” group's session page. User A can view other group members' conversation history on the conversation page and communicate with them in real time. If User A selects "No,” the application will close the prompt message and keep the currently displayed page unchanged. User A will not be redirected to the group conversation page and can continue browsing other content in the application.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- the application platform will display a prompt message window.
- the prompt message in the prompt message window is "Do you want to open the group 'Tennis Interest Group'?"
- the prompt message window also includes interactive "Confirm” and "Cancel” controls.
- the group members include object 3, object 5, and object 9.
- object 3 clicks the "Confirm” control in the query message window it is considered that object 3 has given a positive response, and the tennis interest group's conversation page is displayed in the application platform.
- object 3 clicks the "Cancel" control in the query message window it is considered that object 3 has given a negative response, and the query message window is closed directly.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that when the terminal of the first object is detected to have triggered the link mark through the target object, and the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object, an inquiry message window is set. After the terminal of the first object confirms again, the session page of the target group is displayed according to the triggering operation. This can reduce the possibility of displaying the session page due to accidental triggering and improve the efficiency and accuracy of information transmission.
- this application provides a scheme for setting an authorization access step when displaying the session page, enabling the session page to be displayed to the first user's terminal only after authorized access.
- step 330 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 1110-1120:
- Step 1110 In response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, send an authorization request to the second object;
- Step 1120 In response to receiving the authorization response from the second object, display the session page of the target group.
- Steps 1110-1120 are described in detail below.
- step 1110 in response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, an authorization request is sent to the second object.
- the server when the terminal of the first object triggers the link tag through the target object, the server, upon detecting this triggering event and determining through comparison that the target group does not include the terminal of the first object, firstly prompts the terminal of the first object in a pop-up window whether it requests authorization to join the target group. Then, when the terminal of the first object wishes to join the target group, it selects to request authorization. Based on this, the server will send an authorization request to the second object on behalf of the terminal of the first object, requesting to join the target group. When the second object receives the authorization request, it will perform terminal authentication on the terminal of the first object. If the authentication of the terminal of the first object is successful, it will issue an authorization response, allowing the terminal of the first object to join the target group. If the authentication of the terminal of the first object fails, it will issue a denial of authorization response, disallowing the terminal of the first object from joining the target group.
- the application when a target object triggers a link marker, if the server detects that the first object's terminal is not a member of the target group, the application will detect this triggering event when the target object clicks or touches the link marker. This event may be a click, touch, or other form of interaction. After detecting the triggering event, the application communicates with the server to request verification that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group. The server performs verification based on stored group member information.
- the application displays a pop-up message on the first object's terminal asking: "Do you want to apply to join the 'target group'?" If the first object's terminal user selects "Yes” or "Apply,” the application sends this selection back to the server.
- the server Upon receiving the application, the server sends an authorization request on behalf of the first object's terminal to a second object (group administrator or other authorized object).
- the second object Upon receiving the authorization request, the second object authenticates the first object's terminal. This may include checking the user's registration information, verifying the user's identity credentials, etc.
- the second object determines that the first object's terminal is successfully authenticated, they will issue an authorization response, allowing the first object's terminal to join the target group.
- the application receives the authorization response and adds the first object's terminal to the target group. If the second entity determines that the authentication of the first entity's terminal fails, they will issue a denial response, disallowing the first entity's terminal from joining the target group. The application will receive the denial response and notify the first entity's terminal user that the application was rejected.
- the group administrator creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Healthy Living Group” to this entry link.
- the administrator wants users who click this link tag to apply to join the group if they are not already members.
- the first object visits the application's homepage, they see the group name with the "Join Healthy Living Group” link tag.
- User A is interested in healthy living and decides to click the link tag.
- the application sends a trigger event to the server.
- the server first detects this trigger event and, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's device.
- the server will confirm this and notify the application.
- the application will display a pop-up message on user A's device asking: "Do you want to apply to join the 'Healthy Living' group?" After seeing the message, user A can choose “Yes” or “Apply”. If user A chooses "Yes”, the application will send this selection back to the server.
- the server will send an authorization request to a second entity on behalf of User A's terminal, requesting to join the "Healthy Living” group.
- the second entity the group administrator
- the second entity will authenticate User A's terminal. This may include checking the user's registration information and verifying the user's identity credentials.
- the second entity determines that User A's terminal is successfully authenticated, they will issue an authorization response, allowing User A's terminal to join the "Healthy Living” group.
- the application will receive the authorization response and add User A's terminal to the group. User A can then view other members' discussions and participate in healthy living exchanges within the group.
- the second entity determines that User A's terminal is unauthenticated, they will issue a denial response, preventing User A's terminal from joining the "Healthy Living” group.
- the application will receive the denial response and notify User A's terminal that the user application was rejected.
- a feature in the application that sends an authorization request to a second object in response to a target object's link tag
- This feature is based on server-side verification of group membership, ensuring that only legitimate users receive authorization requests.
- the application provides the user with a final confirmation opportunity before requesting to join the group, enhancing the user's sense of participation and control.
- the server sends an authorization request to the second object on behalf of the user, and the second object verifies the user's identity.
- the second object will grant authorization, allowing the user to join the group; if the verification fails, the second object will deny authorization, preventing the user from joining the group.
- This design not only improves group security but also enhances the user experience, making users feel safer and more secure. At the same time, it also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
- step 1120 in response to receiving the authorization response from the second object, the session page of the target group is displayed.
- An authorization response refers to the second object's response to the authorization request from the first object's terminal, granting permission to join the target group.
- an authorization response from the second object when an authorization response from the second object is received, it indicates that the first object's terminal is allowed to join the target group. Based on this, the server, in response to receiving the authorization response from the second object, first adds the first object's terminal as a group member of the target group and displays the target group's session page on the first object's terminal.
- a second object such as a group administrator
- the server receives the second object's authorization response, indicating that the first object's terminal is permitted to join the target group.
- the server adds the first object's terminal as a member of the target group, involving updating the group member database on the server to record the first object's terminal information.
- the server sends an instruction to the first object's terminal to display the target group's session page. This page may contain the group's history, a list of currently online members, and an input box for sending new messages.
- the first object's terminal Upon receiving the server's instruction, the first object's terminal updates the application's interface to display the target group's session page. Users can now view the group's discussions and participate in real-time communication. This ensures that only authorized users can join the group and view the group's session page, maintaining the group's security and privacy. Simultaneously, it improves the user experience, allowing users to quickly and easily join groups of interest and participate in discussions.
- the group administrator (the second object) created an entry link and set the link tag "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group”.
- the administrator wants users who click this link to apply to join the group if they are not already members.
- the first object visits the application's homepage, they see the group name with the "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group” link.
- User A is interested in technology and decides to click the link.
- the application sends a trigger event to the server.
- the server first detects this trigger event and, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's device.
- the server will confirm this and notify the application.
- the application will display a pop-up message on user A's device asking: "Do you want to apply to join the 'Tech Enthusiasts' group?" After seeing the message, user A can choose "Yes” or “Apply”. If user A chooses "Yes”, the application will send this selection back to the server.
- the server sends an authorization request to a second entity on behalf of User A's device, requesting to join the "Tech Enthusiasts” group.
- the second entity the group administrator authenticates User A's device.
- the application receives the authorization response and adds User A's device to the group. Once User A's device is added to the group, an instruction is sent to User A's device requesting the display of the "Tech Enthusiasts" group's conversation page. Upon receiving the instruction, User A's device updates the application's interface, displaying the group's conversation page. User A can now view the group's history, the list of currently online members, and participate in real-time discussions.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that by setting up an authorization access step when displaying the session page, if the target group does not include the first object's terminal, authorization access to the session page for the target group is requested for the first object's terminal based on the triggering of the link tag by the target object. After authorization, the first object's terminal is included in the target group's membership scope, and the target group's session page is displayed for the first object's terminal. This allows the first object's terminal to quickly join the target group after authorization, meeting the normal session communication needs of the first object's terminal and improving the information transmission efficiency of the application.
- the authorization response is generated in the following manner:
- Step 1210 Obtain the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the terminal of the first object
- Step 1220 Determine the terminal score of the first object's terminal based on terminal reputation and creation timestamp
- Step 1230 If the terminal score is greater than the predetermined score, generate an authorization response.
- Steps 1210-1230 are described in detail below.
- step 1210 the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the terminal of the first object are obtained.
- Terminal credit rating is used to indicate the creditworthiness of the terminal of the first object.
- a timestamp is created to indicate the point in time when the first object's terminal was registered with the application.
- the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the first object terminal can be directly obtained from the background log with authorization.
- obtaining the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of a first object's terminal is a crucial process within the application. This process helps assess the terminal's creditworthiness and determine its registration time within the application.
- Terminal reputation is a metric used to measure the first object's terminal's creditworthiness within the application. It may be based on various factors, such as the terminal's historical behavior, compliance with application rules, and engagement.
- the application server records reputation information for each terminal. This information may include the terminal's historical activity records, violation records, user feedback, etc. With authorization, the server can access these records and directly obtain the first object's terminal reputation from the background logs.
- a creation timestamp is a timestamp indicating the first object's terminal's registration time within the application.
- the application server also records the registration time for each terminal. This timestamp information is typically stored in background logs. With authorization, the server can directly obtain the first object's terminal's creation timestamp from these logs. Before obtaining this sensitive information, the application must ensure that it has obtained the necessary authorization. This may include user consent, compliance with data protection regulations, etc. The purpose of licensing is to protect user privacy and ensure that this information can only be accessed and used legally and legitimately. When acquiring and processing this information, applications must take appropriate security measures to ensure the security and integrity of the data. This may include data encryption, access control, and regular auditing.
- the application evaluates the credibility of user devices and records user registration times.
- a first user User A
- the application needs to evaluate User A's device credibility and registration time.
- the application sends a request to the server to evaluate User A's device credibility.
- the server checks the background logs for User A's device credibility records. These records may include User A's historical behavior, engagement, compliance with community rules, etc. Based on this information, the server calculates User A's device credibility score. The higher the score, the better User A's device credibility.
- the server checks the creation timestamp of User A's device to determine User A's registration time.
- the creation timestamp records the exact time User A first registered with the application, which helps assess User A's loyalty and engagement with the application.
- the application ensures that it has obtained User A's authorization, such as through a user agreement or privacy policy. This ensures that the application's access to and use of user data is legal and transparent.
- the application decides whether to allow user A to access advanced courses. If user A has a high reputation and a long registration time, the application may allow access; if the reputation is low or the registration time is short, the application may restrict access or require the user to provide more information.
- the application's security and user experience can be significantly improved.
- This functionality based on server records of terminal reputation and registration time, ensures data accuracy and real-time performance. By directly retrieving this information from background logs, the application can quickly and efficiently assess the terminal's creditworthiness and registration time, enabling more informed decisions such as access control and risk management. This not only enhances application security but also improves the user experience, making users feel safer and more secure. Simultaneously, it demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
- the functionality to obtain terminal reputation and creation timestamps provides the application with a powerful tool to better manage user terminals, protect user data, and improve overall service quality.
- step 1220 the terminal score of the terminal of the first object is determined based on the terminal reputation and the creation timestamp.
- the terminal score is used to indicate the authorization score for adding the terminal of the first object to the target group.
- a first score is determined based on the terminal's reputation; then, a second score is determined based on the creation timestamp. Finally, a weighted sum of the first and second scores is performed to obtain the terminal score.
- a function calculation method is used.
- the terminal's reputation is substituted into a preset function as an independent variable, and the output of the preset function is used as the first score.
- the preset function is an increasing function; the higher the terminal's reputation, the higher the first score.
- the time difference between the creation timestamp and the current time is first calculated. Then, a lookup table is used to retrieve the mapping table between time difference intervals and candidate scores. The time difference interval within this interval is determined, and the candidate score corresponding to that interval is used as the second score. A larger time difference results in a larger second score.
- determining the terminal score of a terminal for a first target based on terminal reputation and creation timestamp is a crucial decision-making process within the application. This process helps assess the terminal's eligibility and authorization rating for joining a target group.
- Terminal reputation is a metric that measures a terminal's creditworthiness, reflecting its behavioral history within the application, rule compliance, and user feedback.
- the application can employ a pre-defined increasing function. This function takes terminal reputation as its independent variable and outputs a corresponding first score. Since the function is increasing, a higher terminal reputation results in a higher first score.
- the creation timestamp records the terminal's registration time within the application, helping to assess its activity and loyalty.
- the application To convert the creation timestamp into a quantifiable score, the application first needs to calculate the time difference between the current time and the creation timestamp.
- the application can use a lookup table, referencing a predefined mapping table of time difference intervals and candidate scores. This table divides the time difference into different intervals, each corresponding to a candidate score. A larger time difference results in a higher second score.
- the application performs a weighted sum to arrive at the final terminal score.
- the weighted sum operation involves assigning different weights to the first and second scores, reflecting their respective importance in the final terminal score. For example, if terminal credibility is considered more important than registration time, the first score might have a higher weight.
- the final terminal score is a weighted sum of the first and second scores, comprehensively considering both the terminal's creditworthiness and registration time, providing a holistic basis for authorization decisions.
- the application will calculate the time difference between the current time and the creation timestamp, resulting in two years. Then, the application will refer to a mapping table of time difference intervals and candidate scores. For example, the mapping table might look like this: 0-1 years: 10 points; 1-2 years: 20 points; 2-3 years: 30 points; 3 years and above: 40 points.
- User A's second score is 20 points.
- the group administrator will decide whether to authorize User A to join the group based on the final score. If the group's authorization threshold is 60 points, then User A's final score is 56 points, which is below the threshold, and the group administrator may reject User A's joining application. If the group administrator believes that User A's final score is close to the threshold, they may request the user to provide more information or conduct an evaluation.
- a first weight and a second weight are determined.
- the first weight indicates the importance of terminal reputation in the terminal rating
- the second weight indicates the importance of the creation timestamp in the terminal rating.
- the sum of the first weight and the second weight is 1. Then, the product of the first weight and the first score, and the product of the second weight and the second score are added together to obtain the terminal score of the first object's terminal.
- step 1230 if the terminal score is greater than a predetermined score, an authorization response is generated.
- the predetermined score is used to measure whether the terminal of the first object meets the conditions for joining the target group.
- the terminal score is compared with a predetermined score.
- the terminal score is determined to be greater than the predetermined score, it indicates that the terminal of the first target is relatively safe and meets the conditions for joining the target group, and an authorization response is generated.
- the terminal score is determined to be less than or equal to the predetermined score, it indicates that the terminal of the first target is of higher risk and does not meet the conditions for joining the target group, and a denial response is generated.
- the application needs to set a predetermined score, which serves as a benchmark for whether a terminal meets the conditions for joining a target group.
- the application compares the calculated terminal score with the predetermined score to determine if the terminal meets the conditions for joining the group. If the terminal score is greater than the predetermined score, the application generates an authorization response. This indicates that the terminal of the first target is relatively safe and meets the conditions for joining the target group.
- the authorization response typically contains an instruction to allow joining the group, and the application sends this response to the terminal of the first target, enabling it to join the group and participate in the discussion. If the terminal score is less than or equal to the predetermined score, the application generates a denial response.
- the terminal of the target poses a greater risk and does not meet the conditions for joining the target group.
- the denial response typically contains an instruction to disallow joining the group, and the application sends this response to the terminal of the first target, notifying it that it cannot join the group. Regardless of whether an authorization response or a denial response is generated, the application notifies the terminal of the result. If it is an authorization response, the user will be able to see the group's conversation page and participate in the discussion; if it is a denial response, the user will receive a notification that their terminal does not meet the conditions for joining the group. Based on the terminal score-based authorization mechanism, the application can effectively manage group members, ensuring the security and professionalism of the group. At the same time, it also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
- Advanced Investment Discussion a professional discussion platform for experienced investors only.
- the group administrator sets a predetermined score; only users with a terminal score exceeding this score can join the group.
- the application first evaluates User A's terminal score. Let's say User A's terminal score is 75, and the predetermined score is 70. The application compares User A's terminal score (75) with the predetermined score (70). The comparison shows that User A's terminal score is greater than the predetermined score. Because User A's terminal score is greater than the predetermined score, the application generates an authorization response.
- the authorization response contains instructions to allow User A to join the group, and the application sends this response to User A's terminal. After receiving the authorization response, User A's terminal displays the group's session page. User A can now view the group's history, the list of currently online members, and participate in live discussions.
- the application evaluates User B's terminal score. Assume User B's terminal score is 65, and the predetermined score is 70. The application compares User B's terminal score (65) with the predetermined score (70). The comparison shows that User B's terminal score is lower than the predetermined score. Because User B's terminal score is lower than the predetermined score, the application generates a denial-of-authorization response. The denial-of-authorization response contains an instruction not to allow User B to join the group, and the application sends this response to User B's terminal.
- User B's terminal After receiving the denial-of-authorization response, User B's terminal displays a notification stating that their terminal does not meet the conditions for joining the group. User B cannot join the group and cannot view the group's session page. How can a terminal score-based authorization mechanism help group administrators manage group members and ensure the quality and security of the group?
- the advantage of this embodiment is that by comprehensively determining the terminal score of the first object's terminal based on the terminal reputation and creation timestamp, and by using a scoring method to quantify the terminal verification process of the first object's terminal, the convenience and reliability of terminal verification of the first object's terminal can be improved, thereby improving the reliability and security of group access authorization for the first object's terminal.
- multiple groups can be aggregated into a single entry link for sharing, based on the settings of the second object. This allows other objects to preview basic information such as the group names of multiple groups through a single entry link.
- the target group of this application includes multiple target subgroups, and the entry link is synthesized based on the sub-entry links created by the second object for each target subgroup.
- the method of creating sub-entry links for each target subgroup is essentially the same as the method of creating entry links for the target group.
- the basic information of the target group includes the target sub-group name of each target sub-group.
- the target sub-group name is associated with the target sub-group when the second object creates the entry link, and the target sub-group name has a link tag.
- step 330 specifically includes:
- the session page of the target subgroup is displayed.
- the various scenarios in which the session page of the target subgroup is displayed based on the triggering of the link marker on the target subgroup name are similar to steps 910-920 and 1110-1120 described above. To save space, these details will not be repeated.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- Object 3 hovers the mouse over the group name "Badminton Interest Group” (linked by Object 1) in the basketball interest group's chat page, the linked names of the three target subgroups included in the badminton interest group will be displayed. These subgroup names are "Badminton Interest Group 1,” “Badminton Interest Group 2,” and “Badminton Newcomer Training.”
- the application platform will display the basic information of that target subgroup: "Group members: 5; Already joined: Yes; Group owner nickname: AA1.”
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2 and Object 3.
- the application platform will display the basic information of the target subgroup: "Group members: 32; Have they joined: No; Group owner nickname: AA2".
- group member AA1 includes object 3, object 11, object 2, object 4, and object 5. Based on the comparison of the basic information of each target subgroup, object 3 double-clicks the link marker of the target subgroup "" in the application platform to trigger this link marker. At this time, the session page of the target subgroup "Badminton Interest Group 1" is displayed in the application platform.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that, based on the settings of the second object, multiple groups are aggregated into a single entry link for sharing. This allows other objects to preview the group names of multiple groups through a single entry link, and based on the interaction with the group names in different groups, preview the basic information of each group and trigger the link to join the conversation page of that group. This improves the efficiency of displaying and transmitting group information.
- Figure 14 illustrates the process executed by the application server when displaying the session page of the target group.
- the terminal of the first object clicks the link to edit the target group on the first page.
- the server retrieves the group information of the target group.
- it checks whether the terminal of the first object is already in the group.
- it requests to join the target group.
- it determines whether the joining was successful.
- step 106 if the terminal of the first object is already in the group, or has successfully joined the target group, it opens the session page of the target group after a second confirmation.
- the server When the terminal of the first object clicks the link to the target group on the first page, triggering the link, the server first retrieves the group information of the target group and determines whether the terminal of the first object is already in the group based on the group information.
- the specific implementation process is similar to steps 810-820 above.
- the session page of the target group is opened after secondary confirmation.
- the specific implementation process is similar to steps 910-920 above. If it is determined that the terminal of the first object is not in the target group, and the terminal of the first object requests to join the target group, it is determined whether the terminal of the first object has successfully joined. After confirming successful joining, the session page of the target group is opened after secondary confirmation by the terminal of the first object.
- the specific implementation process is similar to steps 1110-1120 above. For the sake of brevity, it will not be described in detail.
- embodiments of this application provide a link creation scheme based on random numbers and encoding rules, which can improve link creation efficiency and make entry links different for different groups.
- the process of creating an entry link for the target group specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 1510-1540:
- Step 1510 Display the target group's session page to the second object
- Step 1520 In response to the link creation operation of the second object in the session page of the target group, obtain the target group name of the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object;
- Step 1530 Generate a group string based on the target group name and terminal identifier
- Step 1540 If the group string is determined to satisfy the first condition, then encode the group string into an entry link and display the entry link for the second object.
- Steps 1510-1540 are described in detail below.
- step 1510 the target group's session page is displayed to the second object.
- the server when a second object logs into the application platform and wants to access the session page of its target group, the server responds to the second object's access request and displays the target group's session page to the second object.
- the target group's session page includes an interactive control for generating an entry link to the target group.
- displaying the target group's session page to a second user is a key interactive process within the application, allowing the user to access and participate in group discussions.
- the second user (User B) opens the application and logs into the application platform.
- the login process typically involves verifying the user's credentials, such as username and password, to ensure user security.
- User B wants to access the session page of their target group.
- User B selects the appropriate group in the application's interface or clicks on the group name in the group list, thereby sending an access request to the server.
- the server verifies whether User B has permission to access the target group's session page.
- the server sends the session page content to User B's terminal.
- the session page typically includes the group's history, a list of currently online members, message input boxes, and various interactive controls, such as send message buttons and file upload buttons.
- the server includes a link generation interactive control. This control allows User B to generate an entry link for inviting others to join the target group. When User B clicks the generate link interactive control, the server generates a unique invitation link and displays it on the session page. User B can then share this link with others, inviting them to join the target group.
- User B can now view and participate in the target group's discussions and communicate with other members in real time. By generating and sharing invitation links, User B can easily invite other users to join the group, expanding the group's influence and activity.
- the application's ability to display the target group's session page to a second party and provide the functionality to generate invitation links enhances the user's interactive experience and group activity.
- the session page displays the group's history, including travel photos, adventure plans, and discussion topics shared by members. There is also an online member list on the page, showing the currently online group members.
- the server includes an interactive control to generate an invitation link. This control might be a button labeled "Generate Invitation Link.” When user B clicks this button, the server generates a unique invitation link and displays it on the conversation page.
- This link can be used to invite others to join the "City Explorers" group.
- the conversation page of the target group is displayed to the second user, providing the functionality to generate an invitation link.
- This design not only enhances the interactivity and social nature of the application but also helps users expand their social circles, improving the overall user experience.
- the application can significantly enhance the user's social interaction experience and group activity.
- the server responds to their access request, displaying a conversation page containing elements such as history, a list of online members, and message input boxes.
- This process not only allows users to participate in group discussions in real time but also empowers them to easily invite others to join the group through the generation of interactive link controls. This not only enhances users' sense of belonging and participation but also expands the group's influence through social sharing mechanisms, thereby increasing the overall user stickiness and activity of the application.
- step 1520 in response to the link creation operation of the second object in the session page of the target group, the target group name of the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object are obtained.
- the terminal identifier of the second object is used to mark the second object in order to distinguish the second object from other object terminals.
- the second object when the second object wants to create an entry link to the target group, the second object will trigger a link generation interaction control in the target group's session page. Based on this, the server will receive the trigger event of the second object's link generation interaction control and, in response to the link creation operation of the second object in the target group's session page, obtain the target group name of the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object from the background log.
- the process involves multiple steps to ensure that the link generation is secure and traceable.
- the second object clicks or triggers an interactive control, such as a button or link generator, that dynamically generates the link on the target group's session page.
- Sending a trigger event sends a trigger event to the server, notifying the server that the second object wants to generate an entry link.
- the server responds to the second object's link creation operation.
- the server retrieves the name of the target group from its database or group management module. This name is the group's identifier, used to display and identify the group in the link.
- the server obtains the second object's terminal identifier from background logs or user session management. This identifier is unique and used to mark the second object's terminal to distinguish it from other users' terminals. The terminal identifier is not only used to mark the second object but may also be used to detect link generation and usage, ensuring the link's security and traceability.
- the server uses the obtained target group name and the second object's terminal identifier to generate a unique entry link. This link contains the necessary information to allow other users to join the target group. The generated entry link is sent back to the second object's terminal, displayed on the session page, or provided to the second object in other ways (such as by copying to the clipboard).
- the server retrieves the group name of "Photography Enthusiasts Community" from its database; this is the group's identifier and will be used in the invitation link.
- the server obtains User B's terminal identifier from the background logs. This identifier is unique and used to identify User B's terminal, ensuring the security and traceability of the invitation link.
- the server uses the retrieved group name and User B's terminal identifier to generate a unique invitation link. This link contains the necessary information, allowing other users to join the "Photography Enthusiasts Community" group.
- the generated invitation link is sent back to User B's device and displayed on the session page. User B can copy this link and share it with his friends via email, social media, or other means.
- step 1530 a group string is generated based on the target group name and the terminal identifier.
- a group string is a randomly generated string.
- Group strings are typically unique, identifying the target group; different groups will have different group strings.
- a pseudo-random number generation algorithm or a predetermined encryption algorithm can be used to generate a random string based on the target group name and terminal identifier, and this random string can be used as the group string for the target group.
- the group string for the target group must be unique.
- the predetermined encryption algorithm includes, but is not limited to, the SHA-256 encryption algorithm.
- a unique group string based on the target group name and terminal identifier
- obtain the name of the target group such as "Photography Enthusiast Community”.
- obtain the terminal identifier of the second object such as a user's device ID or a unique session token.
- Select a predetermined encryption algorithm, such as SHA-256 to generate the group string.
- SHA-256 is a secure hash algorithm that generates fixed-length hash values with good uniqueness and tamper resistance. Hash the combined string using the selected encryption algorithm.
- hash "Photography Enthusiast Community Device ID12345” using the SHA-256 algorithm to generate a unique hash value.
- This string generated based on the target group name and terminal identifier, is unique and can be used to identify the target group.
- its uniqueness should be verified. This can be done by checking if the same group string already exists in the database. If it does, the group string needs to be regenerated.
- the verified group string is stored in the database and associated with the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object. The group string is used to identify the target group and referenced when needed (such as when generating an invitation link).
- step 1540 if it is determined that the group string satisfies the first condition, the group string is encoded into an entry link, and the entry link is displayed for the second object.
- the first condition is used to implement conflict detection of group strings, in order to determine whether the group string of the target group is unique and whether it is a duplicate of the group string of other groups.
- the group string is checked for uniqueness based on a first condition. If the randomly generated group string is unique, then the group string satisfies the first condition.
- the group string is encoded using URL encoding or a custom encoding rule to generate the entry link of the target group, wherein the entry link of the target group is unique.
- the uniqueness of the group string must be ensured before generating the entry link to avoid conflicts with group strings from other groups.
- a group string is generated based on the target group name and terminal identifier. This can be achieved by hashing the combined string using an encryption algorithm such as SHA-256.
- the uniqueness of the generated group string is checked. This typically involves querying a database to confirm whether the group string already exists. If the group string already exists in the database, it means it conflicts with another group's group string and does not meet the first condition. If the group string does not exist in the database, it means it is unique and meets the first condition. Once it is determined that the group string meets the first condition (i.e., it is unique), it can be encoded into an entry link.
- Encoding can use standard URL encoding rules to ensure the group string is securely transmitted in the URL. Custom encoding rules can also be used to increase the complexity of the entry link and prevent easy guessing or abuse.
- the encoded group string is then combined with the application's domain name or a specific routing path to create the entry link for the target group. For example, if the application's domain name is ⁇ example.com ⁇ and the encoded group string is ⁇ abc123 ⁇ , then the entry link might be ⁇ https://example.com/join/abc123 ⁇ .
- the generated entry link is displayed to the second object. This can be achieved by displaying a button or link in the application's interface. The second object can copy this entry link and share it with others via email, social media, or other means, inviting them to join the target group.
- the application ensures that each entry link is unique and secure, effectively preventing group string conflicts, while providing users with a convenient invitation mechanism.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that by setting up a link generation interactive control in the conversation page of each group, group members can directly trigger the link generation interactive control to generate an entry link for a single group, improving operational convenience. Furthermore, when generating the entry link, the server generates a unique random string based on the group name and the terminal identifier of the terminal triggering the control. This random string is encoded according to predetermined rules and a fixed format, ensuring that entry links for different groups are different and that the generated entry links have good format consistency.
- the process of determining that the group string satisfies the first condition specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 1610-1630:
- Step 1610 Obtain the pre-defined relationship lookup table
- Step 1620 Compare the group string with each candidate string
- Step 1630 If the group string is determined to be different from all candidate strings, then the group string satisfies the first condition.
- Steps 1610-1630 are described in detail below.
- step 1610 a predetermined relationship lookup table is obtained.
- the predefined relationship lookup table is used to indicate the correspondence between each candidate group and the candidate string.
- Candidate groups refer to other session groups created within the application platform.
- Candidate strings refer to group strings of other session groups in the application platform.
- the predefined relationship lookup table is stored by the server in the background.
- the candidate groups and their corresponding candidate strings in the predefined relationship lookup table are continuously updated as entry links for each group are created.
- the candidate strings for each candidate group in the application are recorded in the predefined relationship lookup table. Therefore, with authorization, the predefined relationship lookup table maintained by the server can be directly accessed.
- the pre-defined relationship lookup table is a key data structure in the application platform used to manage the mapping between groups and group strings.
- the pre-defined relationship lookup table is a data structure that records the mapping relationship between all candidate groups and their corresponding candidate strings in the application platform.
- Each candidate group has a unique candidate string, generated using a specific algorithm to uniquely identify the group.
- Candidate groups refer to other session groups already created in the application platform. These groups may have different topics, purposes, and members.
- the candidate string is the group string for each candidate group, generated by combining the group name and terminal identifier, and processed using an encryption algorithm.
- the pre-defined relationship lookup table is typically stored in a backend database on the server.
- the server Whenever a new group entry link is created, the server generates a new group string, associates it with the corresponding group, and then updates the pre-defined relationship lookup table. This update is dynamic; as groups are created and entry links are generated, the pre-defined relationship lookup table is continuously updated to reflect the latest group and group string mapping relationship.
- applications can access the pre-defined relationship lookup table maintained by the server. This is typically achieved through API requests.
- the application sends a request to the server to retrieve the pre-defined relationship lookup table data. After verifying the validity of the request, the server returns the contents of a predefined relationship lookup table. Once the application obtains this table, it can use it to verify the uniqueness of group strings, ensuring no conflicts occur when generating new entry links.
- the application can also use the predefined relationship lookup table to parse entry links, determine the group corresponding to the link, and thus allow users to join the appropriate group.
- step 1620 the group string and each candidate string are compared to determine whether the group string is unique.
- ensuring the uniqueness of the group string is crucial in the application, as it directly relates to group identification and security.
- the application generates a group string based on the target group's name and the terminal identifier of a second object. This is typically achieved by hashing the combined string using an encryption algorithm such as SHA-256.
- the application needs to access a predefined lookup table maintained by the server, which contains all existing candidate groups and their corresponding candidate strings. This can be achieved by sending an API request to the server, which, after verifying the request's validity, returns the predefined lookup table data.
- the application compares the generated group string with each candidate string in the predefined lookup table. If the generated group string is different from all candidate strings, then the group string is unique, satisfying the first condition.
- the group string already exists, does not satisfy the first condition, and needs to be regenerated. If the group string is unique, the application can continue to use it to generate entry links. If the group string is not unique, the application needs to regenerate the group string and compare it again until a unique string is found. To improve comparison efficiency, applications can use data structures such as hash tables to store candidate strings in a predefined lookup table, allowing the comparison process to be completed in constant time. Applications can also check the uniqueness of group strings immediately upon generation, rather than generating them first and then comparing them, to reduce unnecessary computation.
- step 1630 if it is determined that the group string is different from all candidate strings, then the group string is determined to satisfy the first condition.
- the group string is determined to satisfy the first condition. If the group string is determined to be the same as one of the candidate strings, indicating that the group string conflicts with a candidate string and the group string is not unique, and the same random string represents at least two groups, then the group string is determined to not satisfy the first condition.
- a new random string is then generated based on the target group name and the terminal identifier of the second object. If the generated random string is unique, it is encoded as the group string of the target group.
- the application needs to ensure that the generated group string is unique.
- User A wants to create a new group called “Vegetarianism Exchange.” He fills in the group name in the application and submits a creation request.
- the application generates a group string based on the group name and A's device ID. For example, it might use the SHA-256 algorithm to hash "Vegetarianism Exchange” and User A's device ID, generating a unique hash value as the group string.
- the application needs to retrieve a predefined lookup table maintained by the server.
- the application compares the generated group string with all candidate strings in the predefined lookup table. This can be done by iterating through the predefined lookup table, comparing the group string with each candidate string one by one. If the generated group string is different from all candidate strings, then the group string is unique, satisfying the first condition. If the generated group string is identical to any candidate string, it means that the group string already exists, does not meet the first condition, and needs to be regenerated. Once the group string is determined to be unique, the application encodes it into an entry link.
- the group string is encoded using URL encoding rules and combined with the application's domain name to generate a unique entry link.
- the application displays the generated entry link to user A.
- User A can share this link with others, inviting them to join the "Vegetarian Exchange" group.
- a predefined lookup table is retrieved, the group string is compared with candidate strings, the uniqueness of the group string is determined, and a unique entry link is generated. This design ensures that each group has a unique identifier, prevents group string conflicts, and improves application reliability and user experience.
- Figure 17 shows a schematic diagram of the predefined relationship lookup table.
- the candidate group string for each candidate group is the key
- the group name for each candidate group is the value, so that the group name and other group information of each candidate group can be found through the candidate group string.
- the candidate group string "K77qzd” is used to indicate the badminton interest group
- the candidate group string "7qe31a5" is used to indicate the tennis interest group
- the candidate group string "Zk485qz” is used to indicate the basketball interest group
- the candidate group string "Yq142nm” is used to indicate the table tennis interest group.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that by using a predetermined relationship lookup table to store the group information and group strings of each group in key-value pairs, and using the group string as the search keyword and the group information as the value, it is possible to find and retrieve the group information of each group based on the group string (or entry link), thereby improving the efficiency of group information retrieval and transmission. Furthermore, the relationship lookup table can be used to check whether each newly generated group string conflicts with an existing group string, ensuring that the group string (or entry link) of each group is unique.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- Object 1 opens the basketball interest group's session page, if it wants to generate an entry link for the basketball interest group, Object 1 will click the "Generate Link” button on the session page, causing the server to create an entry link for the basketball interest group.
- the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3.
- Object 1 can copy the entry link and paste it into any editing area in the application platform.
- Figure 19 illustrates the process executed by the application server when creating an entry link for a target group.
- the second object selects the target group to generate a shareable link; in step 202, it uploads information such as the target group's name and the second object's terminal identifier; in step 203, it generates a unique group string and stores the group name and other information using this group string as the key; in step 204, it concatenates the group strings into a group link and displays the group link.
- the second object selects to generate a shareable link (entry link) for the target group on the target group's session page.
- it uploads the stored target group's name, the second object's terminal identifier, and other information to the server.
- the server generates a unique group string based on these information and stores the group name and other information as the value, using this group string as the key. Finally, it concatenates the group strings into a group link and displays the group link, the specific implementation of which is similar to steps 1510-1540 above. For brevity, these details are not elaborated further.
- the process of creating the target group specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2010-2040:
- Step 2010 In response to the link creation request from the second object, display the link creation page;
- Step 2020 Based on the input operation of the second object on the link creation page, determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup;
- Step 2030 Generate a group string based on multiple subgroup links and the terminal identifier of the second object
- Step 2040 If it is determined that the group string meets the first condition, then encode the group string into an entry link and display the entry link for the second object.
- Steps 2010-2040 are described in detail below.
- step 2010 in response to the link creation request of the second object, the link creation page is displayed.
- the link creation page is used to provide objects with the ability to integrate multiple groups into one large group and create entry links for this large group, so as to realize the aggregation and nesting of groups, allowing objects to quickly access multiple groups.
- the second object when a second object logs into the application platform and wants to share multiple groups through a single entry link, the second object sends a link creation request, triggering a composite group link generation process on the application platform. Based on this, the server responds to the second object's link creation request by displaying a link creation page on the application platform, allowing the second object to add group information for the multiple groups to be shared within the same entry link.
- This group information includes, but is not limited to, the group links (entry links) for each group and the group names.
- the application when a second object wants to share multiple groups through a single entry link, the application needs to provide a link creation page so that the object can consolidate multiple groups and create a single entry link for a large group.
- the second object logs into the application platform and accesses the interface where it wants to create a composite group link.
- the object clicks the "Create Link” button or option to send a link creation request.
- the application Upon receiving the link creation request, the application triggers the composite group link generation process. This is designed to allow objects to consolidate multiple groups into a single large group and create a unified entry link.
- the server responds to the link creation request by displaying the link creation page on the application platform.
- the link creation page provides a user interface that allows objects to add and manage the groups to be consolidated.
- the object adds group information for the multiple groups to be consolidated on the link creation page.
- Group information includes, but is not limited to, the group links (entry links) for each group and the group name.
- the object can view and manage the list of added groups.
- the object can add new groups and delete or edit existing group information.
- the application collects all added group information and generates a composite group link.
- the composite group link allows the object to access multiple groups through a single entry link. When other users click this link, they will be able to access all the integrated groups, enabling aggregation and nesting between groups.
- the object can share the generated composite group link with other users via email, social media, or other means. It allows for quick invitations to join multiple groups, improving the efficiency of social interaction.
- the application can respond to the second object's link creation request, displaying the link creation page and allowing the object to integrate multiple groups into a unified entry link.
- step 2020 the subgroup links of each target subgroup are determined based on the input operations of the second object on the link creation page.
- Subgroup links are used to connect to the session page of the target subgroup, allowing objects to quickly navigate to or access the session page of the target subgroup.
- the target group of the entry link to be created by the second object is the parent group of multiple groups to be shared, and the multiple groups to be shared through a single entry link are multiple target subgroups of the target group.
- the second object enters the group information of each target subgroup (e.g., group name, entry link of the target subgroup, etc.) on the link creation page.
- the server extracts the content entered by the second object for each target subgroup, obtaining the subgroup links of each target subgroup.
- the second object when creating an entry link that can be shared across multiple groups, the second object needs to specify details of each target subgroup on the link creation page.
- the second object logs into the application platform and accesses the link creation page. This page provides an interface for entering and managing group information.
- the object enters the group information for each target subgroup on the link creation page. This information typically includes the group name and the entry link for the target subgroup. The object can enter this information manually or select and add it from an existing list of groups in the application.
- the server responds to the second object's input by parsing and extracting the input.
- the server identifies and extracts the entry link for each target subgroup; these links are URLs that connect to the target subgroup's session page.
- the server may validate each link.
- the validation process may include checking whether the link points to a valid group page and whether the object has permission to access these groups.
- the server associates these links with the target groups and stores them in the application's database. Based on the stored subgroup links, the server generates a composite group link.
- This link contains information about the entry links to all target subgroups.
- a composite group link can be a unique URL that, when clicked, displays a list of all target subgroups or directly navigates to the conversation pages for those groups.
- the second object can share the generated composite group link with other users through various channels such as email and social media. Users receiving the link can click it to quickly access all integrated target subgroups and enjoy a convenient group access experience.
- steps 2030-2040 The specific implementation process of steps 2030-2040 is similar to that of steps 1530-1540 above. The difference is that the group string in step 1530 is generated based on the target group name and terminal identifier, while the group string in step 2030 is generated based on multiple subgroup links and terminal identifiers. For the sake of brevity, these details will not be elaborated further.
- the application platform displays a page for creating a composite group link.
- the page displays a type editing area for selecting the information entry type for subgroups and a value editing area for entering specific information about the subgroups.
- the page provides a group deletion control for deleting group information from a specific subgroup and a group addition control for adding a subgroup to the group information entry area.
- the second object selects "Subgroup Name" as the information entry type for a subgroup in the type editing area of the first row, and then enters "Basketball Interest Group" in the value editing area of the first row.
- a pop-up window will display a list of all groups in the application platform when the second object clicks the value editing area of the first row.
- This list includes groups such as the Basketball Interest Group and the Badminton Interest Group. If the second object selects the Basketball Interest Group from the list, "Basketball Interest Group” will be displayed in the value editing area of the first row, allowing the second object to quickly select the group to add. Based on the second object's selection, the value editing area corresponding to the "Subgroup Name" will be automatically filled.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that it provides a way to package group links of multiple groups into a new entry link, realizing the combination of group links of multiple target subgroups. It can generate a single entry link based on the group name or group link of each target subgroup, allowing objects to quickly access multiple groups by clicking the nested link (entry link). It also allows objects to share multiple groups with other objects while sharing a single entry link, which brings convenience to objects to quickly access multiple groups and improves the efficiency of group information transmission.
- the server's processing method will vary depending on the group information entered by the second object.
- determining the subgroup links for each target subgroup includes:
- a subgroup string is generated based on the subgroup name, and the subgroup string is encoded into a subgroup link.
- a subgroup link of the target subgroup needs to be generated based on the subgroup name.
- the specific implementation process is similar to the method of generating the entry link in steps 1530-1540 above. To save space, it will not be described in detail.
- the subgroup link is subject to a second verification, and the subgroup link that passes the second verification is used to generate the group string.
- the entered subgroup link needs to be formatted and validated for correctness to ensure that the entered subgroup link is correct. Then, the validated subgroup link and other target subgroup links are combined to form a group link list, and a group string is generated using the multiple subgroup links in the group link list.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that it takes into account the different group information of the input target subgroups and sets up corresponding processing steps. For the input subgroup name, it converts it into a subgroup link; for the input subgroup link, it performs a verification operation, thereby generating the subgroup links of each target subgroup that need to be combined, so as to combine multiple subgroup links into a single entry link and improve the efficiency of group management.
- the process of performing a second verification on subgroup links specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2210-2250:
- Step 2210 Validate the format of subgroup links
- Step 2220 If the format verification is successful, obtain the predefined relationship lookup table
- Step 2230 Parse the subgroup string of the target subgroup from the subgroup link
- Step 2240 Compare the subgroup string with each candidate string
- Step 2250 If the subgroup string is determined to be the same as a candidate string, then the second verification is deemed successful.
- Steps 2210-2250 are described in detail below.
- the predefined relationship lookup table is used to indicate the correspondence between each candidate group and the candidate string, which has been schematically described in Figure 17 above and will not be repeated here.
- step 2210 firstly, the required link format for the entry links of each group in the application platform is invoked. Next, based on the required link format for the entry links of each group, the subgroup links are format-validated to determine whether their format matches the standard link format.
- entry links for various groups typically need to adhere to certain format specifications to ensure link consistency and identifiability.
- the application platform first needs to define the format of the entry links. This format may include the protocol (such as HTTP or HTTPS), domain name, path, and query parameters.
- the application stores the defined link format in a configuration file or database on the server for retrieval and verification when needed. When an entry link needs to be generated or verified, the application retrieves the predefined link format from the configuration file or database.
- Format validation of subgroup links is a crucial step in ensuring link validity and security.
- the application uses regular expressions or other string manipulation methods to check whether subgroup links conform to the defined link format. For example, regular expressions can be used to match the link's protocol, domain name, path, and query parameters.
- the application iterates through each subgroup link, performing format validation one by one. If the subgroup link format matches the defined link format, validation passes. If the subgroup link format does not match, validation fails, and the application needs to notify the user or take other measures. For subgroup links that pass validation, the application can continue to use them to generate compound groups.
- the application may need to prompt the user to re-enter or correct the link format.
- the application can automate the format validation process, providing real-time feedback to the user on whether the links meet the requirements. This can be achieved through front-end JavaScript validation or back-end server validation.
- step 2220 if the format of the subgroup link matches the link format, the format verification is deemed successful, indicating that the input subgroup link conforms to the predetermined group link format, and the correctness and existence of the subgroup link need to be verified. Based on this, the predetermined relationship lookup table is obtained in the manner described in step 1610 above. If the format of the subgroup link does not match the link format, the format verification is deemed unsuccessful, and the second verification is deemed unsuccessful, prompting the second object to re-enter the correct subgroup link.
- the application determines that the format validation has passed.
- the input subgroup link is structurally correct and conforms to the application's expected format.
- the application still needs to verify the correctness and existence of the subgroup link. This is to ensure that the link is not only structurally correct but also actually points to a valid group.
- the application retrieves a predefined lookup table maintained by the server, following the previously defined steps. This lookup table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings.
- the application compares the group identifier in the subgroup link with the record in the predefined lookup table. If the group identifier exists in the lookup table and the corresponding information matches, then the validation passes.
- the validation fails. If the correctness and existence validations pass, the application can continue to use the subgroup link to generate composite groups. If the validation fails, the application needs to notify the second object and request that the correct subgroup link be re-entered. If the format of the subgroup link does not match the defined link format, the application determines that the format validation has failed. The input link is structurally incorrect and does not conform to the application's expected format. For subgroup links that fail format validation, the application needs to remind the second object to re-enter the correct link. This can be achieved by displaying error messages, highlighting input fields, or providing formatting guidelines. To improve user experience, the application can provide real-time formatting validation feedback to help secondary users correct input errors promptly. This can be achieved through front-end JavaScript validation, checking the format of entered links in real time.
- step 2230 since the subgroup link consists of a fixed string and a group string, the subgroup link is split according to the link format to parse out the subgroup string of the target subgroup.
- the application needs to explicitly specify the format of the subgroup link.
- the fixed string portion includes the protocol (e.g., ⁇ https:// ⁇ ), the domain name (e.g., ⁇ example.com ⁇ ), and the path (e.g., ⁇ /group ⁇ ).
- the application uses string manipulation methods to split the subgroup link into the fixed string and the group string. Once the link is split, the application can extract the group string portion.
- the group string is ⁇ abc123 ⁇ .
- the application needs to decode them to obtain the original group string. For example, if the group string is ⁇ abc%20123 ⁇ , the application needs to decode it to ⁇ abc 123 ⁇ .
- the application may need to validate it to ensure it conforms to the expected format and length. Once validation is successful, the application can store the group string in memory or use it directly to access the target subgroup's session page. If errors occur during the splitting or extraction of group strings, the application needs to capture these errors and provide appropriate feedback to the user. For example, if a link is incorrectly formatted, the application can display an error message prompting the user to re-enter the correct link.
- step 2240 for each candidate string, the candidate string is compared with the subgroup string to determine whether the subgroup string in the input subgroup link is a group string of a certain group.
- the application needs to access a predefined lookup table maintained by the server.
- This lookup table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings.
- the application extracts the subgroup string from the input subgroup link. This is typically done by parsing specific parts of the link. For each candidate string, the application compares it with the subgroup string. This can be done with a simple string comparison operation. If the subgroup string is exactly the same as a candidate string, then it can be determined that the subgroup string in the input subgroup link corresponds to the group to which the candidate string belongs. Once a matching candidate string is found, the application can record the matching result, including the group's identifier, name, and other information.
- the application can perform appropriate actions, such as allowing the user to access the group's session page or adding the group to a compound group link. If the subgroup string does not match any of the candidate strings, then it can be determined that the subgroup string in the input subgroup link does not correspond to any existing group. The application needs to notify the user that the input link may be incorrect or the group may not exist.
- the application can use a data structure (such as a hash table) to store the candidate strings in the predefined lookup table, allowing the comparison process to be completed in constant time.
- step 2250 if the subgroup string is determined to be the same as a candidate string, it indicates that the input subgroup string actually exists and can point to a group, then the second verification is determined to be successful. If the subgroup string is determined to be different from any candidate string, it indicates that the input subgroup string does not exist and cannot point to a group, then the second verification is determined to be unsuccessful.
- the application compares the input subgroup string with each candidate string in a predetermined lookup table.
- This lookup table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings. If the subgroup string is exactly the same as a candidate string, it can be determined that the input subgroup string exists and can point to the corresponding group. When the subgroup string matches a candidate string, the application determines that the second verification has passed.
- the input subgroup link is valid and can be used to access or merge the corresponding group.
- the application can record information about the matched groups, such as the group identifier, name, etc. This information can be used for operations such as generating compound group links or allowing users to access groups.
- the application determines that the second verification has failed. This means that the input subgroup link is invalid and cannot be used to access or merge groups. In the case of a failed second verification, the application needs to notify the user that the input link may be incorrect or the group may not exist. This can be achieved by displaying an error message, prompting the user to re-enter the link, etc.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that it performs format verification on the input subgroup links, and when it is determined that the input subgroup links conform to the predetermined group link format, it performs correctness and existence verification on the subgroup links according to the candidate strings of each candidate group stored in the predetermined relationship lookup table, so as to determine that the input subgroup links are real and can accurately point to a certain group in the application, thereby improving the accuracy of link creation.
- the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group supplement control.
- the group information addition window is used to provide the object with the name of the subgroup or the link of the subgroup to which the target subgroup is added.
- the group addition control is used to add a group information entry area for a subgroup, thereby increasing the number of target subgroups in the target group to be merged.
- step 2020 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2310-2320:
- Step 2310 Based on the triggering of the group supplement control by the second object, display the supplement window on the link creation page;
- Step 2320 Based on the input operations of the second object in the multiple group information addition window and supplement window, determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup.
- Steps 2310-2320 are described in detail below.
- step 2310 if the second object has filled in the subgroup information of each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area displayed on the link creation page, but has not yet filled in the subgroup information of all target subgroups to be included, the second object will trigger the group supplement control on the link creation page. Based on this, the server will detect the trigger event of the group supplement control and continue to display more supplement windows on the link creation page so that the second object can continue to enter the subgroup information of the target subgroups to be included.
- a second object when a second object edits subgroup information on a link creation page, it may need to add multiple target subgroups. If the second object has not yet completed the input of all target subgroups, it can continue adding more subgroup information by triggering a group add-on control.
- the second object enters the information for each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area of the link creation page. This information typically includes the group name and entry link.
- the second object deems it necessary to add more target subgroups, it triggers a group add-on control on the link creation page. This is usually a button or link labeled "Add More," "Add Group,” etc.
- the server detects the triggering event of the group add-on control via front-end JavaScript or other technologies.
- the second object can continue to enter the subgroup information of the target subgroups to be included in a new add-on window. This process can be repeated multiple times until the second object has completed the input of all target subgroups.
- the application performs format validation and existence validation to ensure that the entered information is valid and correct. Once the validation passes, the server stores this information in the database and associates it with the composite group link. Once all target subgroup information has been entered and verified, the server generates a composite group link containing entry links for all target subgroups.
- the application allows second objects to dynamically add information for multiple target subgroups on the link creation page, enhancing user interface flexibility and user experience.
- step 2320 is similar to the two cases of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup mentioned above, and will not be repeated here for the sake of saving space.
- the second object after the second object enters the subgroup information for the basketball and tennis interest groups in the two editing areas displayed on the link creation page, and needs to enter more subgroup information, the second object will click the group supplement control (the plus button in the figure) on the link creation page. At this time, the link creation page will display a new editing line (supplement window). Based on this, the second object selects "Subgroup Name” in the type editing area of the newly added editing line and enters "Badminton Interest Group” in the value editing area, so that the generated entry link can simultaneously navigate other objects to the basketball, tennis, and badminton interest groups.
- group supplement control the plus button in the figure
- the advantage of this embodiment is that it provides an input channel for adding target subgroups to a target group, and can flexibly and freely determine the number of target subgroups to be included in a target group, thereby improving the flexibility and diversity of group management.
- the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group deletion control.
- the group deletion control is used to delete the group information of a subgroup, thereby reducing the number of target subgroups to be merged into the target group.
- step 2020 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2410-2420:
- Step 2410 Based on the triggering of the group deletion control by the second object, delete one of the multiple group information addition windows;
- Step 2420 Based on the input operation of the second object in the window of the retained multiple group information, determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup.
- Steps 2310-2320 are described in detail below.
- step 2410 after the second object fills in the subgroup information of each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area displayed on the link creation page, it finds that some subgroups are not suitable for placement in the target group.
- the second object will trigger the group deletion control corresponding to the target subgroup to be deleted on the link creation page. Based on this, the server will detect the triggering event of the group deletion control for the target subgroup and clear an editing row corresponding to the target subgroup and the subgroup information in the editing row on the link creation page.
- a second object when creating a composite group link, may find that some of its added subgroups are not suitable to be included in the target group.
- the second object can remove these unsuitable subgroups by triggering a group deletion control.
- the second object enters or selects information for each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area of the link creation page. This information typically includes the group name and entry link. After completing the input of all subgroup information, the second object may review these subgroups and find that some are not suitable to be included in the target group. For each unsuitable subgroup, the second object triggers the corresponding group deletion control on the link creation page.
- the server detects the triggering event of the group deletion control via front-end JavaScript or other technologies, involving sending an AJAX request to the server to notify it that specific subgroup information needs to be deleted. Once the server detects the triggering event, it responds to the request, clearing an editing line corresponding to the target subgroup on the link creation page, along with all subgroup information in that line. After deleting the subgroup information, the server updates the composite group link, removing the entry link of the deleted subgroup. This ensures that the final generated composite group link only includes target subgroups deemed appropriate by the second object.
- the server stores the updated subgroup information in the database and associates it with the composite group link.
- the server generates a composite group link containing entry links to all selected target subgroups. This link can be shared by the second object with other users, allowing them to access all integrated target subgroups.
- the application allows the second object to dynamically remove inappropriate subgroups during link creation, improving the flexibility of the user interface and user experience. This design allows users to easily adjust and optimize the composite group link, ensuring it only contains relevant and appropriate target subgroups.
- step 2420 is similar to the two cases of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup mentioned above, and will not be repeated here for the sake of saving space.
- the second object wants the generated entry link to simultaneously navigate to the tennis interest group and the badminton interest group for other objects, but not to the basketball interest group.
- the second object will click the group deletion control (the minus button in the figure) after the editing row of the "basketball interest group” subgroup information, deleting the basketball interest group's group information on the link creation page, retaining only the tennis interest group's group link and the badminton interest group's group name.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that it provides an input channel for the group information of the target subgroups of the target group to be deleted, and can flexibly and freely adjust the target subgroups to be included in a target group, thereby improving the flexibility of group management.
- step 401 the second object inputs multiple group names or group links, and a link title to generate a shareable link; in step 402, the group names are converted into group links; in step 403, the list of multiple group links, the terminal identifier of the second object, the link title, and other information are uploaded; in step 404, a unique group string is generated, and the group string is used as a key to store the group list and other information; in step 405, the group strings are concatenated into an entry link and displayed.
- the second object inputs multiple group names or group links, and the link title of the target group on the link creation page to generate a shareable link, the specific implementation process of which is similar to steps 2010-2020 above.
- the application's front-end server converts the group name input by the second object into a group link, and uploads a list of multiple group links, the second object's terminal identifier, terminal title, etc., to the application's back-end server.
- the back-end server generates a unique group string and stores the group list and other information using this group string as the key.
- the group strings are concatenated into an entry link, which is then displayed.
- the specific implementation process is similar to steps 2030-2040 above. To save space, it will not be elaborated further.
- this application embodiment provides a scheme for identifying and displaying entry links based on regular expressions, which can improve the efficiency of entry link location and the efficiency of group information transmission.
- the process of displaying the entry link as the target group name with a link tag specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2710-2720:
- Step 2710 Based on the predefined regular expression, locate the entry link on the first page and extract the group string from the entry link;
- Step 2720 If it is determined that the group string is associated with the target group name of the target group, then the entry link is displayed as the target group name with the link tag.
- Steps 2710-2720 are described in detail below.
- a predefined regular expression is used to indicate the correct representation of the entry link of the target group.
- the predefined regular expression can be understood as the correct link format of the entry link.
- the server checks if any content on the first page matches a predetermined regular expression.
- the content matching the predetermined regular expression is used as the located entry link.
- the entry link is split and the string is extracted according to the required link format to obtain the group string within the entry link.
- step 2720 firstly, a candidate string matching the group string is searched in the predetermined relationship object table, and the group information corresponding to the candidate string matching the group string is extracted.
- the specific process is similar to steps 2220-2250 above.
- the target group name associated with the group string is determined, and the group name is parsed from the extracted group information to construct the target group name with a link tag.
- the entry link is displayed as the target group name with the link tag.
- the application first searches a predefined relational object table based on the group string.
- This table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings. If a candidate string matching the group string is found, the application extracts the group information corresponding to that candidate string. This information typically includes the group name, group identifier, etc. From the extracted group information, the application parses the group name. This is usually a field in the group information that directly represents the group name. The application combines the parsed group name with an entry link to construct a target group name with a link tag. This typically involves wrapping the group name in an HTML ⁇ a> ⁇ tag, making it a clickable link. The application displays the target group name with the link tag to the user. When the user clicks this link, they are directed to the corresponding target group's session page.
- step 301 the terminal of the first object browses the first page on the application platform, triggering the location and parsing of the entry link on the first page; in step 302, the entry link of the target group is located and identified on the first page; in step 303, the entry link is parsed to obtain the group string; in step 304, the detailed information of the target group is obtained based on the group string; in step 305, the basic group information of the target group is obtained and displayed.
- the process executed by the application server when parsing the entry link and displaying it as the target group name with a link tag is as follows: Specifically, firstly, the terminal of the first object browses the first page on the application platform. Based on this, the server detects the browsing event of the terminal of the first object on the first page, triggering the location and parsing of the entry link on the first page. The server locates and identifies the entry link of the target group on the first page and parses the entry link to obtain the group string, the specific process of which is similar to step 2710 above.
- the server obtains the detailed information of the target group based on the group string, retrieves the group name of the target group from the detailed information, and displays the group name to the terminal of the first object.
- the specific process is similar to step 2720 above.
- the server obtains the basic group information of the target group from the detailed information and displays the basic group information.
- the specific process is similar to step 340 above. For the sake of brevity, it will not be described in detail again.
- the advantage of this embodiment is that it identifies and locates entry links based on regular expressions, extracts group strings from entry links, and then extracts and displays the group information (target group name, basic group information, etc.) of the target group based on the group strings. This improves the efficiency of locating entry links and the efficiency of transmitting group information.
- step 2901 the second target terminal inputs the group names and group link requests of multiple groups into the application platform to generate a composite group link;
- step 2902 the application platform converts the input group name into a group link via the server
- step 2903 the server combines the converted group links with the input group links to form a group link list
- step 2904 the server generates a random string based on the group link list, the terminal identifier of the second object terminal, etc.
- step 2905 the server performs key collision detection on the random string. If the detection passes, the random string and the group link list are stored as key-value pairs.
- step 2906 the server encodes the random string into an entry link for a compound group and returns it to the application platform;
- step 2907 the application platform displays the entry link of the composite group to the second object terminal
- step 2908 the first object's terminal logs into the application and accesses the first page
- step 2909 the application platform displays the entry link of the composite group as the group name with a link tag
- step 2910 the mouse of the first object's terminal hovers around the group name with the link tag
- step 2911 the application platform displays the names of the multiple subgroups included in the composite group, with links attached.
- step 2912 the mouse of the first object's terminal hovers around a subgroup name with a link tag
- step 2913 the application platform displays the basic information of the subgroup.
- step 2914 the terminal of the first object double-clicks the link marker of the subgroup name of the subgroup
- step 2915 the application platform determines through the server whether the terminal of the first object is in the subgroup
- step 2916 the server returns the detection results
- step 2917 if it is determined that the terminal of the first object is a member of the subgroup, the subgroup's session page is displayed.
- steps 2901-2907 are similar to steps 2010-2040 in the above embodiments.
- the specific processes of steps 2908-2909 are similar to step 320 in the above embodiments.
- the specific processes of steps 2910-2913 are similar to step 330 in the above embodiments.
- the specific processes of steps 2914-2917 are similar to steps 1110-1120 in the above embodiments. To save space, they will not be described in detail here.
- steps in the above flowcharts are shown sequentially according to the arrows, these steps are not necessarily executed in the order indicated by the arrows. Unless explicitly stated in this embodiment, there is no strict order restriction on the execution of these steps, and they can be executed in other orders. Moreover, at least some steps in the above flowcharts may include multiple steps or multiple stages. These steps or stages are not necessarily completed at the same time, but can be executed at different times. The execution order of these steps or stages is not necessarily sequential, but can be performed alternately or in turn with other steps or at least some of the steps or stages in other steps.
- the permission or consent of the target object when processing is required based on data related to the characteristics of the target object, such as target object attribute information or a set of attribute information, the permission or consent of the target object will be obtained first. Furthermore, the collection, use, and processing of this data will comply with relevant laws, regulations, and standards. In addition, when embodiments of this application require obtaining target object attribute information, separate permission or consent from the target object will be obtained through pop-ups or redirection to a confirmation page. Only after obtaining the target object's separate permission or consent will the necessary target object-related data for the normal operation of the embodiments of this application be obtained.
- Figure 30 is a structural schematic diagram of a group display device 3000 in an application provided in this application embodiment.
- the group display device 3000 in the application includes:
- the first display unit 3010 is configured to display a first page in the application.
- the first page contains the target group name of the target group.
- the target group name has a link tag for the entry link of the target group.
- the entry link is created by a second object in the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
- the second display unit 3020 is configured to display basic information of the target group in response to a dwell operation triggered around the target group name.
- the target area is an area in the first page where the distance between the display position of the target group name and the target area is less than a distance threshold.
- the basic information is used to prompt the first object whether the link mark has been triggered.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured to display the session page of the target group in response to a trigger on a link tag.
- the target group name on the first page is determined in the following way:
- the link tag of the entry link will be constructed as the target group name.
- the target group name on the first page is determined in the following way:
- the group name specified for the terminal of the first object when the second object creates the entry link is determined as the target group name corresponding to the terminal of the first object.
- different group names are specified for different object terminals.
- the target group name on the first page is determined in the following way:
- the candidate group name that corresponds to the first object preference of the terminal of the first object is determined as the target group name.
- the multiple candidate group names are associated with the entry link when the second object creates the entry link.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
- the session page for the target group is displayed.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured to: obtain the candidate terminal identifiers of the terminals of each candidate object in the target group; if it is determined that the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object is consistent with one of the candidate terminal identifiers, then it is determined that the target group includes the first object.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
- a query message is displayed, wherein the query message is used to ask the terminal of the first object whether to display the session page of the target group;
- the session page for the target group is displayed.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
- an authorization request is sent to the second object
- the session page for the target group is displayed.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
- the authorization request is sent to the second object.
- the basic information of the target group includes at least one of the information set when the second object creates the target group and the information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on the basic information extraction rules.
- the target group includes multiple target subgroups, and the entry links are synthesized based on the sub-entry links created for each target subgroup by the second object;
- the basic information of the target group includes the target subgroup name of each target subgroup.
- the target subgroup name is associated with the target subgroup when the second object creates the entry link.
- the target subgroup name has a link tag.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
- the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
- the entry link for the target group is created in the following way:
- the group string is encoded into an entry link, and the entry link is displayed for the second object.
- the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
- the group string If the group string is determined to be different from all candidate strings, then the group string satisfies the first condition.
- the target group includes multiple target subgroups
- the entry link for the target group is created in the following way:
- a display module (not shown) is configured to display a link creation page in response to a link creation request from a second object
- the determination module (not shown) is configured to determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup based on the input operation of the second object in the link creation page;
- a generation module (not shown) is configured to generate a group string based on multiple subgroup links and the terminal identifier of the second object;
- An encoding module (not shown) is configured to encode the group string into an entry link and display the entry link for the second object if it is determined that the group string meets the first condition.
- determining the subgroup links for each target subgroup includes:
- a subgroup string is generated based on the subgroup name, and the subgroup string is encoded into a subgroup link;
- the subgroup link is subject to a second verification, and the subgroup link that passes the second verification is used to generate the group string.
- a second verification of subgroup links includes:
- a predefined relationship lookup table is obtained, which indicates the correspondence between each candidate group and the candidate string.
- the second verification is considered successful.
- the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group supplement control
- the module (not shown) is configured as follows:
- the supplement window is displayed on the link creation page
- the subgroup links of each target subgroup are determined.
- the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group deletion control
- the module (not shown) is configured as follows:
- the subgroup links of each target subgroup are determined.
- the target group name is displayed in the following manner:
- the entry link will be displayed as the target group name with the link tag.
- the target group including the terminals of the first object is determined by the following:
- the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object.
- the authorization response of the second object is generated in the following manner:
- the terminal score of the first object's terminal is determined based on terminal reputation and creation timestamp
- the terminal includes: a radio frequency (RF) circuit 3110, a memory 3115, an input unit 3130, a display unit 3140, a sensor 3150, an audio circuit 3160, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) module 3170, a processor 3180, and a power supply 3190, among other components.
- RF radio frequency
- the terminal structure shown in Figure 31 does not constitute a limitation on a mobile phone or computer, and may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or have different component arrangements.
- the RF circuit 3110 can be configured to receive and transmit signals during information transmission or calls. Specifically, it receives downlink information from the base station and processes it with the processor 3180; in addition, it transmits uplink data designed to be sent to the base station.
- the memory 3115 can be configured to store software programs and modules, and the processor 3180 executes various functional applications and data processing of the target terminal by running the software programs and modules stored in the memory 3115.
- the input unit 3130 can be configured to receive input numeric or character information, and to generate key signal inputs related to the settings and function control of the target terminal.
- the input unit 3130 may include a touch panel 3131 and other input devices 3132.
- Display unit 3140 can be configured to display input or provided information, as well as various menus of the target terminal.
- Display unit 3140 may include display panel 3141.
- Audio circuitry 3160, speaker 3161, and microphone 3162 provide an audio interface.
- the processor 3180 included in the terminal can execute the group display method in the application of the previous embodiment.
- the terminals in this application embodiment include, but are not limited to, mobile phones, computers, intelligent voice interaction devices, smart home appliances, vehicle terminals, and aircraft.
- the embodiments of this invention can be applied to various scenarios, including but not limited to data security, blockchain, data storage, and information technology.
- FIG 32 is a structural block diagram of a portion of the server in an application implementing the group display method of this application.
- the server can vary significantly due to different configurations or performance, and may include one or more central processing units (CPUs) 3222 (e.g., one or more processors) and memory 3232, and one or more storage media 3230 (e.g., one or more mass storage devices) for storing application programs 3242 or data 3244.
- the memory 3232 and storage media 3230 may be temporary or persistent storage.
- the program stored in the storage media 3230 may include one or more modules (not shown in the figure), each module including a series of instruction operations on the server.
- the CPU 3222 may be configured to communicate with the storage media 3230 and execute the series of instruction operations in the storage media 3230 on the server.
- the server may also include one or more power supplies 3226, one or more wired or wireless network interfaces 3250, one or more input/output interfaces 3258, and/or one or more operating systems 3241, such as Windows ServerTM, Mac OS XTM, UnixTM, LinuxTM, FreeBSDTM, etc.
- operating systems 3241 such as Windows ServerTM, Mac OS XTM, UnixTM, LinuxTM, FreeBSDTM, etc.
- the central processing unit 3222 in the server can be configured to execute the group display method in the application of the present application.
- This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium configured to store program code, which is configured to execute the group display method in the applications of the foregoing embodiments.
- This application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program.
- a processor of a computer device reads and executes the computer program, causing the computer device to perform the group display method in the application described above.
- At least one (item) means one or more, and “more than” means two or more.
- “And/or” is used to describe the relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. For example, “A and/or B” can represent three cases: only A exists, only B exists, and both A and B exist simultaneously, where A and B can be singular or plural. The character “/” generally indicates that the preceding and following related objects are in an “or” relationship. "At least one (item) of the following” or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
- At least one (item) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, "a and b", “a and c", “b and c", or "a and b and c", where a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
- the disclosed systems, apparatuses, and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative; for instance, the division of units is only a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed.
- the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, or indirect coupling or communication connection between apparatuses or units, and may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate.
- the components shown as units may or may not be physical units; that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
- the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
- the integrated unit can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional unit.
- the integrated unit is implemented as a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- This computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods of the various embodiments of this application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes various media capable of storing program code, such as USB flash drives, portable hard drives, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks, or optical disks.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computing Systems (AREA)
- Information Retrieval, Db Structures And Fs Structures Therefor (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
Abstract
Description
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-reference to related applications
本申请基于申请号为202410602103.9,申请日为2024年05月15日的中国专利申请提出,并要求该中国专利申请的优先权,该中国专利申请的全部内容在此引入本申请作为参考。This application is based on and claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 202410602103.9, filed on May 15, 2024, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
本申请涉及数据处理技术领域,特别是涉及一种应用程序中的群组展示方法、装置、存储介质及计算机程序产品。This application relates to the field of data processing technology, and in particular to a group display method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product in an application.
在应用程序中,应用程序的用户经常被分成群组。在应用程序中管理群组时,可以在应用程序的固定搜索区域中输入所要搜索的群组的群组名称,从而查找到目标群组,也可以不搜索群组而直接利用群组链接进入群组(例如其它用户发送的消息中包含目标群组的群组链接)。在后一种方式中,用户只能看到链接,必须在点进链接后才知道是怎样的一个群组,才能了解群组的基本信息。群组管理效率和信息传递效率低。In applications, users are often divided into groups. When managing groups within an application, users can either enter the group name in a fixed search area to find the target group, or directly access the group via a group link (e.g., a message from another user containing a link to the target group). In the latter method, users only see the link and must click it to learn about the group and its basic information. This results in low efficiency in group management and information delivery.
本申请实施例提供了一种应用程序中的群组展示方法、装置、存储介质及计算机程序产品,它能够提高信息传递效率。This application provides a group display method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product in an application, which can improve information transmission efficiency.
根据本申请实施例的一方面,提供了一种应用程序中的群组展示方法,应用于第一对象的终端,所述方法包括:According to one aspect of the embodiments of this application, a group display method in an application is provided, applied to a terminal of a first object, the method comprising:
在所述应用程序中显示第一页面,所述第一页面包含目标群组的目标群组名称,所述目标群组名称带有所述目标群组的入口链接的链接标记,所述入口链接由所述目标群组中的第二对象创建,并在创建时关联于所述目标群组的目标群组名称;The application displays a first page containing the target group name of the target group, the target group name having a link tag for an entry link of the target group, the entry link being created by a second object in the target group and associated with the target group name of the target group at the time of creation;
响应于在所述目标群组名称周围触发的停留操作,显示目标群组的基本信息;In response to a dwell action triggered around the target group name, basic information about the target group is displayed;
响应于针对所述链接标记的触发,显示所述目标群组的会话页面。In response to a trigger on the link tag, the session page for the target group is displayed.
根据本申请实施例的一方面,提供了一种应用程序中的群组展示装置,应用于第一对象的终端,所述装置包括:According to one aspect of the embodiments of this application, a group display device in an application is provided, applied to a terminal of a first object, the device comprising:
第一显示模块,配置为在所述应用程序中显示第一页面,所述第一页面包含目标群组的目标群组名称,所述目标群组名称带有所述目标群组的入口链接的链接标记,所述入口链接由所述目标群组中的第二对象创建,并在创建时关联于所述目标群组的目标群组名称;The first display module is configured to display a first page in the application, the first page containing the target group name of the target group, the target group name having a link tag for an entry link of the target group, the entry link being created by a second object in the target group and associated with the target group name of the target group at the time of creation;
第二显示模块,配置为响应于在所述目标群组名称周围触发的停留操作,显示目标群组的基本信息;The second display module is configured to display basic information about the target group in response to a dwell operation triggered around the target group name;
第三显示模块,配置为响应于针对所述链接标记的触发,显示所述目标群组的会话页面。The third display module is configured to display the session page of the target group in response to a trigger on the link tag.
根据本申请实施例的一方面,提供了一种电子设备,包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器存储有计算机程序,所述处理器执行所述计算机程序时实现如上所述的应用程序中的群组展示方法。According to one aspect of the present application, an electronic device is provided, including a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program, and the processor executes the computer program to implement the group display method in the application described above.
根据本申请实施例的一方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如上所述的应用程序中的群组展示方法。According to one aspect of the embodiments of this application, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the storage medium storing a computer program that, when executed by a processor, implements the group display method in the application described above.
根据本申请实施例的一方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,所述计算机程序被计算机设备的处理器读取并执行,使得该计算机设备执行如上所述的应用程序中的群组展示方法。According to one aspect of the embodiments of this application, a computer program product is provided, the computer program product including a computer program that is read and executed by a processor of a computer device, causing the computer device to perform the group display method in the application described above.
本申请实施例中,在用户(第一对象的终端)访问某个具有群组链接(入口链接)的第一页面时,将第一页面中的群组链接显示成带链接标记的目标群组名称,此时,用户可以直观地知道这个入口链接是代表哪个群组,使第二对象所创建和分享的入口链接更加的具象化。另外,本申请实施例中,还设定了当停留在这个目标群组名称的周围时,自动为用户显示目标群组的群组基本信息,使用户在不触发入口链接并打开目标群组的会话页面的前提下,能预览到目标群组的目标群组的基本信息,通过预览到的目标群组的基本信息来了解到这个群组是怎样的群组,从而确定自己是否要进入到该群组的会话页面里。最后,在确定要进入群组的会话页面时,触发第一页面里的链接标记进入到目标群组的会话页面,能提高群组信息传递效率。In this embodiment, when a user (the terminal of the first object) accesses a first page with a group link (entry link), the group link on the first page is displayed as the target group name with a link marker. At this time, the user can intuitively know which group this entry link represents, making the entry link created and shared by the second object more concrete. Furthermore, this embodiment also sets up automatic display of the target group's basic information when the user hovers around the target group name. This allows the user to preview the basic information of the target group without triggering the entry link and opening the target group's conversation page. By previewing the basic information, the user can understand what kind of group it is and determine whether they want to enter the group's conversation page. Finally, when the user decides to enter the group's conversation page, triggering the link marker on the first page to enter the target group's conversation page improves the efficiency of group information transmission.
本申请实施例的其他特征和优点将在随后的说明书中阐述,并且,部分地从说明书中变得显而易见,或者通过实施本申请实施例而了解。本申请实施例的目的和其他优点可通过在说明书、权利要求书以及附图中所特别指出的结构来实现和获得。Other features and advantages of the embodiments of this application will be set forth in the following description, and will be apparent in part from the description, or may be learned by practicing the embodiments of this application. The objects and other advantages of the embodiments of this application may be realized and obtained by means of the structures particularly pointed out in the description, claims, and drawings.
附图用来提供对本申请技术方案的进一步理解,并且构成说明书的一部分,与本申请的实施例一起用于解释本申请的技术方案,并不构成对本申请技术方案的限制。The accompanying drawings are used to provide a further understanding of the technical solutions of this application and constitute a part of the specification. They are used together with the embodiments of this application to explain the technical solutions of this application and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions of this application.
图1是根据本申请的实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法应用的系统的体系构架图;Figure 1 is a system architecture diagram of the group display method applied in an application according to an embodiment of this application;
图2A-图2D示出了根据本申请的实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法应用在基于会话群组触发群组显示场景的示意图;Figures 2A-2D illustrate schematic diagrams of the group display method in an application according to an embodiment of the present application, applied in a scenario where group display is triggered based on a session group;
图2E-图2H示出了根据本申请的实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法应用在基于公告信息触发群组显示场景的示意图;Figures 2E-2H illustrate schematic diagrams of the group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application being applied in a scenario where group display is triggered based on announcement information;
图3是根据本申请的一个实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的流程图;Figure 3 is a flowchart of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application;
图4A-图4B是根据本申请的一个实施例的对第一对象的终端启用名称显示、和不启用名称显示的实现过程示意图;Figures 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of enabling and disabling name display on a terminal of a first object according to an embodiment of this application;
图5A-图5C是根据本申请的一个实施例的将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称的实现过程示意图;Figures 5A-5C are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying an entry link as a target group name with a link tag according to an embodiment of this application;
图6A-图6C是根据本申请的一个实施例的根据对象偏好将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称的实现过程示意图;Figures 6A-6C are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying entry links as target group names with link tags according to object preferences in one embodiment of this application;
图7是根据本申请的一个实施例的将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称的实现过程示意图;Figure 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating the implementation process of displaying an entry link as a target group name with a link tag according to an embodiment of this application;
图8是根据本申请的一个实施例的确定目标群组包括第一对象的终端的流程图;Figure 8 is a flowchart of a terminal that determines a target group including a first object according to an embodiment of this application;
图9是根据本申请的一个实施例的显示目标群组的会话页面的流程图;Figure 9 is a flowchart of a session page displaying a target group according to an embodiment of this application;
图10A-图10B是根据本申请的一个实施例的显示目标群组的会话页面的实现过程示意图;Figures 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying a session page for a target group according to an embodiment of this application;
图11是根据本申请的另一个实施例的显示目标群组的会话页面的流程图;Figure 11 is a flowchart of a session page displaying a target group according to another embodiment of this application;
图12是根据本申请的一个实施例的生成授权应答的流程图;Figure 12 is a flowchart of generating an authorization response according to an embodiment of this application;
图13A-图13C是根据本申请的一个实施例的显示子群组的会话页面的实现过程示意图;Figures 13A-13C are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of displaying a session page for a subgroup according to an embodiment of this application;
图14是根据本申请的一个实施例的显示目标群组的会话页面的整体流程图;Figure 14 is an overall flowchart of a session page displaying a target group according to an embodiment of this application;
图15是根据本申请的一个实施例的创建入口链接的流程图;Figure 15 is a flowchart of creating an entry link according to an embodiment of this application;
图16是根据本申请的一个实施例的确定群组字符串满足第一条件的流程图;Figure 16 is a flowchart of determining whether a group string satisfies a first condition according to an embodiment of this application;
图17是根据本申请的一个实施例的预定关系对照表的结构示意图;Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a predetermined relationship lookup table according to an embodiment of this application;
图18A-图18B是根据本申请的一个实施例的创建入口链接的实现过程示意图;Figures 18A and 18B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of creating an entry link according to an embodiment of this application;
图19是根据本申请的一个实施例的创建入口链接的整体流程图;Figure 19 is an overall flowchart of creating an entry link according to an embodiment of this application;
图20是根据本申请的另一个实施例的创建入口链接的流程图;Figure 20 is a flowchart of creating an entry link according to another embodiment of this application;
图21A-图21B是根据本申请的另一个实施例的创建入口链接的实现过程示意图;Figures 21A and 21B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of creating an entry link according to another embodiment of this application;
图22是根据本申请的一个实施例的对子群组链接进行第二验证的流程图;Figure 22 is a flowchart of a second verification of subgroup links according to an embodiment of this application;
图23是根据本申请的一个实施例的确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接的流程图;Figure 23 is a flowchart of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup according to an embodiment of this application;
图24是根据本申请的另一个实施例的确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接的流程图;Figure 24 is a flowchart of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup according to another embodiment of this application;
图25A-图25B是根据本申请的另一个实施例的确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接的实现过程示意图;Figures 25A and 25B are schematic diagrams illustrating the implementation process of determining subgroup links of each target subgroup according to another embodiment of this application;
图26是根据本申请的另一个实施例的创建入口链接的整体流程图;Figure 26 is an overall flowchart of creating an entry link according to another embodiment of this application;
图27是根据本申请的一个实施例的将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称的流程图;Figure 27 is a flowchart of displaying an entry link as a target group name with a link marker according to an embodiment of this application;
图28是根据本申请的另一个实施例的展示群组名称和群组基本信息的整体流程图;Figure 28 is an overall flowchart of displaying group name and basic group information according to another embodiment of this application;
图29是根据本申请的一个实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的实施细节示意图;Figure 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating the implementation details of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application;
图30是根据本申请的一个实施例的应用程序中的群组展示装置的模块图;Figure 30 is a block diagram of a group display device in an application according to an embodiment of this application;
图31是根据本申请的一个实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的终端结构图;Figure 31 is a terminal structure diagram of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application;
图32是根据本申请的一个实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的服务器结构图。Figure 32 is a server structure diagram of a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application.
为了使本申请的目的、技术方案及优点更加清楚明白,以下结合附图及实施例,对本申请进行详细说明。应当理解,此处所描述的具体实施例仅用以解释本申请,并不用于限定本申请。To make the objectives, technical solutions, and advantages of this application clearer, the following detailed description is provided in conjunction with the accompanying drawings and embodiments. It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are merely illustrative and not intended to limit the scope of this application.
对本申请实施例进行详细说明之前,对本申请实施例中涉及的名词和术语进行说明,本申请实施例中涉及的名词和术语适用于如下的解释:Before providing a detailed description of the embodiments of this application, the nouns and terms used in the embodiments of this application are explained, and the nouns and terms used in the embodiments of this application shall be interpreted as follows:
应用程序是一种运行在计算机或移动设备上的软件程序,旨在为用户提供特定的功能或服务。在本申请实施例中,应用程序的首页面展示了多个目标群组的名称,每个名称都附带一个链接标记,指向该群组的入口链接。这些入口链接由群组内的第二对象(如管理员或指定用户)创建,并与群组名称关联。当用户在群组名称周围进行停留操作时,应用程序会显示该群组的基本信息,如描述和成员数量。若用户触发链接标记,应用程序将跳转至该群组的会话页面,使用户能够与群组内的其他成员进行交流和互动。An application is a software program that runs on a computer or mobile device and is designed to provide users with specific functions or services. In this embodiment, the application's homepage displays the names of multiple target groups, each accompanied by a link pointing to an entry point to that group. These entry points are created by a secondary object within the group (such as an administrator or designated user) and associated with the group name. When a user hovers over a group name, the application displays basic information about the group, such as its description and number of members. If the user triggers a link, the application redirects to the group's session page, enabling the user to communicate and interact with other members within the group.
本申请实施例应用的系统体系构架及场景说明System architecture and scenario description used in the embodiments of this application
图1是根据本申请的实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法所应用的系统构架图。它包括对象终端140、互联网130、网关120、应用程序服务器110等。Figure 1 is a system architecture diagram of the group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application. It includes an object terminal 140, an Internet 130, a gateway 120, an application server 110, etc.
对象终端140包括桌面电脑、膝上型电脑、PDA(个人数字助理)、手机、车载终端、家庭影院终端、专用终端等多种形式。另外,它可以是单台设备,也可以是多台设备组成的集合。对象终端140可以以有线或无线的方式与互联网130进行通信,交换数据。其中,对象终端140具有应用程序平台,应用程序平台用于各个对象终端进行社交活动、资源交互、和信息交互等操作。The target terminal 140 includes various forms such as desktop computers, laptops, PDAs (personal digital assistants), mobile phones, in-vehicle terminals, home theater terminals, and dedicated terminals. Furthermore, it can be a single device or a collection of multiple devices. The target terminal 140 can communicate with the Internet 130 via wired or wireless means to exchange data. The target terminal 140 has an application platform for various target terminals to perform social activities, resource interaction, and information exchange.
应用程序服务器110是指能对对象终端140提供某些服务的计算机系统。相对于普通对象终端140来说,应用程序服务器110在稳定性、安全性、性能等方面都要求更高。应用程序服务器110可以是网络平台中的一台高性能计算机、多台高性能计算机的集群、一台高性能计算机中划出的一部分(例如虚拟机)、多台高性能计算机中划出的一部分(例如虚拟机)的组合等。应用程序服务器110包含多种类型的服务,其中,应用程序服务器110的各个服务的实现常常会与一些中间数据库或者存储介质等相关联。应用程序服务器110用于根据某个对象终端的群组链接创建操作,对至少一个群组进行链接创建,并确定向其他对象终端显示群组链接的方式,应用程序服务器110还用于根据其他对象终端的交互操作,显示群组的群组信息或者群组的会话窗口等。Application server 110 refers to a computer system that can provide certain services to object terminal 140. Compared to ordinary object terminal 140, application server 110 has higher requirements in terms of stability, security, and performance. Application server 110 can be a high-performance computer in a network platform, a cluster of multiple high-performance computers, a portion of a high-performance computer (e.g., a virtual machine), or a combination of portions of multiple high-performance computers (e.g., virtual machines). Application server 110 contains various types of services, and the implementation of each service of application server 110 is often associated with some intermediate database or storage medium. Application server 110 is used to create links to at least one group based on a group link creation operation of an object terminal, and determine the method of displaying group links to other object terminals. Application server 110 is also used to display group information or group session windows based on the interactive operations of other object terminals.
网关120又称网间连接器、协议转换器。网关在传输层上实现网络互连,是一种充当转换作用的计算机系统或设备。在使用不同的通信协议、数据格式或语言,甚至体系结构完全不同的两种系统之间,网关是一个翻译器。同时,网关也可以提供过滤和安全功能。对象终端140向应用程序服务器110发送的消息要通过网关120发送到相应的服务器。应用程序服务器110向对象终端140发送的消息也要通过网关120发送到相应的对象终端140。Gateway 120, also known as an internetwork connector or protocol converter, is a computer system or device that acts as a translator, enabling network interconnection at the transport layer. It bridges the gap between two systems using different communication protocols, data formats, languages, or even completely different architectures. Gateways can also provide filtering and security functions. Messages sent from target terminal 140 to application server 110 are forwarded to the corresponding server via gateway 120. Messages sent from application server 110 to target terminal 140 are also forwarded to the corresponding target terminal 140 via gateway 120.
本申请实施例可以应用在多种场景下,例如图2A-图2D所示的基于会话群组触发群组显示的场景、图2E-图2H所示的基于公告信息触发群组显示的场景等。The embodiments of this application can be applied in various scenarios, such as the scenario of triggering group display based on session group as shown in Figures 2A-2D, and the scenario of triggering group display based on announcement information as shown in Figures 2E-2H.
如图2A所示,在应用程序平台的群组“篮球兴趣小组”中,群成员为对象1、对象2、和对象3。此时,对象1在篮球兴趣小组的会话页面中发送了会话消息“https://example.com/group?token=K77qzd”,其中,会话消息是对象1分享的群组A的群组链接。As shown in Figure 2A, in the "Basketball Interest Group" group on the application platform, the group members are Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. At this time, Object 1 sends a session message "https://example.com/group?token=K77qzd" on the Basketball Interest Group's session page. The session message is a group link of Group A shared by Object 1.
如图2B所示,群成员为对象1、对象2、和对象3,当对象3在登录到应用程序平台,并打开篮球兴趣小组的会话页面时,对象1在此前发送的群组链接会显示成一个群组A的、带有链接标记的群组名称,群组A的群组名称是“羽毛球兴趣小组”。对象2在此前发送的“收到”,其中,链接标记指的是位于群组名称“羽毛球兴趣小组”下方的、能够交互操作的下划线。As shown in Figure 2B, the group members are Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. When Object 3 logs into the application platform and opens the basketball interest group's chat page, the group link previously sent by Object 1 will be displayed as a group name with a link marker, which is "Badminton Interest Group". Object 2's previously sent "Received" message will also display the link marker, which refers to the interactive underline located below the group name "Badminton Interest Group".
如图2C所示,群成员为对象1、对象2、和对象3,对象3将鼠标悬停在篮球兴趣小组的会话页面中的“羽毛球兴趣小组”上方,会话页面中会显示一个提示窗口,其中,提示窗口中有“群组人数:10;是否已加入:是;群主昵称:xxx1”等信息。基于此,对象3点击群组名称“羽毛球兴趣小组”并触发链接标记,以便打开羽毛球兴趣小组的会话页面。As shown in Figure 2C, the group members are Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. When Object 3 hovers the mouse over "Badminton Interest Group" in the basketball interest group's chat page, a tooltip window will appear on the chat page. This tooltip window will display information such as "Group members: 10; Already joined: Yes; Group owner's nickname: xxx1". Based on this, Object 3 clicks on the group name "Badminton Interest Group" and triggers the link to open the badminton interest group's chat page.
如图2D所示,群成员包括对象3、对象11、对象3和对象4,当对象3双击群组名称“羽毛球兴趣小组”并触发链接标记之后,应用程序平台中会展示一个新的会话窗口,该会话窗口为羽毛球兴趣小组的会话页面。As shown in Figure 2D, the group members include object 3, object 11, object 3 and object 4. When object 3 double-clicks the group name "Badminton Interest Group" and triggers the link tag, a new session window will be displayed in the application platform. This session window is the session page of the Badminton Interest Group.
上述图2A-图2D示出了在应用程序的会话页面中对各个对象分享的群组链接进行显示、和预览的情形,使对象可以在会话页面中根据其他对象分享的群组链接知晓其他对象分享的群组名称,并在不进入该群组的会话页面的情况下,知晓该群组的基本信息。还可以根据群组链接直接导航进入到群组的会话页面,提高了群组查找的效率。Figures 2A-2D above illustrate the display and preview of group links shared by various objects in the application's session page. This allows objects to know the names of groups shared by other objects within the session page, and to learn the basic information of the group without entering the group's session page. Furthermore, users can directly navigate to the group's session page based on the group link, improving the efficiency of group search.
如图2E所示,是应用程序平台的应用程序公告栏的页面,在页面中展示有不同时间、不同对象发布的多个公告信息,其中,公告1包括一个链接信息“https://example.com/group?token=K77qzd”,公告2包括一个文本信息“Xxxxxxx”和一个链接信息“https://example.com/group?7895”,公告3包括图片1和图片2两个图片信息。其中,公告1的链接信息满足群组的群组链接的格式要求,公告1的链接是指示进入群组A的入口链接。而公告2的链接信息不满足群组链接的格式要求,是一个普通链接。Figure 2E shows the application announcement page of the application platform. The page displays multiple announcements posted at different times and by different individuals. Announcement 1 includes a link "https://example.com/group?token=K77qzd", Announcement 2 includes a text message "Xxxxxxx" and a link "https://example.com/group?7895", and Announcement 3 includes two images, Image 1 and Image 2. The link in Announcement 1 conforms to the format requirements for group links, indicating entry to group A. However, the link in Announcement 2 does not meet the format requirements for group links and is a regular link.
如图2F所示,当某个对象在应用程序平台上打开应用程序公告栏时,应用程序公告栏的页面会显示三个公告,其中,公告1的链接信息显示成群组A的、带有链接标记的群组名称,群组A的群组名称是“羽毛球兴趣小组”;公告2仍显示成一个文本信息“Xxxxxxx”和一个链接信息“https://example.com/group?7895”,公告3仍显示成由图片1和图片2构成的图片信息。As shown in Figure 2F, when an object opens the application announcement bar on the application platform, the application announcement bar page will display three announcements. Among them, the link information of announcement 1 is displayed as the group name of group A with a link mark. The group name of group A is "Badminton Interest Group"; announcement 2 is still displayed as a text message "Xxxxxxx" and a link message "https://example.com/group?7895"; announcement 3 is still displayed as an image message consisting of image 1 and image 2.
如图2G所示,当对象将鼠标悬停在应用程序公告栏的页面中公告1的“羽毛球兴趣小组”上方,应用程序公告栏的页面中会显示一个提示窗口,其中,提示窗口中有“群组人数:10;是否已加入:是;群主昵称:xxx1”等信息。基于此,对象点击群组名称“羽毛球兴趣小组”并触发链接标记,以便打开羽毛球兴趣小组的会话页面。As shown in Figure 2G, when the object hovers the mouse over "Badminton Interest Group" in Announcement 1 of the application's announcement bar, a tooltip will appear in the application's announcement bar, displaying information such as "Group members: 10; Already joined: Yes; Group owner's nickname: xxx1". Based on this, the object clicks on the group name "Badminton Interest Group" and triggers the link to open the Badminton Interest Group's session page.
如图2H所示,当对象双击群组名称“羽毛球兴趣小组”并触发链接标记之后,在应用程序公告栏的页面上会展示一个会话窗口,该会话窗口为羽毛球兴趣小组的会话页面。As shown in Figure 2H, when the object double-clicks the group name "Badminton Interest Group" and triggers the link tag, a session window will be displayed on the application's announcement page. This session window is the Badminton Interest Group's session page.
上述图2E-图2H示出了在应用程序的群公告页面中对各个对象分享的群组链接进行显示、和预览的情形,使对象可以在群公告页面中,根据公告所展示的群组链接知悉群组链接所指示的群组的群组名称,并在不进入该群组的会话页面的情况下,知晓该群组的基本信息。Figures 2E-2H above illustrate the display and preview of group links shared by various objects on the group announcement page of the application. This allows objects to know the group name indicated by the group link in the announcement page and to know the basic information of the group without entering the group's session page.
综上,本申请实施例的群组展示方法满足在会话窗口、群公告、文档或者收藏内容等多个场景下预览其他对象分享的群组链接相关的群组信息,使群组信息的显示场景更加多样化。另外,本申请实施例的群组展示方法提供了针对群组的分享、和预览功能,能有效地提高群组信息的传递效率。In summary, the group display method of this application embodiment satisfies the need to preview group information related to group links shared by other objects in multiple scenarios such as chat windows, group announcements, documents, or favorite content, making the display scenarios of group information more diverse. Furthermore, the group display method of this application embodiment provides sharing and preview functions for groups, which can effectively improve the efficiency of group information transmission.
本申请实施例的总体说明。General description of the embodiments of this application.
根据本申请的一个实施例,提供了一种应用程序中的群组展示方法,应用于第一对象的终端。According to one embodiment of this application, a group display method in an application is provided, applied to the terminal of a first object.
该应用程序中的群组展示方法一般应用程序中的群组分享、群组展示等场景中,例如图2A-图2D、以及图2E-图2H所示的群组显示场景。本申请实施例提供了一种基于为各个群组设置入口链接,基于入口链接使对象在加入群组前可以预览群组信息的方案,能够提高信息传递效率。The group display method in this application is commonly used in scenarios such as group sharing and group display in general applications, such as the group display scenarios shown in Figures 2A-2D and 2E-2H. This application embodiment provides a solution based on setting entry links for each group, allowing users to preview group information before joining, thereby improving information transmission efficiency.
如图3所示,根据本申请一个实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法可以包括:As shown in Figure 3, a group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application may include:
步骤310、在应用程序中显示第一页面,第一页面包含目标群组的目标群组名称,目标群组名称带有目标群组的入口链接的链接标记,入口链接由目标群组中的第二对象创建,并在创建时关联于目标群组的目标群组名称;Step 310: Display the first page in the application. The first page contains the target group name of the target group. The target group name has a link tag for the entry link of the target group. The entry link is created by the second object in the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
步骤320、响应于在目标群组名称周围触发的停留操作,显示目标群组的基本信息;Step 320: In response to a dwell action triggered around the target group name, display basic information about the target group;
步骤330、响应于针对链接标记的触发,显示目标群组的会话页面。Step 330: In response to a trigger on a link tag, display the session page for the target group.
下面对步骤310-330进行详细描述。Steps 310-330 are described in detail below.
在步骤310中,在应用程序中显示第一页面,第一页面包含目标群组的目标群组名称,目标群组名称带有目标群组的入口链接的链接标记,入口链接由目标群组的第二对象创建,并在创建时关联于目标群组的目标群组名称。In step 310, a first page is displayed in the application. The first page contains the target group name of the target group, which has a link tag for the target group's entry link. The entry link is created by a second object of the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
第一页面是应用程序中的一个内容页面。第一页面包含目标群组的入口链接。The first page is a content page within the application. It contains entry links to the target group.
目标群组指的是由在应用程序中注册成功的、具备相同或者相似特点的各个对象终端所构成的群组。例如,目标群组可以是由具有相同兴趣爱好的多个对象构成的群组,也可以是由执行同一个任务的多个对象构成的群组。A target group refers to a group of objects that have been successfully registered in an application and possess the same or similar characteristics. For example, a target group can be a group of multiple objects with the same interests or hobbies, or a group of multiple objects performing the same task.
入口链接是一个由固定格式的字符串、和各个群组对应的随机字符串构成的字符串,入口链接用于连接到目标群组的会话页面,使对象快速地导航进入或访问目标群组的会话页面。An entry link is a string consisting of a fixed-format string and a random string corresponding to each group. Entry links are used to link to the target group's session page, allowing objects to quickly navigate to or access the target group's session page.
第二对象是在应用程序已经注册成功的、区别于第一对象的终端的其他对象终端。The second object is another object terminal that has been successfully registered in the application and is distinct from the first object terminal.
目标群组名称用于指示目标群组的标题内容,目标群组名称用于区分目标群组和其他群组。The target group name is used to indicate the title content of the target group and is used to distinguish the target group from other groups.
链接标记用于提供给对象触发目标群组的入口链接,以访问或者加入目标群组的会话页面。Link tags are used to provide an object with an entry link to trigger the target group, allowing it to access or join the target group's session page.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,第一页面是一个内容页面,其中包含了目标群组的目标群组名称。这个名称是一个链接标记,它指向一个入口链接,这个入口链接是由目标群组的第二对象创建的,并在创建时与目标群组名称关联起来。目标群组是指由在应用程序中注册成功且具有相同或相似特点的各个对象终端组成的群组。例如,目标群组可以是由具有相同兴趣爱好的多个对象构成的群组,也可以是由执行同一个任务的多个对象构成的群组。In some embodiments, within the application, the first page is a content page containing the target group name. This name is a link marker pointing to an entry link created by a second object of the target group and associated with the target group name upon creation. A target group refers to a group of object terminals that have successfully registered in the application and possess the same or similar characteristics. For example, a target group could be a group of multiple objects with the same interests or hobbies, or a group of multiple objects performing the same task.
在一些实施例中,入口链接是一个由固定格式的字符串和各个群组对应的随机字符串构成的字符串。它的作用是连接到目标群组的会话页面,使对象能够快速地导航进入或访问目标群组的会话页面。第二对象是在应用程序中已经注册成功且区别于第一对象的终端的其他对象终端。目标群组名称用于指示目标群标题内容,并用于区分目标群组和其他群组。链接标记则用于提供给对象触发目标群组的入口链接,以便访问或加入目标群组的会话页面。In some embodiments, the entry link is a string consisting of a fixed-format string and random strings corresponding to each group. Its function is to link to the target group's session page, enabling the object to quickly navigate to or access the target group's session page. The second object is another object terminal that has been successfully registered in the application and is distinct from the first object. The target group name indicates the target group title content and distinguishes the target group from other groups. The link tag provides the object with an entry link to trigger the target group, allowing it to access or join the target group's session page.
作为示例,在社交媒体应用中,第一页面可以是一个新闻feed页面,其中包含了用户关注的群组的目标群组名称。这些名称带有入口链接的链接标记,入口链接由群组的管理员(第二对象)创建,并在创建时与群组名称关联起来。第一页面是应用程序中的一个内容页面,其中包含了群组的入口链接。群组可以是由具有相同兴趣爱好的用户组成的兴趣群组,也可以是由执行同一个任务的用户组成的项目群组。入口链接是一个由固定格式的字符串和各个群组对应的随机字符串构成的字符串。它的作用是连接到群组的会话页面,使用户能够快速地导航进入或访问群组的会话页面。第二对象是在应用程序中已经注册成功且区别于第一对象的终端的其他对象终端。群组名称用于指示群组的标题内容,并用于区分群组和其他群组。链接标记则用于提供给用户触发群组的入口链接,以便访问或加入群组的会话页面。As an example, in a social media application, the first page could be a news feed page containing the target group names of the groups the user follows. These names have entry links, created by the group's administrator (the second object) and associated with the group name upon creation. The first page is a content page within the application containing entry links to the groups. Groups can be interest groups composed of users with similar interests or project groups composed of users performing the same task. The entry link is a string consisting of a fixed-format string and a random string corresponding to each group. Its purpose is to link to the group's session page, allowing users to quickly navigate to or access the group's session page. The second object is another object terminal that has been successfully registered in the application and is distinct from the first object. The group name indicates the group's title content and distinguishes it from other groups. The link tags provide users with entry links to the group to access or join its session page.
例如,链接标记可以是群组的群组名称下方的下划线,也可以是群组名称之前或者群组名称之后的一个图形交互控件。For example, a link tag could be an underscore below the group name, or a graphical interactive control before or after the group name.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第一对象的终端访问应用程序,并在应用程序打开任一内容页面时,服务器在经过授权许可的情况下,会将第一对象的终端所要访问的内容页面作为第一页面显示在应用程序中。其中,第一页面中可以包括文本、图片、视频、或者目标群组的入口链接等信息。In this specific implementation, when the terminal of the first object accesses the application and opens any content page in the application, the server, with authorization, will display the content page that the terminal of the first object wants to access as the first page in the application. The first page may include text, images, videos, or entry links to target groups, etc.
在一些实施例中,由于在对象浏览第一页面时,保留第一页面中的入口链接的显示形式,直接显示入口链接会使对象仍无法直观地知道入口链接所指示的群组是怎样的。基于此,当服务器确定第一页面中的入口链接由目标群组的第二对象创建,并在创建时关联于目标群组的目标群组名称,则在应用程序中的第一页面中将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称,使第一对象的终端看到的第一页面中包括目标群组名称,其中,目标群组名称带有目标群组的入口链接的链接标记,从而使对象根据目标群组名称直观地了解到入口链接是指示什么样的群组,并提供链接标记供对象触发和访问群组的会话页面。In some embodiments, since the display format of the entry link in the first page is retained when the object browses the first page, directly displaying the entry link would still prevent the object from intuitively understanding what kind of group the entry link indicates. Therefore, when the server determines that the entry link in the first page was created by a second object of the target group and associated with the target group name at creation time, the entry link is displayed as the target group name with a link tag in the first page of the application. This ensures that the first page seen by the first object's terminal includes the target group name, which has a link tag for the target group's entry link. This allows the object to intuitively understand what kind of group the entry link indicates based on the target group name, and provides a link tag for the object to trigger and access the group's session page.
为节省篇幅,本申请实施例的创建入口链接的具体过程、将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称的具体过程将在下文中进行详细描述,此处不作赘述。To save space, the specific process of creating the entry link and displaying the entry link as the target group name with the link tag in the embodiments of this application will be described in detail below, and will not be repeated here.
如此,在应用程序中显示第一页面,其中包含目标群组的名称和入口链接,这种设计通过提供一个直观且易于访问的界面,显著提高了用户参与群组活动的便捷性。目标群组名称的链接标记不仅明确了群组的主题和目的,还通过直接关联的入口链接,简化了用户导航到群组会话页面的步骤。这种设计基于行为分析和界面设计原理,通过减少用户操作的复杂性和时间,提升了用户体验。入口链接的固定格式和随机字符串的结合,确保了链接的安全性和唯一性,防止了未授权访问,同时也有助于检测和管理群组的访问流量。第二对象的参与创建入口链接,增加了群组的社交互动和管理的灵活性,使得群组能够更好地适应不同用户的需求和偏好。整体而言,这种设计通过技术上的精心安排,实现了用户界面的优化和社交互动的增强,从而提高了应用程序的吸引力和用户满意度。Thus, displaying the first page in the application, containing the target group's name and entry link, significantly improves user convenience for participating in group activities by providing an intuitive and easily accessible interface. The link to the target group name not only clearly identifies the group's theme and purpose but also simplifies user navigation to the group session page through a directly linked entry link. This design, based on behavioral analysis and interface design principles, enhances user experience by reducing the complexity and time required for user operations. The combination of a fixed format and random strings for the entry link ensures its security and uniqueness, preventing unauthorized access and facilitating the detection and management of group access traffic. The participation of a second object in creating the entry link increases the flexibility of social interaction and management within the group, allowing it to better adapt to the needs and preferences of different users. Overall, this design, through careful technical arrangement, optimizes the user interface and enhances social interaction, thereby increasing the application's attractiveness and user satisfaction.
在步骤320中,响应于在目标群组名称周围触发的停留操作,显示目标群组的基本信息。In step 320, in response to a dwell action triggered around the target group name, basic information about the target group is displayed.
在一些实施例中,在目标群组名称周围触发的停留操作,是指在第一页面的目标区域触发的停留操作,目标区域为所述第一页面中与所述目标群组名称的显示位置之间的距离小于距离阈值的区域,所述基本信息用于提示所述第一对象是否触发所述链接标记。In some embodiments, a dwell operation triggered around a target group name refers to a dwell operation triggered in a target area of the first page. The target area is an area on the first page where the distance between the display position of the target group name and the target group name is less than a distance threshold. The basic information is used to prompt the first object whether to trigger the link tag.
目标对象指的是用于与应用程序的页面进行交互的物体,例如,鼠标、触控笔、或者用户的手指等都属于目标对象的范畴。A target object refers to an object used to interact with the application's pages. Examples include a mouse, a stylus, or a user's finger.
目标群组名称周围指的是服务器可以感应到、且确认目标对象的停留操作有效的区域范围。The area surrounding the target group name refers to the region that the server can sense and confirm as valid for the target object's stay operation.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,第一页面包含目标群组的名称,该名称周围有一个特定的目标区域。当用户使用目标对象(如鼠标、触控笔或手指)在第一页面中的目标区域内进行停留操作时,应用程序会响应这一操作,显示目标群组的基本信息。这些基本信息旨在提示用户是否应该触发链接标记,以访问或加入目标群组的会话页面。In some embodiments, within the application, a first page contains the name of the target group, surrounded by a specific target area. When a user hovers over the target area on the first page using a target object (such as a mouse, stylus, or finger), the application responds by displaying basic information about the target group. This basic information is intended to prompt the user whether they should trigger a link to access or join the target group's session page.
在一些实施例中,目标区域的定义是基于目标群组名称的显示位置,具体来说,它是与名称显示位置之间的距离小于某个预设距离阈值的区域。这个距离阈值由应用程序开发者根据用户体验和设计需求设定,以确保用户在接近目标群组名称的位置进行操作时,能够方便地获取群组的基本信息。In some embodiments, the target area is defined based on the display location of the target group name. Specifically, it is the area whose distance from the name's display location is less than a preset distance threshold. This distance threshold is set by the application developer based on user experience and design requirements to ensure that users can easily obtain basic information about the group when operating near the target group name.
在一些实施例中,当用户的目标对象在目标区域内停留达到一定时间(通常由应用程序设定)时,应用程序会检测到这一停留操作,并触发显示目标群组的基本信息。这些信息可能包括群组的描述、成员数量、最新活动等,帮助用户了解群组的内容和活跃度,从而决定是否要访问或加入群组。In some embodiments, when a user's target object stays in the target area for a certain period of time (usually set by the application), the application detects this stay and triggers the display of basic information about the target group. This information may include the group's description, number of members, latest activities, etc., to help the user understand the group's content and activity level, thereby deciding whether to visit or join the group.
作为示例,第一页面是一个动态新闻feed页面,显示了用户关注的各种群组的名称。每个群组名称周围都有一个目标区域,当用户使用鼠标悬停在这个区域内时,应用程序会显示该群组的基本信息。例如,如果用户将鼠标悬停在“摄影爱好者”群组名称附近,屏幕上会弹出一个提示框,显示该群组的描述(如“欢迎所有热爱摄影的朋友们加入,分享您的摄影作品,交流摄影技巧。”)、当前成员数量(如“5000+成员”)以及群组的最新活动(如“最新照片分享:美丽的日落照片”)。基本信息帮助用户快速了解群组的内容和活跃度,决定是否要点击群组名称链接,加入群组或查看群组的详细信息。这种设计不仅提高了用户的交互体验,还增加了群组的可见性和吸引力,鼓励用户参与更多的社交活动。同时,它也减少了用户误点击群组名称的可能性,提升了应用程序的可用性和用户满意度。As an example, the first page is a dynamic news feed displaying the names of various groups the user follows. Each group name is surrounded by a target area; when the user hovers their mouse over this area, the application displays basic information about the group. For instance, if the user hovers their mouse near the "Photography Enthusiasts" group name, a tooltip pops up displaying the group's description (e.g., "Welcome all photography enthusiasts to join, share your photos, and exchange photography tips."), current number of members (e.g., "5000+ members"), and the group's latest activity (e.g., "Latest photo sharing: Beautiful sunset photos"). This basic information helps users quickly understand the group's content and activity level, deciding whether to click the group name link to join or view more details. This design not only improves the user experience but also increases group visibility and attractiveness, encouraging users to participate in more social activities. Simultaneously, it reduces the likelihood of users accidentally clicking on group names, enhancing application usability and user satisfaction.
例如,目标群组名称周围,也即目标区域可以定义为目标群组名称的外接矩形的四个边向外等距离扩展形成的矩形区域范围。For example, the area surrounding the target group name, i.e., the target region, can be defined as the rectangular region formed by extending the four sides of the outer rectangle of the target group name outward at equal distances.
停留操作指的是使目标对象在当前位置保持不变达到一定时长。停留操作包括但不限于悬停、长按等操作。A dwell operation refers to keeping a target object in its current position for a certain period of time. Dwell operations include, but are not limited to, hovering and long-pressing.
目标群组的基本信息用于指示目标群组的具体内容,例如,目标群组的群成员数目、群组类型、群组创建日期、群组中具有管理权限的对象是谁等等都属于目标群组的基本信息的范畴。The basic information of the target group is used to indicate the specific content of the target group. For example, the number of group members, the group type, the group creation date, and who has administrative privileges in the group are all within the scope of the basic information of the target group.
在一些实施例中,目标群组的基本信息是关于群组的关键数据,它提供了群组的概述和基本属性。这些信息通常包括群成员数目,这反映了群组的规模和活跃度;群组类型,例如,是兴趣小组、工作团队还是学习小组等,这帮助用户了解群组的性质和目的;群组创建日期,这显示了群组存在的时长,有时也能反映群组的成熟度和稳定性;以及群组中具有管理权限的对象,这指明了群组的管理员或负责人,他们负责维护群组秩序和管理群组内容。这些基本信息对于用户来说是非常有用的,因为它可以帮助他们快速评估是否想要加入或参与某个群组,同时也为群组管理员提供了管理群组所需的基本信息。In some embodiments, the basic information about a target group consists of key data about the group, providing an overview and basic attributes. This information typically includes the number of group members, reflecting the group's size and activity level; the group type, such as an interest group, work team, or study group, which helps users understand the group's nature and purpose; the group's creation date, which shows how long the group has existed and sometimes reflects its maturity and stability; and the individuals with administrative privileges within the group, identifying the group's administrators or leaders responsible for maintaining group order and managing group content. This basic information is very useful to users because it helps them quickly assess whether they want to join or participate in a particular group, while also providing group administrators with the essential information needed to manage the group.
在该实施例具体实现时,出于交互需求,第一对象的终端可以控制目标对象在应用程序的界面的任意位置停留。基于此,当第一对象的终端在应用程序中查看到显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称时,第一对象的终端可以控制目标对象停留在目标群组名称的周围,使服务器检测到目标对象的停留状态。接着,服务器会获取目标对象在应用程序的界面的停留位置。In this specific implementation, for interactive purposes, the terminal of the first object can control the target object to stay at any position on the application's interface. Therefore, when the terminal of the first object sees a target group name displayed with a link tag in the application, the terminal of the first object can control the target object to stay around the target group name, allowing the server to detect the target object's position. Then, the server will obtain the target object's position on the application's interface.
在一些实施例中,服务器会识别目标对象的停留位置是否处于预先定义的目标群组名称周围的范畴,直至目标对象在目标群组名称周围的停留时间达到预定值,提取目标群组的群组基本信息,并将目标群组的群组基本信息以一个消息窗口的形式显示在应用程序的界面中,以使第一对象的终端在不加入目标群组的情况下,了解目标群组是怎样的一个群组。In some embodiments, the server identifies whether the target object's location is within the range of a predefined target group name, until the target object stays around the target group name for a predetermined time. The server then extracts the basic information of the target group and displays it in the application's interface in the form of a message window, so that the terminal of the first object can understand what kind of group the target group is without joining the target group.
如此,在应用程序中,当用户的目标对象在第一页面中的目标区域内进行停留操作时,系统会显示目标群组的基本信息。通过提供群组的详细概述,帮助用户在不离开当前页面的情况下,快速了解群组的内容和性质。这不仅提升了用户体验,减少了用户在不同页面之间跳转的需要,还增加了用户参与群组活动的可能性。这种交互方式也提高了信息的可见性,使得群组管理员能够更有效地管理群组,同时也有助于防止误点击,提升了应用程序的可用性和用户满意度。Thus, within the application, when a user hovers over a target area on the first page, the system displays basic information about the target group. By providing a detailed overview of the group, users can quickly understand its content and nature without leaving the current page. This not only improves the user experience and reduces the need for users to switch between different pages, but also increases the likelihood of user participation in group activities. This interaction method also improves information visibility, enabling group administrators to manage groups more effectively, while also helping to prevent accidental clicks, thus enhancing application usability and user satisfaction.
在步骤330中,响应于针对链接标记的触发,显示目标群组的会话页面。In step 330, in response to a trigger on a link tag, the session page for the target group is displayed.
会话页面指的是供目标群组的各个成员进行会话交流的窗口。A conversation page refers to a window for members of a target group to communicate and exchange information.
在该实施例具体实现时,当对象想要访问目标群组时,对象会在应用程序中触发链接标记。基于此,服务器会接收到对象对链接标记的触发操作,将目标群组的会话页面显示在应用程序中,以便对象查看目标群组的各个成员的会话内容,并与目标群组的各个成员在会话页面中进行会话交流。In this specific implementation, when an object wants to access a target group, the object triggers a link marker in the application. Based on this, the server receives the object's trigger operation on the link marker, displays the target group's session page in the application, so that the object can view the session content of each member of the target group and communicate with each member of the target group in the session page.
在一些实施例中,当用户在应用程序的第一页面中触发目标群组名称旁边的链接标记时,应用程序会响应这一操作,显示目标群组的会话页面。这个会话页面是一个专门设计的窗口,供群组的各个成员进行实时或异步的会话交流。在具体实现时,当用户想要访问目标群组时,他们会在应用程序中点击或触碰链接标记。一旦用户触发了链接标记,应用程序会将这一操作发送给服务器。服务器接收到这一触发操作后,会检索与该链接标记相关联的目标群组的会话页面数据。这些数据可能包括群组成员的列表、历史会话记录、当前在线成员的状态等。服务器会将这些数据发送回应用程序,应用程序会在用户的设备上渲染出目标群组的会话页面。用户现在可以在这个页面上查看群组成员的会话内容,无论是最新的消息还是历史记录。此外,用户还可以在会话页面中输入自己的消息,与其他群组成员进行实时交流。In some embodiments, when a user triggers a link next to the target group name on the application's homepage, the application responds by displaying the target group's conversation page. This conversation page is a specially designed window for group members to engage in real-time or asynchronous conversational communication. In a specific implementation, when a user wants to access the target group, they click or tap the link in the application. Once the user triggers the link, the application sends this action to the server. Upon receiving the trigger, the server retrieves the conversation page data for the target group associated with that link. This data may include a list of group members, historical conversation records, the status of currently online members, etc. The server sends this data back to the application, which renders the target group's conversation page on the user's device. The user can now view the group members' conversation content on this page, including both the latest messages and historical records. Furthermore, users can enter their own messages on the conversation page to communicate with other group members in real time.
为节省篇幅,本申请实施例的显示目标群组的会话页面的具体过程将在下文中进行详细描述,此处不作赘述。To save space, the specific process of displaying the session page of the target group in this embodiment of the application will be described in detail below, and will not be repeated here.
通过上述步骤310-330,本申请实施例,在用户(第一对象的终端)访问某个具有群组链接(入口链接)的第一页面时,将第一页面中的群组链接显示成带链接标记的目标群组名称,此时,用户可以直观地知道这个入口链接是代表哪个群组,使第二对象所创建和分享的入口链接更加的具象化。另外,本申请实施例中,还设定了当用户利用目标对象(鼠标、触控笔等)停留在这个目标群组名称的周围时,自动为用户显示目标群组的群组基本信息,使用户在不触发入口链接并打开目标群组的会话页面的前提下,能预览到目标群组的目标群组的基本信息,通过预览到的目标群组的基本信息来了解到这个群组是怎样的群组,从而确定自己是否要进入到该群组的会话页面里。最后,在确定要进入群组的会话页面时,触发第一页面里的链接标记进入到目标群组的会话页面,能提高群组信息传递效率。Through steps 310-330 above, in this embodiment of the application, when a user (the terminal of the first object) accesses a first page with a group link (entry link), the group link on the first page is displayed as the target group name with a link marker. At this time, the user can intuitively know which group this entry link represents, making the entry link created and shared by the second object more concrete. In addition, in this embodiment of the application, when the user hovers the target object (mouse, stylus, etc.) around the target group name, the basic information of the target group is automatically displayed to the user. This allows the user to preview the basic information of the target group without triggering the entry link and opening the target group's conversation page. By previewing the basic information of the target group, the user can understand what kind of group it is and thus determine whether to enter the group's conversation page. Finally, when it is determined to enter the group's conversation page, triggering the link marker on the first page to enter the target group's conversation page can improve the efficiency of group information transmission.
以上是对步骤310-340进行的总体描述。下面将针对步骤310、步骤320和步骤330的具体实现展开详细描述。The above is a general description of steps 310-340. The specific implementations of steps 310, 320, and 330 will be described in detail below.
步骤310的详细描述Detailed description of step 310
在步骤310中,在应用程序中显示第一页面,第一页面包含目标群组的目标群组名称,目标群组名称带有目标群组的入口链接的链接标记,入口链接由目标群组中的第二对象创建,并在创建时关联于目标群组的目标群组名称。In step 310, a first page is displayed in the application. The first page contains the target group name of the target group, which has a link tag for the target group's entry link. The entry link is created by a second object in the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
由于应用程序中的各个对象终端的安全程度是不一样的,针对应用程序中的一些较为私密的群组,如果直接将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称可能会造成群组的安全性下降。基于此,本申请提供了一种基于第二对象在创建时的设置操作控制入口链接的显示形式的方案,能提高入口链接的显示多样性,进而提高信息显示安全性。Since the security levels of various objects within an application differ, directly displaying the entry link as the target group name with a link tag might compromise the security of some more private groups within the application. Therefore, this application provides a scheme that controls the display format of entry links based on the settings of a second object during its creation. This improves the diversity of entry link display and thus enhances information display security.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,第一页面通常是一个内容丰富的页面,其中包含多个目标群组的名称。这些名称旁边都有一个入口链接的链接标记,用户可以通过点击或触碰这些链接标记来访问相应的群组会话页面。这些入口链接是由群组中的第二对象(通常是群组管理员或创建者)创建的,并且在创建时与群组名称关联起来。然而,考虑到应用程序中各个对象终端的安全性可能存在差异,特别是对于一些较为私密的群组,直接将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称可能会带来安全风险。例如,这可能会使未授权的用户更容易发现并加入这些私密群组,从而泄露敏感信息或破坏群组的隐私。In some embodiments, the first page in the application is typically a content-rich page containing the names of multiple target groups. Each name is accompanied by a link marker for an entry point, which users can click or tap to access the corresponding group session page. These entry points are created by a second entity within the group (typically a group administrator or creator) and are associated with the group name at creation time. However, given the potential for varying security levels across different entities within the application, particularly for more private groups, directly displaying the entry point as the target group name with the link marker could pose security risks. For example, this could make it easier for unauthorized users to discover and join these private groups, potentially leading to the leakage of sensitive information or compromise of group privacy.
在一些实施例中,本申请提出了一种基于第二对象在创建时的设置操作来控制入口链接显示形式的方案。具体来说,群组管理员可以根据群组的隐私设置和安全需求,选择不同的入口链接显示形式。例如,他们可以选择将入口链接隐藏起来,只有通过特定的操作或权限验证后才能显示;或者他们可以选择以某种加密或模糊的形式显示入口链接,以减少被未授权用户发现的风险。这种方案提高了入口链接的显示多样性,使得群组管理员可以根据不同的群组需求和安全状况,灵活地控制入口链接的可见性和访问方式。进而,这也有助于提高信息显示的安全性,保护群组成员的隐私和安全。通过这种方式,应用程序能够在提供便捷的群组访问功能的同时,确保群组的安全性和私密性。In some embodiments, this application proposes a scheme to control the display format of the entry link based on the settings of a second object during its creation. Specifically, group administrators can choose different entry link display formats according to the group's privacy settings and security requirements. For example, they can choose to hide the entry link, displaying it only after specific operations or permission verification; or they can choose to display the entry link in an encrypted or obfuscated form to reduce the risk of it being discovered by unauthorized users. This scheme increases the diversity of entry link display, allowing group administrators to flexibly control the visibility and access methods of the entry link according to different group needs and security conditions. Furthermore, this also helps to improve the security of information display and protect the privacy and security of group members. In this way, the application can ensure the security and privacy of the group while providing convenient group access functions.
在一些实施例中,步骤310的第一页面的目标群组名称通过以下方式确定:In some embodiments, the target group name of the first page in step 310 is determined in the following way:
如果入口链接由目标群组的第二对象创建,在创建时关联于目标群组名称,且已设置对第一对象的终端启用名称显示,则将入口链接的链接标记,构建为目标群组名称。If the entry link is created by a second object of the target group, is associated with the target group name at creation, and name display is enabled for the first object's terminal, then the link tag of the entry link will be constructed as the target group name.
其中,启用名称显示指的是在向第一对象的终端显示第一页面时,将入口链接显示成带有链接标记的目标群组名称,而不启用名称显示则是在向第一对象的终端显示第一页面时,将入口链接显示为原本的链接形式。Enabling name display means that when the first page is displayed to the terminal of the first target, the entry link is displayed as the target group name with a link tag, while disabling name display means that when the first page is displayed to the terminal of the first target, the entry link is displayed in its original link form.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第二对象在创建目标群组的入口链接,并将入口链接关联于目标群组名称时,希望目标群组的群组名称仅对一些固定的对象终端可见,第二对象可以在创建入口链接的设置界面中,在启用名称显示的编辑区域中添加允许直接通过入口链接查看到目标群组名称的各个对象终端的终端名称或者终端标识。基于此,当第一对象的终端的终端名称或者终端标识被添加在启用名称显示的编辑区域,在第一对象的终端访问第一页面时,第一页面的入口链接会直接显示成带有链接标记的目标群组名称,而不显示入口链接的原本形态。当第一对象的终端的终端名称或者终端标识未被添加在启用名称显示的编辑区域,在第一对象的终端访问第一页面时,第一页面的入口链接会保持本身的显示形式,仍显示成一个链接信息。In this specific implementation, when the second object creates an entry link for the target group and associates the entry link with the target group name, it is desired that the target group name is only visible to certain fixed object terminals. The second object can add the terminal name or terminal identifier of each object terminal that can directly view the target group name through the entry link in the name display enable editing area of the entry link creation settings interface. Based on this, when the terminal name or terminal identifier of the first object's terminal is added to the name display enable editing area, when the first object's terminal accesses the first page, the entry link on the first page will directly display the target group name with the link marker, instead of the original form of the entry link. When the terminal name or terminal identifier of the first object's terminal is not added to the name display enable editing area, when the first object's terminal accesses the first page, the entry link on the first page will retain its original display form and will still be displayed as a link.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当入口链接由目标群组的第二对象(如群组管理员)创建时,第二对象可以在创建过程中选择是否对第一对象的终端启用名称显示。如果启用了名称显示,那么入口链接的链接标记将被构建为目标群组名称,这意味着在第一对象的终端上查看第一页面时,他们会看到一个带有链接标记的群组名称,而不是原始的链接形式。第二对象在创建入口链接的设置界面中,可以指定哪些终端名称或终端标识被允许看到群组名称。这些终端名称或终端标识通常与特定的用户或设备相关联。如果第一对象的终端名称或终端标识被添加到启用名称显示的编辑区域,那么当第一对象访问第一页面时,入口链接将显示为目标群组名称,带有链接标记,可以直接点击或触碰以访问群组会话页面。相反,如果第一对象的终端名称或终端标识没有被添加到启用名称显示的编辑区域,那么入口链接将保持其原始的链接形式,显示为一个普通的链接信息,而不是群组名称。这种设计允许群组管理员控制哪些用户或设备可以以更直观的方式访问群组,从而提高了入口链接的显示多样性和信息显示的安全性。应用程序能够根据群组管理员的设置,灵活地控制入口链接的显示形式,既保证了群组的私密性和安全性,又为特定用户提供了一个更加便捷和直观的群组访问方式。In some embodiments, within an application, when an entry link is created by a second object (such as a group administrator) of the target group, the second object can choose during the creation process whether to enable name display for the first object's terminal. If name display is enabled, the entry link's link marker will be constructed as the target group name. This means that when the first object views the first page on their terminal, they will see a group name with a link marker, instead of the original link format. The second object can specify which terminal names or identifiers are allowed to see the group name in the entry link creation settings interface. These terminal names or identifiers are typically associated with specific users or devices. If the first object's terminal name or identifier is added to the edit area for enabling name display, the entry link will be displayed as the target group name with a link marker when the first object accesses the first page, and can be directly clicked or touched to access the group session page. Conversely, if the first object's terminal name or identifier is not added to the edit area for enabling name display, the entry link will retain its original link format and be displayed as a regular link instead of the group name. This design allows group administrators to control which users or devices can access the group in a more intuitive way, thereby improving the display diversity of entry links and the security of information display. The application can flexibly control the display format of the entry link according to the group administrator's settings, which not only ensures the privacy and security of the group, but also provides a more convenient and intuitive way for specific users to access the group.
作为示例,如图4A所示,对象1在创建网球兴趣小组的入口链接“https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5”时,未对对象3设置启用名称显示。此时,对象3在访问篮球兴趣小组的会话页面时,会话页面中显示的对象1发送的内容只是一个普通的链接信息“https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5”,对象3并不能直接知晓该链接信息是指示什么。As an example, as shown in Figure 4A, when Object 1 created the entry link "https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5" for the tennis interest group, it did not enable name display for Object 3. At this time, when Object 3 accesses the basketball interest group's session page, the content sent by Object 1 displayed on the session page is just a simple link message "https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5," and Object 3 cannot directly understand what this link message indicates.
作为示例,如图4B所示,对象1在创建网球兴趣小组的入口链接“https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5”时,对对象3设置启用名称显示。此时,对象3在访问篮球兴趣小组的会话页面时,会话页面中显示的对象1发送的内容是网球兴趣小组的带链接标记的群组名称,对象3可以直接知晓对象1所分享的是加入网球兴趣小组的链接通道。基于此,对象3可以根据自身需求选择是否通过这个带链接标记的群组名称加入到网球兴趣小组中。As an example, as shown in Figure 4B, when Object 1 creates the entry link for the tennis interest group "https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5", it enables name display for Object 3. At this time, when Object 3 accesses the basketball interest group's chat page, the content sent by Object 1 is displayed on the chat page as the group name of the tennis interest group with the linked tag. Object 3 can directly know that Object 1 shared a link to join the tennis interest group. Based on this, Object 3 can choose whether to join the tennis interest group through this linked group name according to its own needs.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“摄影爱好者”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并将其关联到群组名称。管理员希望只有特定的用户终端能够看到群组名称,而其他用户只能看到原始的链接形式。在创建入口链接的设置界面中,管理员在启用名称显示的编辑区域中添加了允许查看群组名称的用户终端的终端名称或终端标识。例如,管理员添加了用户A和用户B的终端标识。当用户A和用户B访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们会在页面上看到“摄影爱好者”这个群组名称,名称旁边带有链接标记。他们可以点击或触碰这个名称,直接进入群组的会话页面。如果用户C的终端名称或终端标识没有被添加到启用名称显示的编辑区域,那么当用户C访问第一页面时,他们只会看到一个普通的链接信息,而不是群组名称。用户C需要点击这个链接,才能进入群组的会话页面。使得群组管理员能够控制哪些用户可以以更直观的方式访问群组,同时保持群组的私密性和安全性。对于被授权的用户,他们可以更方便地加入和参与群组活动;而对于未被授权的用户,他们需要额外的步骤才能访问群组,这有助于保护群组的隐私和安全。As an example, suppose there's a group called "Photography Enthusiasts." The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and associates it with the group name. The administrator wants only specific user devices to see the group name, while other users only see the raw link. In the entry link creation settings, the administrator adds the device names or device identifiers of the user devices allowed to view the group name in the "Enable Name Display" edit area. For example, the administrator adds the device identifiers of users A and B. When users A and B access the application's first page, they will see the group name "Photography Enthusiasts" with a link next to it. They can click or tap the name to directly access the group's session page. If user C's device name or identifier is not added to the "Enable Name Display" edit area, then when user C accesses the first page, they will only see a regular link instead of the group name. User C needs to click the link to access the group's session page. This allows the group administrator to control which users can access the group in a more intuitive way while maintaining the group's privacy and security. Authorized users can more easily join and participate in group activities; while unauthorized users need to take additional steps to access the group, which helps protect the group's privacy and security.
该实施例的好处是,根据第二对象在创建时的设置操作控制入口链接的显示形式。当第一对象的终端被第二对象设定为启用名称显示的对象终端时;第一对象的终端在访问第一页面时,会直接接收到入口链接所指示的群组的目标群组名称,更直观地知晓入口链接的含义。当第一对象的终端未被第二对象设定为启用名称显示的对象终端时;第一对象的终端在访问第一页面时,查看到的入口链接只是一个普通链接,不能直观地知晓其背后的含义,这一方式能提高入口链接的显示多样性,进而提高信息显示安全性。The advantage of this embodiment is that the display format of the entry link is controlled according to the settings of the second object during its creation. When the terminal of the first object is set by the second object to have its name displayed, the terminal of the first object will directly receive the target group name indicated by the entry link when accessing the first page, thus understanding the meaning of the entry link more intuitively. When the terminal of the first object is not set by the second object to have its name displayed, the entry link seen when accessing the first page is just an ordinary link, and its meaning cannot be intuitively understood. This method can improve the display diversity of entry links, thereby improving the security of information display.
由于应用程序中的各个对象终端对于目标群组的了解程度、和需求程度是不同的,如果将目标群组的目标群组名称以固定形式显示在第一页面,往往会造成群组展示的灵活性不高。基于此,本申请提供了一种为不同对象以不同的目标群组名称来指示相同群组的方案,能提高群组展示信息的灵活性。Since different objects within an application have varying levels of understanding and needs regarding the target group, displaying the target group name in a fixed format on the first page often results in limited flexibility in group display. Therefore, this application provides a scheme that uses different target group names to indicate the same group for different objects, thereby improving the flexibility of group information display.
在一些实施例中,步骤310的第一页面的目标群组名称通过以下方式确定:In some embodiments, the target group name of the first page in step 310 is determined in the following way:
将所述第二对象创建所述入口链接时为所述第一对象的终端指定的群组名称,确定为与所述第一对象的终端对应的所述目标群组名称,其中,所述第二对象创建所述入口链接时,为不同的对象终端指定不同的所述群组名称。The group name specified by the second object for the terminal of the first object when creating the entry link is determined as the target group name corresponding to the terminal of the first object, wherein the second object specifies different group names for different object terminals when creating the entry link.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第二对象在创建目标群组的入口链接,并将入口链接关联于目标群组名称时,将目标群组设置成通过入口链接向不同对象以不同的带链接标记的目标群组名称显示,同时,设定各个对象所见到的目标群组名称是怎样的,为不同的对象终端指定不同的目标群组名称。基于此,当第一对象的终端访问第一页面时,根据第二对象的设定,将入口链接显示为与第一对象的终端对应的目标群组名称。In this specific implementation, when the second object creates an entry link for the target group and associates the entry link with the target group name, the target group is set to be displayed to different objects with different linked target group names via the entry link. Simultaneously, the target group name seen by each object is defined, assigning different target group names to different object terminals. Based on this, when the first object's terminal accesses the first page, the entry link is displayed with the target group name corresponding to the first object's terminal, according to the second object's settings.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当第二对象(如群组管理员)创建一个入口链接时,他们可以为不同的对象终端指定不同的群组名称。这意味着,当不同的用户访问第一页面时,他们看到的群组名称可能会有所不同,具体取决于第二对象的设定。第二对象在创建入口链接的设置界面中,可以为每个对象终端指定一个独特的群组名称。例如,第二对象可以为用户A的终端指定“摄影俱乐部”,为用户B的终端指定“摄影社区”,尽管这两个名称指向的是同一个目标群组。当第一对象的终端访问第一页面时,应用程序会根据第二对象的设定,将入口链接显示为与第一对象的终端对应的目标群组名称。例如,如果第一对象是用户A,那么他们会在第一页面上看到“摄影俱乐部”这个群组名称,带有链接标记;如果第一对象是用户B,那么他们会在第一页面上看到“摄影社区”这个群组名称,带有链接标记。允许群组管理员根据不同的用户或设备,灵活地展示群组名称,从而提高用户体验和群组的吸引力。同时,它也为群组管理员提供了一种个性化的方式,来与不同的用户群体进行互动和沟通。通过这种方式,应用程序能够更好地满足不同用户的需求和偏好,增强用户的参与度和满意度。In some embodiments, when a second object (such as a group administrator) creates an entry link in the application, they can specify different group names for different object terminals. This means that when different users access the first page, the group names they see may differ, depending on the settings of the second object. In the settings interface for creating the entry link, the second object can specify a unique group name for each object terminal. For example, the second object can specify "Photography Club" for user A's terminal and "Photography Community" for user B's terminal, even though both names point to the same target group. When the first object's terminal accesses the first page, the application will display the entry link with the target group name corresponding to the first object's terminal, based on the second object's settings. For example, if the first object is user A, they will see the group name "Photography Club" with a link on the first page; if the first object is user B, they will see the group name "Photography Community" with a link. This allows group administrators to flexibly display group names based on different users or devices, thereby improving user experience and group attractiveness. It also provides group administrators with a personalized way to interact and communicate with different user groups. In this way, the application can better meet the needs and preferences of different users, and enhance user engagement and satisfaction.
需要说明的是,在为不同的对象终端指定不同的目标群组名称时,第二对象可以设定每个对象都有一个不同的目标群组名称,使不同对象见到的目标群组名称完全不同,也可以是按照分组来设定不同的群组名称,使一个分组内的各个对象见到的目标群组名称相同,但不同分组的对象见到的目标群组名称不同。It should be noted that when specifying different target group names for different object terminals, the second object can be set so that each object has a different target group name, making the target group names seen by different objects completely different, or different group names can be set according to groups, so that the target group names seen by each object in a group are the same, but the target group names seen by objects in different groups are different.
如图5A所示,对象1在创建一个网球兴趣小组的入口链接时,在应用程序平台上针对这个入口链接进行显示设置。在显示设置页面中,设置网球兴趣小组的入口链接是“https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5”。接着,对象1设置通过网球兴趣小组的入口链接,向群内成员展示的群组名称是“网球爱好者联盟”;向群内成员展示的群组名称是“网球交流群”。As shown in Figure 5A, when Object 1 creates an entry link for a tennis interest group, it configures the display settings for this entry link on the application platform. In the display settings page, the entry link for the tennis interest group is set to "https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5". Next, Object 1 sets the group name displayed to members through the tennis interest group's entry link to be "Tennis Enthusiasts Alliance"; and the group name displayed to members to be "Tennis Exchange Group".
如图5B所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,对象2不是网球兴趣小组的群成员,当对象2在访问篮球兴趣小组的会话页面时,会话页面中显示的对象1发送的内容是网球兴趣小组的带链接标记的群组名称,此时,带链接标记的群组名称是“网球交流群”。As shown in Figure 5B, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. Object 2 is not a member of the tennis interest group. When Object 2 accesses the conversation page of the basketball interest group, the content sent by Object 1 displayed on the conversation page is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag. At this time, the group name with the link tag is "Tennis Exchange Group".
如图5C所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,对象3是网球兴趣小组的群成员,当对象2在访问篮球兴趣小组的会话页面时,会话页面中显示的对象1发送的内容是网球兴趣小组的带链接标记的群组名称,此时,带链接标记的群组名称是“网球爱好者联盟”。As shown in Figure 5C, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. Object 3 is a group member of the tennis interest group. When Object 2 accesses the conversation page of the basketball interest group, the content sent by Object 1 displayed on the conversation page is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag. At this time, the group name with a link tag is "Tennis Enthusiasts Alliance".
作为示例,假设有一个名为“健身达人”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并将其关联到群组名称。管理员希望根据用户的兴趣和偏好,为不同的用户终端指定不同的群组名称。在创建入口链接的设置界面中,管理员可以为每个对象终端指定一个独特的群组名称。例如,管理员可以为喜欢瑜伽的用户终端指定“瑜伽爱好者”,为喜欢力量训练的用户终端指定“力量训练狂热者”,为喜欢有氧运动的用户终端指定“有氧运动爱好者”,尽管这三个名称指向的是同一个目标群组。当用户A(喜欢瑜伽)的终端访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们会在页面上看到“瑜伽爱好者”这个群组名称,带有链接标记。用户A可以点击或触碰这个名称,直接进入群组的会话页面。当用户B(喜欢力量训练)的终端访问第一页面时,他们会在页面上看到“力量训练狂热者”这个群组名称,带有链接标记。用户B点击或触碰这个名称,直接进入群组的会话页面。当用户C(喜欢有氧运动)的终端访问第一页面时,他们会在页面上看到“有氧运动爱好者”这个群组名称,带有链接标记。用户C可以点击或触碰这个名称,直接进入群组的会话页面。这种设计使得群组管理员能够根据用户的兴趣和偏好,灵活地展示群组名称,从而提高用户体验和群组的吸引力。同时,它也为群组管理员提供了一种个性化的方式,来与不同的用户群体进行互动和沟通。通过这种方式,应用程序能够更好地满足不同用户的需求和偏好,增强用户的参与度和满意度。As an example, suppose there's a group called "Fitness Enthusiasts." The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and associates it with the group name. The administrator wants to assign different group names to different user devices based on users' interests and preferences. In the settings interface for creating the entry link, the administrator can assign a unique group name to each user device. For example, the administrator can assign "Yoga Enthusiasts" to user devices that like yoga, "Strength Training Fanatics" to user devices that like strength training, and "Aerobics Enthusiasts" to user devices that like cardio, even though all three names point to the same target group. When user A (who likes yoga) accesses the application's homepage, they will see the group name "Yoga Enthusiasts" with a link. User A can click or tap this name to directly enter the group's conversation page. When user B (who likes strength training) accesses the homepage, they will see the group name "Strength Training Fanatics" with a link. User B can click or tap this name to directly enter the group's conversation page. When user C (who enjoys aerobic exercise) visits the first page, they will see the group name "Aerobic Exercise Enthusiasts" with a link. User C can click or tap this name to directly enter the group's chat page. This design allows group administrators to flexibly display the group name based on users' interests and preferences, thereby improving user experience and group attractiveness. It also provides group administrators with a personalized way to interact and communicate with different user groups. In this way, the application can better meet the needs and preferences of different users, enhancing user engagement and satisfaction.
该实施例的好处是,在第二对象在创建目标群组的入口链接时,提供为不同对象终端设定不同的目标群组名称的渠道,使第二对象可以按照需求,为不同对象指定不同的目标群组名称,针对不同对象以不同的目标群组名称来指示相同群组,能提高群组展示信息的灵活性。The advantage of this embodiment is that when the second object creates the entry link for the target group, it provides a channel to set different target group names for different object terminals, so that the second object can specify different target group names for different objects as needed, and use different target group names to indicate the same group for different objects, which can improve the flexibility of group display information.
由于不同的对象对于群组命名的偏好是不一样的,例如,有的对象偏好于将群组名称以简洁的方式显示,而有的对象偏好于将群组名称具体化显示。另外,不同对象所偏好的群组名称显示时的字体、字号等格式也各不相同,例如,有的群体需要将群组名称以较大的字号显示,以帮助这一群体清楚地确定群组名称所指示的是哪个群组。基于此,本申请提供了一种基于第二对象在创建时根据对象偏好来控制入口链接的显示形式的方案,能使将显示的目标群组名称更贴合于各个对象的偏好,提高入口链接的显示多样性。Because different objects have different preferences for group naming—for example, some objects prefer to display group names in a concise way, while others prefer to display them in a more specific way—and because different objects also have different preferences for the font, font size, and other formats of the group names, some groups require the group names to be displayed in a larger font size to help this group clearly identify which group the group name refers to, this application provides a scheme that allows the display format of entry links to be controlled according to the object's preferences when the second object is created. This makes the displayed target group names more in line with the preferences of each object, improving the display diversity of entry links.
在一些实施例中,步骤310的第一页面的目标群组名称通过以下方式确定:In some embodiments, the target group name of the first page in step 310 is determined in the following way:
将多个候选群组名称中、与所述第一对象的终端的第一对象偏好对应的候选群组名称,确定为所述目标群组名称,其中,所述多个候选群组名称为所述第二对象创建所述入口链接时与所述入口链接关联。The candidate group name that corresponds to the first object preference of the terminal of the first object among the multiple candidate group names is determined as the target group name, wherein the multiple candidate group names are associated with the entry link when the second object creates the entry link.
第一对象偏好用于指示第一对象的终端的对象在群组名称显示上的习惯偏好,其中,第一对象偏好包括但不限于对象对于群组名称显示时的字体、字号、格式等偏好。The first object preference is used to indicate the habitual preferences of the terminal of the first object in the display of group names. The first object preference includes, but is not limited to, the object's preference for font, font size, format, etc. when displaying group names.
候选群组名称用于指示对同一个目标群组的不同命名方式。Candidate group names are used to indicate different naming methods for the same target group.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当第二对象(如群组管理员)创建一个入口链接时,他们可以为同一个目标群组设置多个候选群组名称。这些候选群组名称代表了对同一个群组的不同命名方式,旨在满足不同用户在群组名称显示上的偏好。这些偏好包括但不限于字体类型、字号大小、格式等。In some embodiments, within an application, when a second object (such as a group administrator) creates an entry link, they can set multiple candidate group names for the same target group. These candidate group names represent different naming methods for the same group, designed to meet the preferences of different users regarding group name display. These preferences include, but are not limited to, font type, font size, format, etc.
在一些实施例中,应用程序会首先收集第一对象的终端的群组名称显示偏好。这通常是通过用户在应用程序中的设置或使用习惯来确定的。例如,用户可能在设置中选择了特定的字体和字号,或者在过去的使用中经常选择某种显示格式。接下来,应用程序会分析这些偏好,并将它们与第二对象为入口链接设置的多个候选群组名称进行匹配。每个候选群组名称都可能有不同的显示设置,如不同的字体、字号或格式。应用程序的目标是找到与第一对象偏好最匹配的候选群组名称。一旦找到匹配的候选群组名称,应用程序就会将这个名称作为目标群组名称显示在第一对象的终端上。这样,第一对象就会看到一个符合自己显示偏好的群组名称,从而提高用户体验和满意度。能够根据用户的个性化需求来展示群组名称,增强了用户与应用程序的互动性和满意度。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户个性化需求的重视和响应能力,有助于提升应用程序的整体用户体验。In some embodiments, the application first collects the group name display preferences of the first user's terminal. This is typically determined through the user's settings or usage habits within the application. For example, a user might have selected a specific font and size in the settings, or frequently chosen a certain display format in past use. Next, the application analyzes these preferences and matches them against multiple candidate group names set by the second user for the entry link. Each candidate group name may have different display settings, such as different fonts, sizes, or formats. The application's goal is to find the candidate group name that best matches the first user's preferences. Once a matching candidate group name is found, the application displays this name as the target group name on the first user's terminal. In this way, the first user sees a group name that matches their display preferences, thereby improving user experience and satisfaction. The ability to display group names based on the user's personalized needs enhances user interaction and application satisfaction. Simultaneously, it demonstrates the application's attention to and responsiveness to user personalization needs, contributing to an improved overall user experience.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“美食交流”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了多个候选群组名称,以适应不同用户的显示偏好。这些候选群组名称包括:“美食家”,采用优雅的字体,较大的字号,适合喜欢正式风格的用户。“吃货乐园”,采用活泼的字体,中等字号,适合年轻、喜欢轻松风格的用户。“烹饪天地”,采用专业字体,较小的字号,适合对烹饪感兴趣、喜欢技术细节的用户。每个候选群组名称都对应着不同的显示设置,以满足不同用户的偏好。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Food Exchange." The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and sets multiple candidate group names for this entry link to suit different users' display preferences. These candidate group names include: "Gourmet," using an elegant font and a large font size, suitable for users who prefer a formal style; "Foodie Paradise," using a lively font and a medium font size, suitable for younger users who prefer a relaxed style; and "Cooking World," using a professional font and a smaller font size, suitable for users interested in cooking and appreciating technical details. Each candidate group name corresponds to different display settings to meet the preferences of different users.
作为示例,当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,应用程序会检测到用户A的终端偏好设置。假设用户A偏好使用正式风格的字体和较大的字号。因此,应用程序会将“美食家”作为目标群组名称显示在用户A的终端上。当第二对象(用户B)访问第一页面时,应用程序检测到用户B偏好使用活泼的字体和中等字号。因此,应用程序会将“吃货乐园”作为目标群组名称显示在用户B的终端上。当第三对象(用户C)访问第一页面时,应用程序检测到用户C偏好使用专业字体和较小的字号。因此,应用程序会将“烹饪天地”作为目标群组名称显示在用户C的终端上。群组管理员能够根据用户的显示偏好,为每个用户提供个性化的群组名称显示,从而提高用户的满意度和参与度。同时,这也展示了应用程序对用户个性化需求的重视和响应能力。As an example, when the first user (User A) visits the application's first page, the application detects User A's device preferences. Assume User A prefers a formal font and a large font size. Therefore, the application will display "Gourmet" as the target group name on User A's device. When the second user (User B) visits the first page, the application detects that User B prefers a lively font and a medium font size. Therefore, the application will display "Foodie Paradise" as the target group name on User B's device. When the third user (User C) visits the first page, the application detects that User C prefers a professional font and a small font size. Therefore, the application will display "Cooking World" as the target group name on User C's device. Group administrators can provide personalized group name displays for each user based on their display preferences, thereby improving user satisfaction and engagement. This also demonstrates the application's attention to and responsiveness to users' personalized needs.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第二对象在创建目标群组的入口链接,并将入口链接关联于目标群组名称时,考虑到不同对象针对群组名称的显示偏好不同。首先,在经过授权许可的情况下,从服务器的后台日志中获取各个对象在应用程序设定的群组显示参数,其中,群组显示参数包括群组名称的显示字体、字号大小、和显示模式等等。接着,将群组显示参数的相似度大于预定阈值的各个对象纳入同一个集合,并为各个集合设置一个与群组显示参数对应的候选群组名称,使集合中的各个对象访问到入口链接时,将入口链接显示成与之对应的候选群组名称。其中,各个候选群组名称都用于指示目标群组。基于此,在第一对象的终端访问第一页面时,先确定第一对象的终端根据第一对象偏好所划分到的集合,将集合对应的候选群组名称作为带有链接标记的目标群组名称进行显示,使显示的目标群组名称与第一对象的终端的偏好相适应。In this specific implementation, when the second object creates an entry link to the target group and associates the entry link with the target group name, considering the different display preferences of different objects for group names, firstly, with authorization, the group display parameters set by each object in the application are obtained from the server's background logs. These parameters include the display font, font size, and display mode of the group name. Next, objects whose similarity in group display parameters exceeds a predetermined threshold are grouped into the same set, and a candidate group name corresponding to the group display parameters is set for each set. When an object in the set accesses the entry link, the entry link is displayed as the corresponding candidate group name. Each candidate group name is used to indicate the target group. Based on this, when the first object's terminal accesses the first page, the set to which the first object's terminal belongs based on the first object's preferences is first determined, and the candidate group name corresponding to the set is displayed as the target group name with a link tag, ensuring that the displayed target group name is adapted to the first object's terminal's preferences.
如图6A所示,在创建一个网球兴趣小组的入口链接时,在应用程序平台上针对这个入口链接进行显示设置。在显示设置页面中,设置网球兴趣小组的候选群组名称有群组全称“A市and B市网球兴趣交流小组”、和群组简称“A+B市网球小组”,其入口链接是“https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5”。接着,根据各个对象对于显示群组全称和群组简称的习惯偏好,将各个对象分为两个对象组,其中,第一种偏好的对象组由偏好于显示群组全称的对象构成,对象组包括对象2、对象11、对象5、对象6等等;第二种偏好的对象组由偏好于显示群组简称的对象构成,对象组包括对象3、对象4、对象4、对象15等等。As shown in Figure 6A, when creating an entry link for a tennis interest group, the application platform configures the display settings for this entry link. In the display settings page, the candidate group names for the tennis interest group are set to the full name "City A and City B Tennis Interest Exchange Group" and the abbreviation "A+B City Tennis Group," with the entry link being "https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5." Next, based on the preferences of various users regarding the display of the full group name and the abbreviation, the users are divided into two groups. The first group consists of users who prefer to display the full group name, including users 2, 11, 5, 6, etc. The second group consists of users who prefer to display the abbreviation, including users 3, 4, 5, 15, etc.
如图6B所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,对象2在访问篮球兴趣小组的会话页面时,会话页面中显示的对象1发送的内容是网球兴趣小组的带链接标记的群组名称,此时,带链接标记的群组名称是“A市and B市网球兴趣交流小组”。As shown in Figure 6B, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. When Object 2 accesses the conversation page of the basketball interest group, the content sent by Object 1 displayed on the conversation page is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag. At this time, the group name with the link tag is "A City and B City Tennis Interest Exchange Group".
如图6C所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,对象3在访问篮球兴趣小组的会话页面时,会话页面中显示的对象1发送的内容是网球兴趣小组的带链接标记的群组名称,此时,带链接标记的群组名称是“A+B市网球小组”。As shown in Figure 6C, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. When Object 3 accesses the basketball interest group's chat page, the chat page displays the content sent by Object 1, which is the group name of the tennis interest group with a link tag. At this time, the group name with the link tag is "A+B City Tennis Group".
该实施例的好处是,第二对象在创建入口链接时,根据对象偏好来选择为各个对象显示的目标群组名称,针对不同的对象,将同一个群组以不同的名称展示,使将显示的目标群组名称更贴合于各个对象的偏好,能提高入口链接的显示多样性,并提高对象在应用程序的使用体验。The advantage of this embodiment is that when the second object creates the entry link, it selects the target group name to be displayed for each object according to the object's preferences. For different objects, the same group is displayed with different names, making the displayed target group name more in line with the preferences of each object. This can improve the display diversity of the entry link and enhance the user experience of the object in the application.
步骤320的详细描述Detailed description of step 320
在步骤320中,响应于在目标群组名称周围触发的停留操作,显示目标群组的基本信息。In step 320, in response to a dwell action triggered around the target group name, basic information about the target group is displayed.
在一些实施例中,目标区域为所述第一页面中与所述目标群组名称的显示位置之间的距离小于距离阈值的区域,所述基本信息用于提示所述第一对象是否触发所述链接标记。In some embodiments, the target area is an area on the first page where the distance between the display location of the target group name and the target area is less than a distance threshold, and the basic information is used to prompt the first object whether the link tag is triggered.
在本申请实施例中,目标群组的基本信息包括第二对象创建目标群组时设置的信息、和应用程序平台基于基本信息提取规则从目标群组中提取的信息中的至少一个。In this embodiment of the application, the basic information of the target group includes at least one of the information set when the second object creates the target group and the information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on the basic information extraction rules.
第二对象创建目标群组时设置的信息是第二对象所希望对象在不打开会话页面的情况下能预览到的群组信息。The information set when the second object creates the target group is the group information that the second object wants the object to be able to preview without opening the session page.
应用程序平台基于基本信息提取规则从目标群组中提取的信息是应用程序平台根据目标群组的群组类型、群组安全级别等多种因素所筛选出的、能在不打开会话页面前预览的群组信息。The information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on basic information extraction rules is group information that can be previewed before the session page is opened, selected by the application platform based on various factors such as the target group's group type and group security level.
上述的第二对象创建目标群组时设置的信息、应用程序平台基于基本信息提取规则从目标群组中提取的信息可能会存在着信息重叠,当两者所要显示的信息相同时,只将信息显示一遍即可。The information set when the second object creates the target group and the information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on the basic information extraction rules may overlap. When the information to be displayed by both is the same, the information only needs to be displayed once.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当用户(第一对象)在第一页面的目标区域内触发停留操作时,系统会显示目标群组的基本信息。目标区域是第一页面中与目标群组名称的显示位置之间的距离小于距离阈值的区域。这种设计允许用户在不直接点击或触发链接标记的情况下,通过简单的停留操作来预览群组的基本信息,从而帮助用户决定是否要打开会话页面。In some embodiments, within the application, when a user (the first object) triggers a hover action within a target area on the first page, the system displays basic information about the target group. The target area is the region on the first page whose distance from the display location of the target group name is less than a distance threshold. This design allows users to preview basic information about the group through a simple hover action without directly clicking or triggering a link, thus helping users decide whether to open the session page.
在一些实施例中,第二对象(如群组管理员)在创建目标群组时设置的信息。这部分信息是管理员希望用户在不打开会话页面的情况下能够预览到的群组信息,可能包括群组的描述、目的、规则等。应用程序平台基于基本信息提取规则从目标群组中提取的信息。这部分信息是应用程序平台根据目标群组的群组类型、群组安全级别等多种因素筛选出的,能在不打开会话页面前预览的群组信息。例如,对于一个公开群组,应用程序平台可能会提取群组的最新讨论话题或活动;而对于一个私密群组,平台可能会提取群组的成员数量或管理员的简介。当第二对象创建目标群组时设置的信息和应用程序平台基于基本信息提取规则从目标群组中提取的信息存在重叠时,会确保只显示一次相同的信息,以避免冗余和混淆。提高了用户的体验,使用户能够在不深入群组的情况下获取必要的信息,帮助他们做出是否加入或参与群组的决定。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对群组信息管理的灵活性。In some embodiments, the second object (such as a group administrator) sets information when creating the target group. This information is group information that the administrator wants users to preview without opening the session page, and may include the group's description, purpose, rules, etc. The application platform extracts information from the target group based on basic information extraction rules. This information is filtered by the application platform based on various factors such as the target group's group type and security level, and can be previewed before opening the session page. For example, for a public group, the application platform might extract the group's latest discussion topics or activities; while for a private group, the platform might extract the number of members or the administrator's profile. When there is overlap between the information set by the second object when creating the target group and the information extracted by the application platform based on basic information extraction rules, it ensures that the same information is displayed only once to avoid redundancy and confusion. This improves the user experience, allowing users to obtain necessary information without delving into the group, helping them decide whether to join or participate in the group. It also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and its flexibility in managing group information.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“摄影技巧交流”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了目标群组名称“摄影技巧交流”。管理员希望用户在不打开会话页面的情况下,能够预览到一些群组的基本信息。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记的群组名称“摄影技巧交流”。用户A将鼠标悬停在群组名称附近的目标区域(与群组名称的显示位置之间的距离小于距离阈值的区域)上,触发了停留操作。响应于用户的停留操作,应用程序在用户A的终端上显示了目标群组的基本信息。这些信息包括:群组描述:“欢迎摄影爱好者加入,分享和学习摄影技巧,交流心得。”这是管理员在创建群组时设置的信息,希望用户在不打开会话页面的情况下能够了解群组的目的和内容。最新讨论话题:“如何拍摄出美丽的日落照片?”这是应用程序平台根据群组类型和安全级别筛选出的、能在不打开会话页面前预览的群组信息。它帮助用户了解群组的活跃程度和讨论的话题。如果管理员在创建群组时设置的信息和应用程序平台提取的信息存在重叠(例如,管理员也提到了最新讨论话题),应用程序会确保只显示一次相同的信息,以避免冗余。用户A能够在不打开会话页面的情况下,预览到群组的基本信息,帮助他们决定是否要打开会话页面,参与群组讨论。这种设计提高了用户的体验,使用户能够在不深入群组的情况下获取必要的信息,帮助他们做出是否加入或参与群组的决定。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对群组信息管理的灵活性。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Photography Tips Exchange". The group administrator (the second user) created an entry link and set the target group name "Photography Tips Exchange" for this entry link. The administrator wants users to be able to preview some basic information about the group without opening the session page. When the first user (user A) visits the application's first page, they see the group name "Photography Tips Exchange" with a link. User A hovers their mouse over the target area near the group name (the area less than a distance threshold from the displayed position of the group name), triggering a hover action. In response to the user's hover action, the application displays basic information about the target group on User A's device. This information includes: Group description: "Welcome photography enthusiasts to join, share and learn photography tips, and exchange experiences." This information was set by the administrator when creating the group, hoping that users can understand the purpose and content of the group without opening the session page. Latest discussion topic: "How to take beautiful sunset photos?" This is group information that the application platform filters based on group type and security level, which can be previewed before opening the session page. It helps users understand the group's activity level and the topics discussed. If there is overlap between the information set by the administrator when creating the group and the information extracted by the application platform (for example, the administrator also mentions the latest discussion topic), the application will ensure that the same information is displayed only once to avoid redundancy. User A can preview the basic information of the group without opening the conversation page, helping them decide whether to open the conversation page and participate in the group discussion. This design improves the user experience, allowing users to obtain the necessary information without delving into the group, helping them make decisions about whether to join or participate. At the same time, it also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and its flexibility in managing group information.
在一些实例中,应用程序平台基于基本信息提取规则从目标群组中提取信息时,将基本信息提取规则设定成:根据目标群组的安全分数设定多个分数区间,各个分数区间设定与之对应的、要提取的信息项。其中,安全分数根据目标群组的群组类型确定。各个群组类型具有预先设定的分数值。In some instances, when the application platform extracts information from a target group based on basic information extraction rules, the basic information extraction rules are set as follows: multiple score ranges are defined based on the target group's security score, and each score range corresponds to a specific information item to be extracted. The security score is determined based on the target group's group type. Each group type has a pre-defined score value.
例如,对于体育类的群组,分数值是60;对于美食类的群组,分数值是40;对于游戏类的群组,分数值是80。当目标群组的安全分数在0-40之间时,提取的信息项是目标群组的群组人数、群组创建时间等。当目标群组的安全分数在80-100之间时,提取的信息项是目标群组的群组当前人数、群组人数上限等。For example, the score is 60 for sports groups, 40 for food groups, and 80 for gaming groups. When the target group's security score is between 0 and 40, the extracted information includes the number of members and the group's creation time. When the target group's security score is between 80 and 100, the extracted information includes the current number of members and the maximum number of members allowed in the group.
作为示例,应用程序平台在提取目标群组的基本信息时,会根据群组的安全分数来决定提取哪些信息项。安全分数是根据群组的类型预先设定的,不同类型的群组有不同的安全分数值。例如,体育类群组的安全分数可能是60,美食类群组可能是40,游戏类群组可能是80。平台会将这些安全分数划分成多个分数区间,并为每个区间设定相应的信息项。例如:As an example, when extracting basic information about a target group, the application platform determines which information items to extract based on the group's security score. The security score is pre-set based on the group type; different group types have different security score values. For example, a sports group might have a security score of 60, a food group might have 40, and a gaming group might have 80. The platform divides these security scores into multiple score ranges and assigns corresponding information items to each range. For example:
0-40分:这个区间可能对应较低的安全级别,平台可能会提取一些基本信息,如群组的人数和创建时间。这些信息相对公开,不会泄露敏感内容。0-40 points: This range may correspond to a lower security level. The platform may extract some basic information, such as the number of people in the group and the creation time. This information is relatively public and will not disclose sensitive content.
41-60分:这个区间可能对应中等的安全级别,平台可能会提取更多的信息,如群组的最新活动或讨论主题。这些信息可以帮助用户了解群组的活跃程度和讨论内容。41-60 points: This range likely corresponds to a medium level of security. The platform may extract more information, such as the group's latest activities or discussion topics. This information can help users understand the group's activity level and discussion content.
61-80分:这个区间可能对应较高的安全级别,平台可能会提取一些更详细的信息,如群组的规则或管理员的联系方式。这些信息有助于用户了解群组的管理方式和参与要求。61-80 points: This range may correspond to a higher security level, and the platform may extract more detailed information, such as group rules or administrator contact information. This information helps users understand the group's management methods and participation requirements.
81-100分:这个区间可能对应最高的安全级别,平台可能会提取一些更敏感的信息,如群组的当前人数和人数上限。这些信息有助于用户了解群组的规模和是否还有加入的空间。81-100 points: This range likely corresponds to the highest security level. The platform may extract more sensitive information, such as the current number of members in the group and the maximum number of members allowed. This information helps users understand the size of the group and whether there is still room for new members.
当用户在第一页面的目标区域内触发停留操作时,平台会根据目标群组的安全分数来提取相应的信息项,并显示给用户。例如,如果一个游戏类群组的安全分数是80,那么平台可能会提取群组的当前人数和人数上限等信息,显示给用户。可以帮助用户在不打开会话页面的情况下,了解群组的基本信息和安全级别,从而做出是否要参与群组的决定。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对群组信息管理的灵活性。When a user pauses within the target area on the first page, the platform extracts relevant information based on the target group's security score and displays it to the user. For example, if a gaming group has a security score of 80, the platform might extract information such as the current number of members and the maximum number of members, displaying this information to the user. This helps users understand the group's basic information and security level without opening the chat page, allowing them to decide whether to join the group. It also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and its flexibility in managing group information.
如图2C所示,是目标群组为单个群组时,将鼠标悬停在会话页面中的带链接标记的目标群组名称的周围所显示的目标群组的基本信息。此时,目标群组的基本信息有“群组人数:10;是否已加入:是;群主昵称:xxx1”等信息。As shown in Figure 2C, when the target group is a single group, the basic information of the target group is displayed when the mouse hovers around the target group name with the link mark in the session page. At this time, the basic information of the target group includes "Group members: 10; Has anyone joined: Yes; Group owner nickname: xxx1", etc.
如图7所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,是目标群组包括多个子群组时,将鼠标悬停在会话页面中的带链接标记的目标群组名称的周围所显示的目标群组的基本信息。具体地,对象3在篮球兴趣小组的会话页面中将鼠标停留在对象1发送的带链接标记的群组名称“羽毛球兴趣小组”周围时,会显示羽毛球兴趣小组所包括的三个目标子群组的带链接标记的目标子群组名称,其中,三个子群组的子群组名称分别是“羽毛球兴趣小组1群”、“羽毛球兴趣小组2群”、“羽毛球新人培训”。As shown in Figure 7, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. When the target group includes multiple subgroups, hovering the mouse over the linked target group name in the session page displays basic information about the target group. Specifically, when Object 3 hovers the mouse over the linked group name "Badminton Interest Group" sent by Object 1 in the basketball interest group's session page, the linked target subgroup names of the three target subgroups included in the badminton interest group will be displayed. These three subgroup names are "Badminton Interest Group 1," "Badminton Interest Group 2," and "Badminton Newcomer Training."
该实施例的好处是,在应用程序中设置对显示成带链接标记的目标群组名称的入口链接的预览功能,使对象在不打开群组的会话页面的前提下,能预览到群组的基本信息,了解到目标群组是一个怎样的群组,从而确定自己是否要加入到这个群组里。另外,针对目标群组为单一群组、和多群组时分别设定了群组基本信息的具体内容,能提高群组信息的传递效率、和信息展示多样性。The advantage of this embodiment is that by setting up a preview function in the application for the entry link displayed as the target group name with a link mark, users can preview the basic information of the group without opening the group's session page, understand what kind of group it is, and thus decide whether to join the group. Furthermore, by setting specific content for the basic group information for single and multiple target groups, the efficiency of group information transmission and the diversity of information display can be improved.
步骤330的详细描述Detailed description of step 330
在步骤330中,响应于针对链接标记的触发,显示目标群组的会话页面。In step 330, in response to a trigger on a link tag, the session page for the target group is displayed.
为了提高信息传递效率,使第一对象的终端可以快速地访问目标群组的会话页面,本申请提供了一种基于触发直接显示会话页面的方案。To improve information transmission efficiency and enable the terminal of the first object to quickly access the session page of the target group, this application provides a scheme based on triggering to directly display the session page.
在一些实施例中,步骤330具体包括:In some embodiments, step 330 specifically includes:
响应于针对链接标记的触发,如果确定目标群组中包括第一对象,则显示目标群组的会话页面。In response to a trigger on a link tag, if the first object is determined to be included in the target group, the session page for the target group is displayed.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第一对象的终端通过目标对象对链接标记进行触发时,服务器首先会检测到目标对象和链接标记的交互产生的触发事件。接着,根据触发事件,在经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与第一对象的终端的信息进行比较,以判断第一对象的终端是否为目标群组的群成员之一。如果确定目标群组包括第一对象,则直接在应用程序中显示目标群组的会话页面,使第一对象的终端可以直接查看其他群成员的会话记录,并与其他群成员进行会话。In this specific implementation, when the terminal of the first object triggers the link tag through the target object, the server first detects the trigger event generated by the interaction between the target object and the link tag. Then, based on the trigger event, and with authorization, the information of each member of the target group is compared with the information of the terminal of the first object to determine whether the terminal of the first object is a member of the target group. If it is determined that the target group includes the first object, the session page of the target group is directly displayed in the application, allowing the terminal of the first object to directly view the session records of other group members and engage in conversations with other group members.
在一些实施例中,当用户(第一对象)通过其终端在应用程序中点击或触碰一个链接标记时,如果该链接标记指向的是一个群组(目标群组),应用程序会执行一系列步骤来确定用户是否有权限查看该群组的会话页面。当用户通过其终端对链接标记进行触发操作时,应用程序会检测到这个触发事件。这个事件可能是一个点击、触碰或其他形式的交互。在检测到触发事件后,应用程序会检查用户是否有权限查看目标群组的会话页面。这通常涉及到验证用户是否是目标群组的成员。应用程序可能会与服务器通信,请求验证用户的成员资格。服务器会根据用户的终端信息和目标群组的成员列表进行比较,以确定用户是否是目标群组的成员。这可能涉及到检查用户的账号信息、群组邀请状态或其他成员资格验证机制。In some embodiments, when a user (the first object) clicks or touches a link in the application via their terminal, if the link points to a group (the target group), the application performs a series of steps to determine if the user has permission to view the group's session page. The application detects this triggering event when the user interacts with the link via their terminal. This event could be a click, touch, or other form of interaction. After detecting the triggering event, the application checks if the user has permission to view the target group's session page. This typically involves verifying whether the user is a member of the target group. The application may communicate with a server requesting verification of the user's membership. The server compares the user's terminal information with the target group's member list to determine if the user is a member of the target group. This may involve checking the user's account information, group invitation status, or other membership verification mechanisms.
在一些实施例中,如果服务器确认用户是目标群组的成员,应用程序会直接显示目标群组的会话页面。这个页面通常包含群组的记录、成员列表、群组公告等信息。用户可以在这里查看其他群成员的会话记录,并与其他群成员进行实时交流。如果服务器确认用户不是目标群组的成员,应用程序可能会显示一个提示信息,告知用户无法查看该群组的会话页面,或者提供一个加入群组的选项,让用户可以申请加入。整个过程确保了只有目标群组的成员才能查看和参与群组的会话,保护了群组的隐私和安全性。同时,也为用户提供了一个方便快捷的方式,让他们能够迅速加入或查看自己感兴趣的群组。In some embodiments, if the server confirms that the user is a member of the target group, the application will directly display the target group's conversation page. This page typically contains information such as group history, member list, and group announcements. Users can view the conversation history of other group members and communicate with them in real time. If the server confirms that the user is not a member of the target group, the application may display a message informing the user that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This entire process ensures that only members of the target group can view and participate in the group's conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. At the same time, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“摄影爱好者”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了链接标记“加入摄影爱好者群组”。管理员希望用户在点击这个链接标记后,如果他们已经是群组的成员,能够直接查看群组的会话页面。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记“加入摄影爱好者群组”的群组名称。用户A对摄影很感兴趣,决定点击这个链接标记。响应于用户的点击操作,应用程序向服务器发送了一个触发事件。服务器首先检测到这个触发事件,然后根据触发事件,在经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与用户A的终端信息进行比较。假设用户A已经是“摄影爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会确认这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,会直接显示“摄影爱好者”群组的会话页面。用户A可以在会话页面中查看其他群成员的会话记录,并与其他群成员进行实时交流。如果用户B点击了同一个链接标记,但用户B不是“摄影爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会检测到这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,可能会显示一个提示信息,告知用户B无法查看该群组的会话页面,或者提供一个加入群组的选项,让用户B可以申请加入。确保了只有群组的成员才能查看和参与群组的会话,保护了群组的隐私和安全性。同时,也为用户提供了一个方便快捷的方式,让他们能够迅速加入或查看自己感兴趣的群组。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Photography Enthusiasts". The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Photography Enthusiasts Group" for this entry link. The administrator wants users who click this link to directly view the group's conversation page if they are already members of the group. When the first object (user A) visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join Photography Enthusiasts Group" link. User A is interested in photography and decides to click the link. In response to the user's click, the application sends a trigger event to the server. The server first detects this trigger event and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with user A's terminal information. Assuming user A is already a member of the "Photography Enthusiasts" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. Upon receiving the notification, the application will directly display the "Photography Enthusiasts" group's conversation page. User A can view the conversation records of other group members on the conversation page and communicate with other group members in real time. If user B clicks the same link, but user B is not a member of the "Photography Enthusiasts" group, the server will detect this and notify the application. Upon receiving the notification, the application may display a message informing user B that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This ensures that only group members can view and participate in group conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. Simultaneously, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
该实施例的好处是,当检测到第一对象的终端通过目标对象对链接标记触发,在确定目标群组包括第一对象时,直接根据触发操作显示目标群组的会话页面,不设置任何中间环节,使第一对象的终端可以快速地访问目标群组的会话页面,提高了信息传递效率。The advantage of this embodiment is that when the terminal of the first object is detected to have triggered the link mark through the target object, and the target group is determined to include the first object, the session page of the target group is directly displayed according to the triggering operation without setting any intermediate links, so that the terminal of the first object can quickly access the session page of the target group, thereby improving the efficiency of information transmission.
请参照图8,在一些实施例中,确定目标群组包括第一对象通过以下方式确定:Referring to Figure 8, in some embodiments, the target group including the first object is determined in the following manner:
步骤810、获取目标群组中的各个候选对象终端的候选终端标识;Step 810: Obtain the candidate terminal identifier of each candidate object terminal in the target group;
步骤820、如果确定第一对象的终端的终端标识与一个候选终端标识一致,则确定目标群组包括第一对象。Step 820: If the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object is found to be consistent with a candidate terminal identifier, then the target group is determined to include the first object.
下面对步骤810-820进行详细描述。Steps 810-820 are described in detail below.
在步骤810中,获取目标群组中的各个候选对象终端的候选终端标识。In step 810, the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal in the target group are obtained.
候选对象终端指的是在应用程序上已经完成注册的、属于目标群组的群成员的各个对象终端。Candidate object terminals refer to the various object terminals that have been registered on the application and belong to the group members of the target group.
候选终端标识用于对候选对象终端进行身份标识,以区分不同的候选对象终端。Candidate terminal identifiers are used to identify candidate terminals in order to distinguish different candidate terminals.
在该实施例具体实现时,由于应用程序的各个群组的群组基本信息、和群成员相关信息都被记录在服务器的后台日志中。基于此,在经过授权许可的情况下,可以从服务器的后台日志中获取目标群组的群成员相关信息,并从群成员相关信息中提取出目标群组中的各个候选对象终端(群成员)的候选终端标识。In this specific implementation, the basic information of each group in the application and the information related to group members are recorded in the server's background log. Based on this, with authorization, the information related to group members of the target group can be obtained from the server's background log, and the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal (group member) in the target group can be extracted from the information related to group members.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,获取目标群组中的各个候选对象终端的候选终端标识是一个关键步骤,它涉及到对群组成员的终端进行身份标识,以便于区分不同的成员终端。每个在应用程序上注册的用户都有一个唯一的终端标识,这个标识可以是设备ID、用户账号ID或其他形式的唯一标识符。这些标识符用于在服务器端唯一识别每个用户终端。应用程序的各个群组的群组基本信息和群成员相关信息都被记录在服务器的后台日志中。这些信息包括群组ID、群组名称、群组描述、群成员列表及其终端标识等。为了保护用户隐私和数据安全,只有在经过授权许可的情况下,才能从服务器的后台日志中获取群组成员的相关信息。这通常涉及到验证请求者的身份和权限,确保只有合法的请求才能访问这些信息。一旦获得授权,可以从服务器的后台日志中获取目标群组的群成员相关信息。这包括群组ID、群组名称、群组描述以及群成员的终端标识等。群成员相关信息中,可以提取出目标群组中的各个候选对象终端的候选终端标识。这些标识符用于在应用程序中唯一标识每个群成员的终端,以便于进行消息推送、会话管理等操作。在提取和使用这些终端标识时,必须遵守相关的隐私保护法规和政策,确保用户数据的安全和隐私不被泄露。应用程序可以获取目标群组中各个群成员的终端标识,从而实现对群组成员的精准管理和个性化服务。这不仅提高了应用程序的用户体验,也增强了群组的互动性和凝聚力。In some embodiments, obtaining the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal in the target group is a crucial step in the application. This involves identifying the terminals of group members to distinguish different member terminals. Each user registered on the application has a unique terminal identifier, which can be a device ID, user account ID, or other unique identifier. These identifiers are used to uniquely identify each user terminal on the server side. The basic group information and group member information of each group in the application are recorded in the server's background log. This information includes the group ID, group name, group description, list of group members, and their terminal identifiers. To protect user privacy and data security, group member information can only be obtained from the server's background log with authorization. This typically involves verifying the requester's identity and permissions to ensure that only legitimate requests can access this information. Once authorized, the group member information of the target group can be obtained from the server's background log. This includes the group ID, group name, group description, and terminal identifiers of group members. From the group member information, the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate object terminal in the target group can be extracted. These identifiers are used to uniquely identify each group member's terminal in the application to facilitate operations such as message push and session management. When extracting and using these terminal identifiers, relevant privacy regulations and policies must be followed to ensure the security and privacy of user data are not compromised. Applications can obtain the terminal identifiers of individual group members within a target group, thereby enabling precise management and personalized services for group members. This not only improves the user experience of the application but also enhances group interactivity and cohesion.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“舞蹈爱好者”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了链接标记“加入舞蹈爱好者群组”。管理员希望用户在点击这个链接标记后,如果他们已经是群组的成员,能够直接查看群组的会话页面。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记“加入舞蹈爱好者群组”的群组名称。用户A对舞蹈很感兴趣,决定点击这个链接标记。响应于用户的点击操作,应用程序向服务器发送了一个触发事件。服务器首先检测到这个触发事件,然后根据触发事件,在经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与用户A的终端信息进行比较。假设用户A已经是“舞蹈爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会确认这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,会直接显示“舞蹈爱好者”群组的会话页面。用户A可以在会话页面中查看其他群成员的会话记录,并与其他群成员进行实时交流。另一方面,如果用户B点击了同一个链接标记,但用户B不是“舞蹈爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会检测到这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,可能会显示一个提示信息,告知用户B无法查看该群组的会话页面,或者提供一个加入群组的选项,让用户B可以申请加入。这种设计确保了只有群组的成员才能查看和参与群组的会话,保护了群组的隐私和安全性。同时,也为用户提供了一个方便快捷的方式,让他们能够迅速加入或查看自己感兴趣的群组。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Dance Lovers". The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join the Dance Lovers Group" for this entry link. The administrator wants users who click this link to directly view the group's conversation page if they are already members of the group. When the first object (user A) visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join the Dance Lovers Group" link. User A is interested in dance and decides to click the link. In response to the user's click, the application sends a trigger event to the server. The server first detects this trigger event and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with user A's terminal information. Assuming user A is already a member of the "Dance Lovers" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. After receiving the notification, the application will directly display the "Dance Lovers" group's conversation page. User A can view the conversation history of other group members on the conversation page and communicate with other group members in real time. On the other hand, if user B clicks the same link, but user B is not a member of the "Dance Lovers" group, the server will detect this and notify the application. Upon receiving the notification, the application may display a message informing user B that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This design ensures that only group members can view and participate in group conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. At the same time, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
如此,通过获取目标群组中各个候选对象终端的候选终端标识,应用程序能够实现对群组成员的精准识别和管理。基于服务器后台日志中记录的群组基本信息和群成员相关信息,确保了数据的准确性和可靠性。在经过授权许可的情况下,提取出的候选终端标识不仅用于区分不同的群成员终端,还为应用程序提供了高效的消息推送和会话管理的基础。这种精准的终端标识机制有助于提升用户体验,增强群组的互动性和凝聚力,同时也有助于维护群组的安全性和隐私性。In this way, by obtaining the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate device in the target group, the application can accurately identify and manage group members. Based on the basic group information and member-related information recorded in the server's backend logs, the accuracy and reliability of the data are ensured. With authorization, the extracted candidate terminal identifiers not only distinguish different group member devices but also provide the foundation for efficient message push and session management. This precise terminal identification mechanism helps improve user experience, enhance group interactivity and cohesion, and also helps maintain group security and privacy.
在步骤820中,如果确定第一对象的终端的终端标识与一个候选终端标识一致,则确定目标群组包括第一对象的终端。In step 820, if the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object is determined to be consistent with a candidate terminal identifier, then the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object.
在该实施例具体实现时,首先,将各个候选终端的候选终端标识与第一对象的终端的终端标识进行比较。接着,如果存在一个候选终端标识与第一对象的终端的终端标识一致,表明第一对象的终端是目标群组的群成员中的一个,确定目标群组包括第一对象的终端。如果不存在候选终端标识与第一对象的终端的终端标识一致,表明第一对象的终端不是目标群组的群成员,确定目标群组不包括第一对象的终端。In this specific implementation, firstly, the candidate terminal identifiers of each candidate terminal are compared with the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object. Next, if a candidate terminal identifier matches the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object, it indicates that the terminal of the first object is a member of the target group, and the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object. If no candidate terminal identifier matches the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object, it indicates that the terminal of the first object is not a member of the target group, and the target group is determined to exclude the terminal of the first object.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,确定一个用户(第一对象)是否属于某个目标群组的过程如下:应用程序会获取目标群组中所有群成员的候选终端标识。这些标识是唯一的,用于识别每个群成员的终端设备。然后,应用程序会将这些候选终端标识与第一对象的终端标识进行逐一比较。比较的过程是通过算法实现的,通常是将两个标识字符串进行精确匹配。如果在比较过程中发现有一个候选终端标识与第一对象的终端标识完全相同,那么应用程序就可以确定第一对象的终端是目标群组的群成员之一。确定过程是基于终端标识的唯一性和准确性。终端标识通常是由应用程序生成的,确保每个终端设备都有一个唯一的标识符。因此,通过比较终端标识,可以准确地判断一个用户是否属于某个群组。如果在比较过程中没有找到与第一对象的终端标识相同的候选终端标识,那么应用程序就会确定第一对象的终端不是目标群组的群成员。这意味着该用户无法查看或参与该群组的会话,从而保护了群组的隐私和安全性。通常在用户尝试访问群组会话页面时触发。这确保了只有合法的群组成员才能访问群组内容,同时为用户提供了一个安全和私密的交流环境。In some embodiments, the process of determining whether a user (first object) belongs to a target group in an application is as follows: The application obtains candidate terminal identifiers for all group members in the target group. These identifiers are unique and used to identify the terminal device of each group member. The application then compares these candidate terminal identifiers one by one with the terminal identifier of the first object. The comparison process is implemented by an algorithm, typically performing an exact match between the two identifier strings. If a candidate terminal identifier is found to be exactly the same as the terminal identifier of the first object during the comparison, the application can determine that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group. The determination process is based on the uniqueness and accuracy of the terminal identifiers. Terminal identifiers are typically generated by the application to ensure that each terminal device has a unique identifier. Therefore, by comparing terminal identifiers, it is possible to accurately determine whether a user belongs to a group. If no candidate terminal identifier is found to be the same as the first object's terminal identifier during the comparison, the application determines that the first object's terminal is not a member of the target group. This means that the user cannot view or participate in the group's sessions, thus protecting the privacy and security of the group. This is typically triggered when a user attempts to access the group session page. This ensures that only legitimate group members can access group content, while providing users with a safe and private communication environment.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“科技爱好者”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了链接标记“加入科技爱好者群组”。管理员希望用户在点击这个链接标记后,如果他们已经是群组的成员,能够直接查看群组的会话页面。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记“加入科技爱好者群组”的群组名称。用户A对科技很感兴趣,决定点击这个链接标记。响应于用户的点击操作,应用程序向服务器发送了一个触发事件。服务器首先检测到这个触发事件,然后根据触发事件,在经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与用户A的终端信息进行比较。假设用户A已经是“科技爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会确认这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,会直接显示“科技爱好者”群组的会话页面。用户A可以在会话页面中查看其他群成员的会话记录,并与其他群成员进行实时交流。另一方面,如果用户B点击了同一个链接标记,但用户B不是“科技爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会检测到这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,可能会显示一个提示信息,告知用户B无法查看该群组的会话页面,或者提供一个加入群组的选项,让用户B可以申请加入。确保了只有群组的成员才能查看和参与群组的会话,保护了群组的隐私和安全性。同时,也为用户提供了一个方便快捷的方式,让他们能够迅速加入或查看自己感兴趣的群组。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Tech Enthusiasts". The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group" to this entry link. The administrator wants users who click this link to directly view the group's conversation page if they are already members of the group. When the first object (user A) visits the application's homepage, they see the group name with the "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group" link. User A is interested in technology and decides to click the link. In response to the user's click, the application sends a trigger event to the server. The server first detects this trigger event and, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with user A's terminal information. Assuming user A is already a member of the "Tech Enthusiasts" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. Upon receiving the notification, the application will directly display the "Tech Enthusiasts" group's conversation page. User A can view the conversation records of other group members on the conversation page and communicate with other group members in real time. On the other hand, if user B clicks the same link, but user B is not a member of the "Tech Enthusiasts" group, the server will detect this and notify the application. Upon receiving the notification, the application may display a message informing user B that they cannot view the group's conversation page, or provide an option to join the group. This ensures that only group members can view and participate in group conversations, protecting the group's privacy and security. Simultaneously, it provides users with a convenient and quick way to join or view groups of interest.
该实施例的好处是,采用了终端标识比较的方式来判断第一对象的终端是否是目标群组的群成员,对比简单,较为准确、快捷地确定目标群组中是否包括第一对象的终端。The advantage of this embodiment is that it uses a terminal identifier comparison method to determine whether the terminal of the first object is a member of the target group. The comparison is simple and can determine whether the target group includes the terminal of the first object in a relatively accurate and quick manner.
由于在应用程序中往往会存在着交互误触发的情况,例如,对象在应用程序的界面上并不想触发某个流程或者打开某个页面,但是由于不小心触碰到相应的控件而导致流程被触发或者页面被打开,这一情况会影响信息显示的准确性。基于此,本申请提供了一种在显示会话页面前设置确认环节的方案,能有效地避免页面被误触发而显示出,进而提高信息显示的准确性。Because accidental triggering of interactions often occurs in applications—for example, an object may not intend to trigger a certain process or open a certain page on the application's interface, but accidentally touching the corresponding control can cause the process to be triggered or the page to be opened—this situation can affect the accuracy of information display. Therefore, this application provides a solution that sets a confirmation step before displaying the session page, which can effectively prevent the page from being accidentally triggered and thus improve the accuracy of information display.
请参照图9,在一些实施例中,步骤330具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤910-920:Referring to Figure 9, in some embodiments, step 330 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 910-920:
步骤910、响应于目标对象对链接标记的触发,显示询问消息;Step 910: In response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, display an inquiry message;
步骤920、响应于对询问消息的肯定应答,显示目标群组的会话页面。Step 920: In response to an affirmative answer to the query message, display the session page for the target group.
下面对步骤910-920进行详细描述。Steps 910-920 are described in detail below.
在步骤910中,响应于目标对象对链接标记的触发,显示询问消息。In step 910, in response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, an inquiry message is displayed.
询问消息用于询问第一对象的终端是否显示目标群组的会话页面。The query message is used to ask the terminal of the first object whether to display the session page of the target group.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第一对象的终端通过目标对象对链接标记进行触发时,服务器在检测到这一触发事件,并经过比较确定目标群组包括第一对象的终端时,在应用程序上以一个弹窗形式向第一对象的终端显示询问消息,以利用询问消息来让第一对象的终端对是否访问目标群组的会话页面进行再次确认。In a specific implementation of this embodiment, when the terminal of the first object triggers the link mark through the target object, the server detects this triggering event and determines through comparison that the target group includes the terminal of the first object. Then, the server displays a pop-up window on the application to the terminal of the first object to ask for a query message, so as to ask the terminal of the first object to reconfirm whether to access the session page of the target group.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当目标对象(通常是群组管理员或其他群组成员)对链接标记进行触发时,应用程序会执行以下步骤来显示询问消息:当目标对象点击或触碰链接标记时,应用程序会检测到这一触发事件。这个事件可能是一个点击、触碰或其他形式的交互。在检测到触发事件后,应用程序会与服务器通信,请求验证第一对象的终端是否是目标群组的成员。服务器会根据存储的群组成员信息进行验证。如果服务器确认第一对象的终端是目标群组的成员,应用程序会在第一对象的终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息。这条消息可能会说:“您是否要查看‘目标群组’的会话页面?”第一对象的终端用户会看到这个询问消息,并可以选择“是”或“否”。这个步骤允许用户在访问群组会话页面之前进行最后一次确认,增加了用户的控制权和隐私保护。如果用户选择“是”,应用程序会显示目标群组的会话页面。如果用户选择“否”,应用程序会取消操作,用户不会被引导到群组会话页面。增加了用户的参与感和控制权,确保用户在访问群组会话页面之前有充分的选择权。它也提高了应用程序的用户体验,让用户感到更加安全和放心。同时,它展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对用户隐私的尊重。In some embodiments, when a target object (typically a group administrator or other group member) triggers a link marker in the application, the application performs the following steps to display a prompt message: The application detects this trigger event when the target object clicks or touches the link marker. This event may be a click, touch, or other form of interaction. After detecting the trigger event, the application communicates with the server to request verification that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group. The server performs the verification based on stored group member information. If the server confirms that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group, the application displays a prompt message as a pop-up on the first object's terminal. This message may say: "Do you want to view the 'Target Group' session page?" The first object's terminal user will see this prompt message and can choose "Yes" or "No". This step allows the user to make a final confirmation before accessing the group session page, increasing user control and privacy protection. If the user selects "Yes", the application displays the target group's session page. If the user selects "No", the application cancels the operation, and the user is not directed to the group session page. This increases user engagement and control, ensuring that the user has sufficient choice before accessing the group session page. It also enhances the user experience of the application, making users feel safer and more secure. At the same time, it demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“电影爱好者”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了链接标记“加入电影爱好者群组”。管理员希望用户在点击这个链接标记后,如果他们已经是群组的成员,能够直接查看群组的会话页面。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记“加入电影爱好者群组”的群组名称。用户A对电影很感兴趣,决定点击这个链接标记。响应于用户的点击操作,应用程序向服务器发送了一个触发事件。服务器首先检测到这个触发事件,然后根据触发事件,在经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与用户A的终端信息进行比较。假设用户A已经是“电影爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会确认这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,会在用户A的终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息:“您是否要查看‘电影爱好者’群组的会话页面?”用户A看到询问消息后,可以选择“是”或“否”。如果用户A选择“是”,应用程序会直接显示“电影爱好者”群组的会话页面。用户A可以在会话页面中查看其他群成员的会话记录,并与其他群成员进行实时交流。如果用户A选择“否”,应用程序会取消操作,用户A不会被引导到群组会话页面。确保了用户在访问群组会话页面之前有充分的选择权,增加了用户的参与感和控制权。同时,它也提高了应用程序的用户体验,让用户感到更加安全和放心。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Movie Lovers". The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Movie Lovers Group" for this entry link. The administrator wants users who are already members of the group to be able to directly view the group's session page after clicking this link. When the first object (user A) visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join Movie Lovers Group" link. User A is interested in movies and decides to click the link. In response to the user's click, the application sends a trigger event to the server. The server first detects this trigger event, and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's terminal. Assuming user A is already a member of the "Movie Lovers" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. After receiving the notification, the application will display a pop-up message on user A's terminal asking: "Do you want to view the 'Movie Lovers' group's session page?" After seeing the question message, user A can choose "Yes" or "No". If user A chooses "Yes", the application will directly display the "Movie Lovers" group's session page. User A can view other group members' conversation history on the conversation page and communicate with them in real time. If User A selects "No," the application will cancel the operation, and User A will not be redirected to the group conversation page. This ensures that users have full choice before accessing the group conversation page, increasing user engagement and control. At the same time, it also improves the application's user experience, making users feel safer and more secure.
如此,通过在应用程序中实现响应于目标对象对链接标记的触发,显示询问消息的功能,可以提升用户体验和数据安全性。该功能基于服务器对群组成员资格的验证,确保只有合法的群组成员才能收到询问消息。通过在用户终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息,应用程序提供了用户在访问群组会话页面前的最后一次确认机会,增强了用户的参与感和控制权,同时促进了群组成员之间的有效沟通和互动,为应用程序提供了更加安全、私密和高效的群组管理机制。Thus, by implementing a feature in the application that displays a prompt message in response to a target object's link tag, both user experience and data security can be improved. This feature relies on server-side verification of group member eligibility, ensuring that only legitimate group members receive the prompt message. By displaying the prompt message as a pop-up on the user's terminal, the application provides the user with a final confirmation opportunity before accessing the group session page, enhancing user engagement and control, while simultaneously promoting effective communication and interaction among group members. This provides the application with a more secure, private, and efficient group management mechanism.
在步骤920中,响应于对询问消息的肯定应答,显示目标群组的会话页面。In step 920, in response to an affirmative answer to the query message, the session page for the target group is displayed.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第一对象的终端对询问消息作出肯定应答,表明目标对象对链接标记的触发不是误触发,向第一对象的终端显示目标群组的会话页面。当第一对象的终端对询问消息作出否定应答,表明目标对象对链接标记的触发可能是误触发,第一对象的终端并不想访问目标群组的会话页面,基于此,关闭询问消息,不显示目标群组的会话页面,并保持应用程序平台当前显示的页面不变。In this specific implementation, when the terminal of the first object responds positively to the query message, indicating that the triggering of the link tag by the target object is not a mistake, the session page of the target group is displayed to the terminal of the first object. When the terminal of the first object responds negatively to the query message, indicating that the triggering of the link tag by the target object may be a mistake, and the terminal of the first object does not want to access the session page of the target group, the query message is closed, the session page of the target group is not displayed, and the page currently displayed on the application platform remains unchanged.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当第一对象的终端接收到询问消息后,用户可以选择是否确认访问目标群组的会话页面。如果第一对象的终端用户选择“是”或“确认”,应用程序会将这一应答发送回服务器。服务器接收到肯定应答后,会验证这一选择的有效性,并确认用户确实有权限访问目标群组的会话页面。验证通过后,应用程序会在第一对象的终端上显示目标群组的会话页面,用户可以开始查看和参与群组的讨论。如果第一对象的终端用户选择“否”或“取消”,应用程序会将这一应答发送回服务器。服务器接收到否定应答后,会记录这一选择,并确认用户不想访问目标群组的会话页面。基于这一选择,应用程序会关闭询问消息,并保持当前显示的页面不变,用户不会被引导到群组会话页面。确保了用户在访问群组会话页面前有充分的选择权,避免了误触发带来的不便。它提高了应用程序的用户体验,让用户感到更加安全和放心。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对用户隐私的尊重。In some embodiments, within the application, when the terminal of the first user receives a prompt message, the user can choose whether to confirm access to the target group's session page. If the terminal user of the first user selects "Yes" or "Confirm," the application sends this response back to the server. Upon receiving a positive response, the server verifies the validity of this selection and confirms that the user does indeed have permission to access the target group's session page. After successful verification, the application displays the target group's session page on the terminal of the first user, allowing the user to begin viewing and participating in group discussions. If the terminal user of the first user selects "No" or "Cancel," the application sends this response back to the server. Upon receiving a negative response, the server records this selection and confirms that the user does not wish to access the target group's session page. Based on this selection, the application closes the prompt message and maintains the currently displayed page, preventing the user from being redirected to the group session page. This ensures that users have sufficient choice before accessing the group session page, avoiding inconvenience caused by accidental triggering. It improves the user experience of the application, making users feel safer and more secure. Simultaneously, it demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“旅行摄影”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了链接标记“加入旅行摄影群组”。管理员希望用户在点击这个链接标记后,如果他们已经是群组的成员,能够直接查看群组的会话页面。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记“加入旅行摄影群组”的群组名称。用户A对旅行摄影很感兴趣,决定点击这个链接标记。响应于用户的点击操作,应用程序向服务器发送了一个触发事件。服务器首先检测到这个触发事件,然后根据触发事件,在经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与用户A的终端信息进行比较。假设用户A已经是“旅行摄影”群组的成员,服务器会确认这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,会在用户A的终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息:“您是否要查看‘旅行摄影’群组的会话页面?”用户A看到询问消息后,可以选择“是”或“否”。如果用户A选择“是”,应用程序会直接显示“旅行摄影”群组的会话页面。用户A可以在会话页面中查看其他群成员的会话记录,并与其他群成员进行实时交流。如果用户A选择“否”,应用程序会关闭询问消息,并保持当前显示的页面不变。用户A不会被引导到群组会话页面,可以继续浏览应用程序的其他内容。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Travel Photography". The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Travel Photography Group" for this entry link. The administrator wants users who are already members of the group to be able to directly view the group's session page after clicking this link. When the first object (user A) visits the application's first page, they see the group name with the "Join Travel Photography Group" link. User A is interested in travel photography and decides to click the link. In response to the user's click, the application sends a trigger event to the server. The server first detects this trigger event, and then, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's terminal. Assuming user A is already a member of the "Travel Photography" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. After receiving the notification, the application will display a pop-up message on user A's terminal asking: "Do you want to view the 'Travel Photography' group's session page?" After seeing the question message, user A can choose "Yes" or "No". If user A chooses "Yes", the application will directly display the "Travel Photography" group's session page. User A can view other group members' conversation history on the conversation page and communicate with them in real time. If User A selects "No," the application will close the prompt message and keep the currently displayed page unchanged. User A will not be redirected to the group conversation page and can continue browsing other content in the application.
如图10A所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,当对象3在篮球兴趣小组的会话页面中对对象1发送的网球兴趣小组的链接标记进行双击操作时,应用程序平台会显示一个询问消息窗口,其中,询问消息窗口中的询问消息为“请问是否打开群组’网球兴趣小组’”,询问消息窗口还包括可交互的“确认”控件、和“取消”控件。As shown in Figure 10A, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. When Object 3 double-clicks the link to the Tennis Interest Group sent by Object 1 in the basketball interest group's session page, the application platform will display a prompt message window. The prompt message in the prompt message window is "Do you want to open the group 'Tennis Interest Group'?" The prompt message window also includes interactive "Confirm" and "Cancel" controls.
如图10B所示,群成员包括对象3、对象5和对象9,当对象3在询问消息窗口中点击“确认”控件,则认为对象3作出了肯定应答,在应用程序平台中显示网球兴趣小组的会话页面。当对象3在询问消息窗口中点击“取消”控件,则认为对象3作出了否定应答,直接关闭询问消息窗口。As shown in Figure 10B, the group members include object 3, object 5, and object 9. When object 3 clicks the "Confirm" control in the query message window, it is considered that object 3 has given a positive response, and the tennis interest group's conversation page is displayed in the application platform. When object 3 clicks the "Cancel" control in the query message window, it is considered that object 3 has given a negative response, and the query message window is closed directly.
该实施例的好处是,当检测到第一对象的终端通过目标对象对链接标记触发,在确定目标群组包括第一对象的终端时,设置询问消息窗口,在经过第一对象的终端的再次确认的情况下根据触发操作显示目标群组的会话页面,能减小由于误触发而显示会话页面的可能性,提高了信息传递效率和信息传递准确性。The advantage of this embodiment is that when the terminal of the first object is detected to have triggered the link mark through the target object, and the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object, an inquiry message window is set. After the terminal of the first object confirms again, the session page of the target group is displayed according to the triggering operation. This can reduce the possibility of displaying the session page due to accidental triggering and improve the efficiency and accuracy of information transmission.
为了提高群组访问安全性,如果当第一对象的终端并非是目标群组的群成员时,即便是触发了目标群组名称的链接标记也不会直接访问到目标群组的群组页面。此时,若直接阻止第一对象的终端进入目标群组,会影响第一对象的终端的正常会话交流,也会导致应用程序中的信息传递效率下降。基于此,本申请实施例提供了一种在显示会话页面时设置授权访问环节的方案,能在经过授权访问的情况下为第一对象的终端显示会话页面。To improve group access security, if the first user's terminal is not a member of the target group, even if the link marker for the target group name is triggered, it will not directly access the target group's group page. In this case, directly blocking the first user's terminal from entering the target group would affect normal conversational communication and reduce the efficiency of information transmission within the application. Therefore, this application provides a scheme for setting an authorization access step when displaying the session page, enabling the session page to be displayed to the first user's terminal only after authorized access.
请参照图11,在一些实施例中,步骤330具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤1110-1120:Please refer to Figure 11. In some embodiments, step 330 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 1110-1120:
步骤1110、响应于目标对象对链接标记的触发,向第二对象发送授权请求;Step 1110: In response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, send an authorization request to the second object;
步骤1120、响应于接收到第二对象的授权应答,显示目标群组的会话页面。Step 1120: In response to receiving the authorization response from the second object, display the session page of the target group.
下面对步骤1110-1120进行详细描述。Steps 1110-1120 are described in detail below.
在步骤1110中,响应于目标对象对链接标记的触发,向第二对象发送授权请求。In step 1110, in response to the target object's triggering of the link tag, an authorization request is sent to the second object.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第一对象的终端通过目标对象对链接标记进行触发时,服务器在检测到这一触发事件,并经过比较确定目标群组不包括第一对象的终端时,服务器首先会以弹窗形式询问第一对象的终端是否申请加入目标群组的授权许可。接着,当第一对象的终端要加入目标群组时,选择申请授权许可。基于此,服务器会替第一对象的终端向第二对象进行授权请求,申请加入目标群组。当第二对象接收到授权请求时,会对第一对象的终端进行终端身份验证,当确定第一对象的终端的身份验证通过,则会做出授权应答,许可第一对象的终端加入目标群组。而当确定第一对象的终端的身份验证不通过,则会做出拒绝授权应答,不允许第一对象的终端加入目标群组。In this specific implementation, when the terminal of the first object triggers the link tag through the target object, the server, upon detecting this triggering event and determining through comparison that the target group does not include the terminal of the first object, firstly prompts the terminal of the first object in a pop-up window whether it requests authorization to join the target group. Then, when the terminal of the first object wishes to join the target group, it selects to request authorization. Based on this, the server will send an authorization request to the second object on behalf of the terminal of the first object, requesting to join the target group. When the second object receives the authorization request, it will perform terminal authentication on the terminal of the first object. If the authentication of the terminal of the first object is successful, it will issue an authorization response, allowing the terminal of the first object to join the target group. If the authentication of the terminal of the first object fails, it will issue a denial of authorization response, disallowing the terminal of the first object from joining the target group.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当目标对象对链接标记进行触发时,如果服务器检测到第一对象的终端不是目标群组的成员,当目标对象点击或触碰链接标记时,应用程序会检测到这一触发事件。这个事件可能是一个点击、触碰或其他形式的交互。在检测到触发事件后,应用程序会与服务器通信,请求验证第一对象的终端是否是目标群组的成员。服务器会根据存储的群组成员信息进行验证。如果服务器确认第一对象的终端不是目标群组的成员,应用程序会在第一对象的终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息:“您是否要申请加入‘目标群组’?”如果第一对象的终端用户选择“是”或“申请”,应用程序会将这一选择发送回服务器。服务器接收到申请后,会替第一对象的终端向第二对象(群组管理员或其他授权对象)发送授权请求。第二对象接收到授权请求后,会对第一对象的终端进行身份验证。这可能包括检查用户的注册信息、验证用户的身份凭证等。如果第二对象确定第一对象的终端的身份验证通过,他们会做出授权应答,许可第一对象的终端加入目标群组。应用程序会收到授权应答,并将第一对象的终端添加到目标群组中。如果第二对象确定第一对象的终端的身份验证不通过,他们会做出拒绝授权应答,不允许第一对象的终端加入目标群组。应用程序会收到拒绝应答,并通知第一对象的终端用户申请未通过。In some embodiments, within the application, when a target object triggers a link marker, if the server detects that the first object's terminal is not a member of the target group, the application will detect this triggering event when the target object clicks or touches the link marker. This event may be a click, touch, or other form of interaction. After detecting the triggering event, the application communicates with the server to request verification that the first object's terminal is a member of the target group. The server performs verification based on stored group member information. If the server confirms that the first object's terminal is not a member of the target group, the application displays a pop-up message on the first object's terminal asking: "Do you want to apply to join the 'target group'?" If the first object's terminal user selects "Yes" or "Apply," the application sends this selection back to the server. Upon receiving the application, the server sends an authorization request on behalf of the first object's terminal to a second object (group administrator or other authorized object). Upon receiving the authorization request, the second object authenticates the first object's terminal. This may include checking the user's registration information, verifying the user's identity credentials, etc. If the second object determines that the first object's terminal is successfully authenticated, they will issue an authorization response, allowing the first object's terminal to join the target group. The application receives the authorization response and adds the first object's terminal to the target group. If the second entity determines that the authentication of the first entity's terminal fails, they will issue a denial response, disallowing the first entity's terminal from joining the target group. The application will receive the denial response and notify the first entity's terminal user that the application was rejected.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“健康生活”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了链接标记“加入健康生活群组”。管理员希望用户在点击这个链接标记后,如果他们不是群组的成员,能够申请加入群组。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记“加入健康生活群组”的群组名称。用户A对健康生活很感兴趣,决定点击这个链接标记。响应于用户的点击操作,应用程序向服务器发送了一个触发事件。服务器首先检测到这个触发事件,然后根据触发事件,经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与用户A的终端信息进行比较。假设用户A不是“健康生活”群组的成员,服务器会确认这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,会在用户A的终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息:“您是否要申请加入‘健康生活’群组?”用户A看到询问消息后,可以选择“是”或“申请”。如果用户A选择“是”,应用程序会将这一选择发送回服务器。服务器接收到申请后,会替用户A的终端向第二对象发送授权请求,申请加入“健康生活”群组。第二对象(群组管理员)接收到授权请求后,会对用户A的终端进行身份验证。这可能包括检查用户的注册信息、验证用户的身份凭证等。如果第二对象确定用户A的终端的身份验证通过,他们会做出授权应答,许可用户A的终端加入“健康生活”群组。应用程序会收到授权应答,并将用户A的终端添加到群组中。用户A可以在群组中查看其他成员的讨论,并参与健康生活的交流。如果第二对象确定用户A的终端的身份验证不通过,他们会做出拒绝授权应答,不允许用户A的终端加入“健康生活”群组。应用程序会收到拒绝应答,并通知用户A的终端用户申请未通过。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Healthy Living". The group administrator (the second object) creates an entry link and sets the link tag "Join Healthy Living Group" to this entry link. The administrator wants users who click this link tag to apply to join the group if they are not already members. When the first object (user A) visits the application's homepage, they see the group name with the "Join Healthy Living Group" link tag. User A is interested in healthy living and decides to click the link tag. In response to the user's click, the application sends a trigger event to the server. The server first detects this trigger event and, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's device. Assuming user A is not a member of the "Healthy Living" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. After receiving the notification, the application will display a pop-up message on user A's device asking: "Do you want to apply to join the 'Healthy Living' group?" After seeing the message, user A can choose "Yes" or "Apply". If user A chooses "Yes", the application will send this selection back to the server. After receiving the application, the server will send an authorization request to a second entity on behalf of User A's terminal, requesting to join the "Healthy Living" group. Upon receiving the authorization request, the second entity (the group administrator) will authenticate User A's terminal. This may include checking the user's registration information and verifying the user's identity credentials. If the second entity determines that User A's terminal is successfully authenticated, they will issue an authorization response, allowing User A's terminal to join the "Healthy Living" group. The application will receive the authorization response and add User A's terminal to the group. User A can then view other members' discussions and participate in healthy living exchanges within the group. If the second entity determines that User A's terminal is unauthenticated, they will issue a denial response, preventing User A's terminal from joining the "Healthy Living" group. The application will receive the denial response and notify User A's terminal that the user application was rejected.
如此,通过在应用程序中实现响应于目标对象对链接标记的触发,向第二对象发送授权请求的功能,可以提升群组的安全性和用户体验。该功能基于服务器对群组成员资格的验证,确保只有合法的用户才能收到授权请求。通过在用户终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息,应用程序提供了用户在申请加入群组前的最后一次确认机会,增强了用户的参与感和控制权。当用户选择申请加入群组时,服务器会替用户向第二对象发送授权请求,第二对象会对用户进行身份验证。如果验证通过,第二对象会做出授权应答,许可用户加入群组;如果验证不通过,第二对象会做出拒绝授权应答,不允许用户加入群组。这种设计不仅提高了群组的安全性,还增强了用户体验,让用户感到更加安全和放心。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对用户隐私的尊重。Thus, by implementing a feature in the application that sends an authorization request to a second object in response to a target object's link tag, group security and user experience can be improved. This feature is based on server-side verification of group membership, ensuring that only legitimate users receive authorization requests. By displaying a prompt message on the user's terminal as a pop-up, the application provides the user with a final confirmation opportunity before requesting to join the group, enhancing the user's sense of participation and control. When a user chooses to join the group, the server sends an authorization request to the second object on behalf of the user, and the second object verifies the user's identity. If the verification is successful, the second object will grant authorization, allowing the user to join the group; if the verification fails, the second object will deny authorization, preventing the user from joining the group. This design not only improves group security but also enhances the user experience, making users feel safer and more secure. At the same time, it also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
在步骤1120中,响应于接收到第二对象的授权应答,显示目标群组的会话页面。In step 1120, in response to receiving the authorization response from the second object, the session page of the target group is displayed.
授权应答指的是第二对象针对第一对象的终端的授权请求作出的授权许可加入目标群组的回应。An authorization response refers to the second object's response to the authorization request from the first object's terminal, granting permission to join the target group.
在该实施例具体实现时,当接收到第二对象的授权应答,表明第一对象的终端被允许加入到目标群组。基于此,服务器会响应于接收到第二对象的授权应答,先将第一对象的终端添加为目标群组的群成员,并向第一对象的终端显示目标群组的会话页面。In this specific implementation, when an authorization response from the second object is received, it indicates that the first object's terminal is allowed to join the target group. Based on this, the server, in response to receiving the authorization response from the second object, first adds the first object's terminal as a group member of the target group and displays the target group's session page on the first object's terminal.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,当第二对象(如群组管理员)针对第一对象的终端的授权请求作出授权应答时,服务器接收到第二对象的授权应答,该应答表示第一对象的终端被允许加入目标群组。基于授权应答,服务器会将第一对象的终端添加为目标群组的群成员,涉及更新服务器上的群组成员数据库,记录第一对象的终端信息。一旦第一对象的终端被添加为目标群组的群成员,服务器会向第一对象的终端发送指令,要求显示目标群组的会话页面。这个页面可能包含群组的历史记录、当前在线成员列表以及一个输入框,用于发送新的消息。第一对象的终端接收到服务器的指令后,会更新应用程序的界面,显示目标群组的会话页面。用户现在可以查看群组的讨论内容,并参与实时交流。确保了只有经过授权的用户才能加入群组并查看群组的会话页面,维护了群组的安全性和隐私性。同时,它也提高了用户体验,让用户能够快速、方便地加入感兴趣的群组并参与讨论。In some embodiments, within an application, when a second object (such as a group administrator) responds to an authorization request from a first object's terminal, the server receives the second object's authorization response, indicating that the first object's terminal is permitted to join the target group. Based on the authorization response, the server adds the first object's terminal as a member of the target group, involving updating the group member database on the server to record the first object's terminal information. Once the first object's terminal is added as a member of the target group, the server sends an instruction to the first object's terminal to display the target group's session page. This page may contain the group's history, a list of currently online members, and an input box for sending new messages. Upon receiving the server's instruction, the first object's terminal updates the application's interface to display the target group's session page. Users can now view the group's discussions and participate in real-time communication. This ensures that only authorized users can join the group and view the group's session page, maintaining the group's security and privacy. Simultaneously, it improves the user experience, allowing users to quickly and easily join groups of interest and participate in discussions.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“科技爱好者”的群组,群组管理员(第二对象)创建了一个入口链接,并为这个入口链接设置了链接标记“加入科技爱好者群组”。管理员希望用户在点击这个链接标记后,如果他们不是群组的成员,能够申请加入群组。当第一对象(用户A)访问应用程序的第一页面时,他们看到了带有链接标记“加入科技爱好者群组”的群组名称。用户A对科技很感兴趣,决定点击这个链接标记。响应于用户的点击操作,应用程序向服务器发送了一个触发事件。服务器首先检测到这个触发事件,然后根据触发事件,经过授权许可的情况下,将目标群组的各个群成员的信息与用户A的终端信息进行比较。假设用户A不是“科技爱好者”群组的成员,服务器会确认这一点,并通知应用程序。应用程序收到通知后,会在用户A的终端上以弹窗形式显示询问消息:“您是否要申请加入‘科技爱好者’群组?”用户A看到询问消息后,可以选择“是”或“申请”。如果用户A选择“是”,应用程序会将这一选择发送回服务器。服务器接收到申请后,会替用户A的终端向第二对象发送授权请求,申请加入“科技爱好者”群组。第二对象(群组管理员)接收到授权请求后,会对用户A的终端进行身份验证。这可能包括检查用户的注册信息、验证用户的身份凭证等。如果第二对象确定用户A的终端的身份验证通过,他们会做出授权应答,许可用户A的终端加入“科技爱好者”群组。应用程序会收到授权应答,并将用户A的终端添加到群组中。一旦用户A的终端被添加到群组中,会向用户A的终端发送指令,要求显示“科技爱好者”群组的会话页面。用户A的终端接收到指令后,会更新应用程序的界面,显示群组的会话页面。用户A现在可以查看群组的历史记录、当前在线成员列表,并参与实时讨论。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Tech Enthusiasts". The group administrator (the second object) created an entry link and set the link tag "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group". The administrator wants users who click this link to apply to join the group if they are not already members. When the first object (user A) visits the application's homepage, they see the group name with the "Join the Tech Enthusiasts Group" link. User A is interested in technology and decides to click the link. In response to the user's click, the application sends a trigger event to the server. The server first detects this trigger event and, based on the trigger event and with authorization, compares the information of each member of the target group with the information on user A's device. Assuming user A is not a member of the "Tech Enthusiasts" group, the server will confirm this and notify the application. After receiving the notification, the application will display a pop-up message on user A's device asking: "Do you want to apply to join the 'Tech Enthusiasts' group?" After seeing the message, user A can choose "Yes" or "Apply". If user A chooses "Yes", the application will send this selection back to the server. After receiving the request, the server sends an authorization request to a second entity on behalf of User A's device, requesting to join the "Tech Enthusiasts" group. Upon receiving the authorization request, the second entity (the group administrator) authenticates User A's device. This may include checking the user's registration information and verifying the user's credentials. If the second entity determines that User A's device is successfully authenticated, they will issue an authorization response, allowing User A's device to join the "Tech Enthusiasts" group. The application receives the authorization response and adds User A's device to the group. Once User A's device is added to the group, an instruction is sent to User A's device requesting the display of the "Tech Enthusiasts" group's conversation page. Upon receiving the instruction, User A's device updates the application's interface, displaying the group's conversation page. User A can now view the group's history, the list of currently online members, and participate in real-time discussions.
该实施例的好处是,在显示会话页面时设置授权访问环节,当目标群组不包括第一对象的终端时,根据目标对象对链接标记的触发,为第一对象的终端申请针对目标群组的会话页面的授权访问。在经过授权访问的情况下,将第一对象的终端纳入目标群组的群成员范畴,并为第一对象的终端显示目标群组的会话页面,能使第一对象的终端在经过授权后快速地加入到目标群组,满足第一对象的终端的正常会话交流需求,提高应用程序中的信息传递效率。The advantage of this embodiment is that by setting up an authorization access step when displaying the session page, if the target group does not include the first object's terminal, authorization access to the session page for the target group is requested for the first object's terminal based on the triggering of the link tag by the target object. After authorization, the first object's terminal is included in the target group's membership scope, and the target group's session page is displayed for the first object's terminal. This allows the first object's terminal to quickly join the target group after authorization, meeting the normal session communication needs of the first object's terminal and improving the information transmission efficiency of the application.
请参照图12,在一些实施例中,授权应答通过以下方式生成:Referring to Figure 12, in some embodiments, the authorization response is generated in the following manner:
步骤1210、获取第一对象的终端的终端信誉度、和创建时间戳;Step 1210: Obtain the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the terminal of the first object;
步骤1220、基于终端信誉度和创建时间戳确定第一对象的终端的终端分数;Step 1220: Determine the terminal score of the first object's terminal based on terminal reputation and creation timestamp;
步骤1230、如果终端分数大于预定分数,则生成授权应答。Step 1230: If the terminal score is greater than the predetermined score, generate an authorization response.
下面对步骤1210-1230进行详细描述。Steps 1210-1230 are described in detail below.
在步骤1210中,获取第一对象的终端的终端信誉度、和创建时间戳。In step 1210, the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the terminal of the first object are obtained.
终端信誉度用于指示第一对象的终端的信用情况。Terminal credit rating is used to indicate the creditworthiness of the terminal of the first object.
创建时间戳用于指示第一对象的终端在应用程序的注册时间点。A timestamp is created to indicate the point in time when the first object's terminal was registered with the application.
在该实施例具体实现时,由于各个对象终端的信誉度和创建时间戳都会被记录在应用程序服务器的后台日志里,基于此,在经过授权许可的情况下,可以直接从后台日志中获取第一对象的终端的终端信誉度、和创建时间戳。In the specific implementation of this embodiment, since the reputation and creation timestamp of each object terminal are recorded in the background log of the application server, the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the first object terminal can be directly obtained from the background log with authorization.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,获取第一对象的终端的终端信誉度和创建时间戳是一个重要的过程,它有助于评估终端的信用情况以及确定其在应用程序中的注册时间点。终端信誉度是一个指标,用于衡量第一对象的终端在应用程序中的信用情况。它可能基于多种因素,如终端的历史行为、遵守应用程序规则的情况、参与度等。应用程序服务器会记录每个终端的信誉度信息。这些信息可能包括终端的历史活动记录、违规行为记录、用户反馈等。在经过授权许可的情况下,服务器可以访问这些记录,直接从后台日志中获取第一对象的终端信誉度。创建时间戳是一个时间标记,用于指示第一对象的终端在应用程序中的注册时间点。它记录了终端首次注册或加入应用程序的确切时间。应用程序服务器也会记录每个终端的注册时间。这些时间戳信息通常存储在后台日志中。在经过授权许可的情况下,服务器可以直接从这些日志中获取第一对象的终端的创建时间戳。在获取这些敏感信息之前,应用程序必须确保已经获得了必要的授权许可。这可能包括用户的同意、符合数据保护法规的要求等。授权许可的目的是保护用户隐私,确保只有在合法和正当的情况下,才能访问和使用这些信息。获取和处理这些信息时,应用程序必须采取适当的安全措施,确保数据的安全性和完整性。这可能包括数据加密、访问控制、定期审计等。In some embodiments, obtaining the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of a first object's terminal is a crucial process within the application. This process helps assess the terminal's creditworthiness and determine its registration time within the application. Terminal reputation is a metric used to measure the first object's terminal's creditworthiness within the application. It may be based on various factors, such as the terminal's historical behavior, compliance with application rules, and engagement. The application server records reputation information for each terminal. This information may include the terminal's historical activity records, violation records, user feedback, etc. With authorization, the server can access these records and directly obtain the first object's terminal reputation from the background logs. A creation timestamp is a timestamp indicating the first object's terminal's registration time within the application. It records the exact time the terminal first registered or joined the application. The application server also records the registration time for each terminal. This timestamp information is typically stored in background logs. With authorization, the server can directly obtain the first object's terminal's creation timestamp from these logs. Before obtaining this sensitive information, the application must ensure that it has obtained the necessary authorization. This may include user consent, compliance with data protection regulations, etc. The purpose of licensing is to protect user privacy and ensure that this information can only be accessed and used legally and legitimately. When acquiring and processing this information, applications must take appropriate security measures to ensure the security and integrity of the data. This may include data encryption, access control, and regular auditing.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“在线教育”的应用程序,该应用提供各种在线课程和学习资源。为了确保学习环境的安全和质量,应用程序会对用户终端的信誉度进行评估,并记录用户的注册时间。当第一对象(用户A)尝试访问一个受保护的高级课程时,应用程序需要评估用户A的终端信誉度和注册时间。用户A尝试访问高级课程时,应用程序会向服务器发送一个请求,请求评估用户A的终端信誉度。服务器会检查后台日志,查找用户A的终端信誉度记录。这些记录可能包括用户A的历史行为、参与度、遵守社区规则的情况等。基于这些信息,服务器会计算出用户A的终端信誉度得分。得分越高,表示用户A的终端信誉越好。服务器会检查用户A的终端的创建时间戳,以确定用户A的注册时间。创建时间戳记录了用户A首次注册应用程序的确切时间,这有助于评估用户A对应用程序的忠诚度和参与度。在获取这些信息之前,应用程序会确保已经获得了用户A的授权许可,例如通过用户协议或隐私政策。确保了应用程序在访问和使用用户数据时是合法和透明的。基用户A的终端信誉度和注册时间,应用程序会决定是否允许用户A访问高级课程。如果用户A的信誉度高且注册时间较长,应用程序可能会允许访问;如果信誉度低或注册时间较短,应用程序可能会限制访问或要求用户提供更多信息。As an example, suppose there is an application called "Online Education" that provides various online courses and learning resources. To ensure the security and quality of the learning environment, the application evaluates the credibility of user devices and records user registration times. When a first user (User A) attempts to access a protected advanced course, the application needs to evaluate User A's device credibility and registration time. When User A attempts to access the advanced course, the application sends a request to the server to evaluate User A's device credibility. The server checks the background logs for User A's device credibility records. These records may include User A's historical behavior, engagement, compliance with community rules, etc. Based on this information, the server calculates User A's device credibility score. The higher the score, the better User A's device credibility. The server checks the creation timestamp of User A's device to determine User A's registration time. The creation timestamp records the exact time User A first registered with the application, which helps assess User A's loyalty and engagement with the application. Before obtaining this information, the application ensures that it has obtained User A's authorization, such as through a user agreement or privacy policy. This ensures that the application's access to and use of user data is legal and transparent. Based on user A's terminal reputation and registration time, the application decides whether to allow user A to access advanced courses. If user A has a high reputation and a long registration time, the application may allow access; if the reputation is low or the registration time is short, the application may restrict access or require the user to provide more information.
如此,通过在应用程序中实现获取第一对象的终端信誉度和创建时间戳的功能,可以显著提升应用程序的安全性和用户体验。该功能基于服务器对终端信誉度和注册时间的记录,确保了数据的准确性和实时性。通过直接从后台日志中获取这些信息,应用程序能够快速、高效地评估终端的信用情况和注册时间,从而做出更明智的决策,如权限管理、风险控制等。不仅提高了应用程序的安全性,还增强了用户体验,让用户感到更加安全和放心。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对用户隐私的尊重。获取终端信誉度和创建时间戳的功能为应用程序提供了一个强大的工具,帮助其更好地管理用户终端,保护用户数据,提升整体服务质量。Thus, by implementing the functionality to obtain the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the first user object within the application, the application's security and user experience can be significantly improved. This functionality, based on server records of terminal reputation and registration time, ensures data accuracy and real-time performance. By directly retrieving this information from background logs, the application can quickly and efficiently assess the terminal's creditworthiness and registration time, enabling more informed decisions such as access control and risk management. This not only enhances application security but also improves the user experience, making users feel safer and more secure. Simultaneously, it demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy. The functionality to obtain terminal reputation and creation timestamps provides the application with a powerful tool to better manage user terminals, protect user data, and improve overall service quality.
在步骤1220中,基于终端信誉度和创建时间戳确定第一对象的终端的终端分数。In step 1220, the terminal score of the terminal of the first object is determined based on the terminal reputation and the creation timestamp.
终端分数用于指示对第一对象的终端加入目标群组的授权评分情况。The terminal score is used to indicate the authorization score for adding the terminal of the first object to the target group.
在该实施例具体实现时,首先,根据终端信誉度确定第一分数;接着,根据创建时间戳确定第二分数。最后,对第一分数和第二分数进行加权和运算,得到终端分数。In this specific implementation, firstly, a first score is determined based on the terminal's reputation; then, a second score is determined based on the creation timestamp. Finally, a weighted sum of the first and second scores is performed to obtain the terminal score.
具体地,在根据终端信誉度确定第一分数时,采用函数计算的方式,将终端信誉度作为自变量代入预设函数,将预设函数的输出作为第一分数,其中,预设函数是一个增函数,终端信誉度越大,则第一分数越大。Specifically, when determining the first score based on the terminal's reputation, a function calculation method is used. The terminal's reputation is substituted into a preset function as an independent variable, and the output of the preset function is used as the first score. The preset function is an increasing function; the higher the terminal's reputation, the higher the first score.
在根据创建时间戳确定第二分数时,首先,计算创建时间戳和当前时间之间的时间差。接着,采用查表法,调用时间差区间和候选分数的映射表,在映射表中确定时间差所在的时间差区间,将查找到的时间差区间所对应的候选分数作为第二分数。其中,时间差越大,第二分数越大。When determining the second score based on the creation timestamp, the time difference between the creation timestamp and the current time is first calculated. Then, a lookup table is used to retrieve the mapping table between time difference intervals and candidate scores. The time difference interval within this interval is determined, and the candidate score corresponding to that interval is used as the second score. A larger time difference results in a larger second score.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,基于终端信誉度和创建时间戳确定第一对象的终端的终端分数是一个关键的决策过程,它有助于评估终端加入目标群组的资格和授权评分情况。终端信誉度是一个衡量终端信用情况的指标,它反映了终端在应用程序中的行为历史、遵守规则的情况以及用户反馈等。为了将终端信誉度转化为一个可量化的分数,应用程序可以采用一个预设的增函数。这个函数将终端信誉度作为自变量,输出一个对应的第一分数。由于函数是增函数,因此终端信誉度越高,第一分数也越高。创建时间戳记录了终端在应用程序中的注册时间点,它可以帮助评估终端的活跃度和忠诚度。将创建时间戳转化为一个可量化的分数,应用程序首先需要计算当前时间与创建时间戳之间的时间差。应用程序可以使用查表法,参考一个预先定义的时间差区间和候选分数的映射表。这个表将时间差分为不同的区间,每个区间对应一个候选分数。时间差越大,对应的第二分数也越大。一旦得到了第一分数和第二分数,应用程序需要对这两个分数进行加权和运算,以得到最终的终端分数。加权和运算涉及为第一分数和第二分数分配不同的权重,这些权重反映了各自在终端分数中的重要性。例如,如果终端信誉度被认为比注册时间更重要,那么第一分数的权重可能会更高。最终的终端分数是第一分数和第二分数的加权和,它综合考虑了终端的信用情况和注册时间,为授权决策提供了全面的评分依据。In some embodiments, determining the terminal score of a terminal for a first target based on terminal reputation and creation timestamp is a crucial decision-making process within the application. This process helps assess the terminal's eligibility and authorization rating for joining a target group. Terminal reputation is a metric that measures a terminal's creditworthiness, reflecting its behavioral history within the application, rule compliance, and user feedback. To convert terminal reputation into a quantifiable score, the application can employ a pre-defined increasing function. This function takes terminal reputation as its independent variable and outputs a corresponding first score. Since the function is increasing, a higher terminal reputation results in a higher first score. The creation timestamp records the terminal's registration time within the application, helping to assess its activity and loyalty. To convert the creation timestamp into a quantifiable score, the application first needs to calculate the time difference between the current time and the creation timestamp. The application can use a lookup table, referencing a predefined mapping table of time difference intervals and candidate scores. This table divides the time difference into different intervals, each corresponding to a candidate score. A larger time difference results in a higher second score. Once the first and second scores are obtained, the application performs a weighted sum to arrive at the final terminal score. The weighted sum operation involves assigning different weights to the first and second scores, reflecting their respective importance in the final terminal score. For example, if terminal credibility is considered more important than registration time, the first score might have a higher weight. The final terminal score is a weighted sum of the first and second scores, comprehensively considering both the terminal's creditworthiness and registration time, providing a holistic basis for authorization decisions.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“专业摄影交流”的群组,该群组是一个高级摄影爱好者交流的平台。为了确保群组的质量和专业性,群组管理员希望对申请加入的用户终端进行评估,以确定其是否符合群组的要求。用户A申请加入“专业摄影交流”群组时,应用程序会首先评估用户A的终端信誉度。假设用户A的终端信誉度得分为80分(满分为100分),应用程序会将这个信誉度得分代入预设的增函数中,计算出第一分数。例如,增函数可能是f(x)=x,那么第一分数也为80分。应用程序会评估用户A的终端创建时间戳。假设用户A的终端注册时间是两年前,应用程序会计算当前时间与创建时间戳之间的时间差,得到两年。然后,应用程序会参考时间差区间和候选分数的映射表。例如,映射表可能如下:0-1年:10分;1-2年:20分;2-3年:30分;3年以上:40分;根据两年的时间差,用户A的第二分数为20分。应用程序会对第一分数和第二分数进行加权和运算,得到终端分数。假设第一分数的权重为0.6,第二分数的权重为0.4,那么终端分数=(80*0.6)+(20*0.4)=48+8=56分。群组管理员会根据终端分数来决定是否授权用户A加入群组。如果群组的授权门槛是60分,那么用户A的终端分数为56分,低于门槛,群组管理员可能会拒绝用户A的加入申请。如果群组管理员认为用户A的终端分数接近门槛,可能会要求用户提供更多的信息或进行评估。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Professional Photography Exchange," a platform for advanced photography enthusiasts to exchange ideas. To ensure the quality and professionalism of the group, the group administrator wants to evaluate the devices of users applying to join to determine if they meet the group's requirements. When User A applies to join the "Professional Photography Exchange" group, the application first evaluates User A's device reputation. Assuming User A's device reputation score is 80 points (out of 100), the application will substitute this reputation score into a preset increasing function to calculate a first score. For example, the increasing function might be f(x) = x, in which case the first score would also be 80 points. The application then evaluates User A's device creation timestamp. Assuming User A's device was registered two years ago, the application will calculate the time difference between the current time and the creation timestamp, resulting in two years. Then, the application will refer to a mapping table of time difference intervals and candidate scores. For example, the mapping table might look like this: 0-1 years: 10 points; 1-2 years: 20 points; 2-3 years: 30 points; 3 years and above: 40 points. Based on the two-year time difference, User A's second score is 20 points. The application will perform a weighted sum of the first and second scores to obtain the final score. Assuming the weight of the first score is 0.6 and the weight of the second score is 0.4, then the final score = (80 * 0.6) + (20 * 0.4) = 48 + 8 = 56 points. The group administrator will decide whether to authorize User A to join the group based on the final score. If the group's authorization threshold is 60 points, then User A's final score is 56 points, which is below the threshold, and the group administrator may reject User A's joining application. If the group administrator believes that User A's final score is close to the threshold, they may request the user to provide more information or conduct an evaluation.
在一些实施例中,在对第一分数和第二分数进行加权和运算,得到终端分数时,首先,确定第一权重和第二权重,第一权重用于指示终端信誉度在终端评分的重要程度,第二权重用于指示创建时间戳在终端评分中的重要程度,第一权重和第二权重的和为1。接着,将第一权重和第一分数的乘积、第二权重和第二分数的乘积进行相加,得到第一对象的终端的终端分数。In some embodiments, when performing a weighted sum operation on the first score and the second score to obtain the terminal score, firstly, a first weight and a second weight are determined. The first weight indicates the importance of terminal reputation in the terminal rating, and the second weight indicates the importance of the creation timestamp in the terminal rating. The sum of the first weight and the second weight is 1. Then, the product of the first weight and the first score, and the product of the second weight and the second score are added together to obtain the terminal score of the first object's terminal.
在步骤1230中,如果终端分数大于预定分数,则生成授权应答。In step 1230, if the terminal score is greater than a predetermined score, an authorization response is generated.
预定分数用于衡量第一对象的终端是否达到加入目标群组的条件。The predetermined score is used to measure whether the terminal of the first object meets the conditions for joining the target group.
在该实施例具体实现时,首先,将终端分数和预定分数进行比较。接着,如果确定终端分数大于预定分数,表明第一对象的终端较为安全,达到加入目标群组的条件,则生成授权应答。而当确定终端分数小于或者等于预定分数时,表明第一对象的终端的风险较大,未达到加入目标群组的条件,则生成拒绝授权应答。In this specific implementation, firstly, the terminal score is compared with a predetermined score. Next, if the terminal score is determined to be greater than the predetermined score, it indicates that the terminal of the first target is relatively safe and meets the conditions for joining the target group, and an authorization response is generated. Conversely, if the terminal score is determined to be less than or equal to the predetermined score, it indicates that the terminal of the first target is of higher risk and does not meet the conditions for joining the target group, and a denial response is generated.
在一些实施例中,应用程序需要设定一个预定分数,这个分数是衡量终端是否达到加入目标群组条件的基准。应用程序会将计算得出的终端分数与预定分数进行比较,以确定终端是否符合加入群组的条件。如果终端分数大于预定分数,应用程序会生成一个授权应答。这表明第一对象的终端较为安全,达到了加入目标群组的条件。授权应答通常包含允许加入群组的指令,应用程序会将这个应答发送给第一对象的终端,使其能够加入群组并参与讨论。如果终端分数小于或等于预定分数,应用程序会生成一个拒绝授权应答。对象的终端存在较大的风险,未达到加入目标群组的条件。拒绝授权应答通常包含不允许加入群组的指令,应用程序会将这个应答发送给第一对象的终端,通知其无法加入群组。无论生成的是授权应答还是拒绝授权应答,应用程序都会将结果通知给第一对象的终端。如果是授权应答,用户将能够看到群组的会话页面并参与讨论;如果是拒绝授权应答,用户将收到通知,说明其终端未达到加入群组的条件。基于终端分数的授权机制,应用程序能够有效地管理群组成员,确保群组的安全性和专业性。同时,它也展示了应用程序对用户需求的响应能力和对用户隐私的尊重。In some embodiments, the application needs to set a predetermined score, which serves as a benchmark for whether a terminal meets the conditions for joining a target group. The application compares the calculated terminal score with the predetermined score to determine if the terminal meets the conditions for joining the group. If the terminal score is greater than the predetermined score, the application generates an authorization response. This indicates that the terminal of the first target is relatively safe and meets the conditions for joining the target group. The authorization response typically contains an instruction to allow joining the group, and the application sends this response to the terminal of the first target, enabling it to join the group and participate in the discussion. If the terminal score is less than or equal to the predetermined score, the application generates a denial response. The terminal of the target poses a greater risk and does not meet the conditions for joining the target group. The denial response typically contains an instruction to disallow joining the group, and the application sends this response to the terminal of the first target, notifying it that it cannot join the group. Regardless of whether an authorization response or a denial response is generated, the application notifies the terminal of the result. If it is an authorization response, the user will be able to see the group's conversation page and participate in the discussion; if it is a denial response, the user will receive a notification that their terminal does not meet the conditions for joining the group. Based on the terminal score-based authorization mechanism, the application can effectively manage group members, ensuring the security and professionalism of the group. At the same time, it also demonstrates the application's responsiveness to user needs and respect for user privacy.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“高级投资讨论”的群组,这是一个仅供经验丰富的投资者参与的专业讨论平台。为了确保群组的质量和安全性,群组管理员设定了一个预定分数,只有终端分数超过这个分数的用户才能加入群组。用户A申请加入“高级投资讨论”群组时,应用程序会首先评估用户A的终端分数。假设用户A的终端分数为75分,预定分数为70分。应用程序会将用户A的终端分数(75分)与预定分数(70分)进行比较。比较结果显示,用户A的终端分数大于预定分数。由于用户A的终端分数大于预定分数,应用程序会生成一个授权应答。授权应答包含允许用户A加入群组的指令,应用程序会将这个应答发送给用户A的终端。用户A的终端接收到授权应答后,会显示群组的会话页面。用户A现在可以查看群组的历史记录、当前在线成员列表,并参与实时讨论。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Advanced Investment Discussion," a professional discussion platform for experienced investors only. To ensure the quality and security of the group, the group administrator sets a predetermined score; only users with a terminal score exceeding this score can join the group. When User A applies to join the "Advanced Investment Discussion" group, the application first evaluates User A's terminal score. Let's say User A's terminal score is 75, and the predetermined score is 70. The application compares User A's terminal score (75) with the predetermined score (70). The comparison shows that User A's terminal score is greater than the predetermined score. Because User A's terminal score is greater than the predetermined score, the application generates an authorization response. The authorization response contains instructions to allow User A to join the group, and the application sends this response to User A's terminal. After receiving the authorization response, User A's terminal displays the group's session page. User A can now view the group's history, the list of currently online members, and participate in live discussions.
作为示例,假设用户B申请加入同一个群组,但用户B的终端分数为65分,低于预定分数。用户B申请加入“高级投资讨论”群组时,应用程序会评估用户B的终端分数。假设用户B的终端分数为65分,预定分数为70分。应用程序会将用户B的终端分数(65分)与预定分数(70分)进行比较。比较结果显示,用户B的终端分数小于预定分数。由于用户B的终端分数小于预定分数,应用程序会生成一个拒绝授权应答。拒绝授权应答包含不允许用户B加入群组的指令,应用程序会将这个应答发送给用户B的终端。用户B的终端接收到拒绝授权应答后,会显示一条通知,说明其终端未达到加入群组的条件。用户B无法加入群组,也无法查看群组的会话页面。基于终端分数的授权机制如何帮助群组管理员管理群组成员,确保群组的质量和安全性。As an example, suppose User B requests to join the same group, but User B's terminal score is 65, lower than the predetermined score. When User B requests to join the "Advanced Investment Discussion" group, the application evaluates User B's terminal score. Assume User B's terminal score is 65, and the predetermined score is 70. The application compares User B's terminal score (65) with the predetermined score (70). The comparison shows that User B's terminal score is lower than the predetermined score. Because User B's terminal score is lower than the predetermined score, the application generates a denial-of-authorization response. The denial-of-authorization response contains an instruction not to allow User B to join the group, and the application sends this response to User B's terminal. After receiving the denial-of-authorization response, User B's terminal displays a notification stating that their terminal does not meet the conditions for joining the group. User B cannot join the group and cannot view the group's session page. How can a terminal score-based authorization mechanism help group administrators manage group members and ensure the quality and security of the group?
该实施例的好处是,根据终端信誉度、和创建时间戳综合确定第一对象的终端的终端分数,采用评分的方式经对第一对象的终端的终端验证过程进行量化,能提高对第一对象的终端的终端验证的便捷性和可靠性,进而提高为第一对象的终端进行群组访问授权的可靠性和安全性。The advantage of this embodiment is that by comprehensively determining the terminal score of the first object's terminal based on the terminal reputation and creation timestamp, and by using a scoring method to quantify the terminal verification process of the first object's terminal, the convenience and reliability of terminal verification of the first object's terminal can be improved, thereby improving the reliability and security of group access authorization for the first object's terminal.
为了提高群组信息的显示效率,还可以根据第二对象的设定,将多个群组聚合成一个入口链接进行分享,使其他对象通过一个入口链接,能预览到多个群组的群组名称等基本信息。To improve the efficiency of displaying group information, multiple groups can be aggregated into a single entry link for sharing, based on the settings of the second object. This allows other objects to preview basic information such as the group names of multiple groups through a single entry link.
在该实施例中,本申请实施例的目标群组包括多个目标子群组,入口链接基于第二对象为每个目标子群组创建的子入口链接合成。其中,为每个目标子群组创建子入口链接的方式与创建目标群组的入口链接的方式基本一致。In this embodiment, the target group of this application includes multiple target subgroups, and the entry link is synthesized based on the sub-entry links created by the second object for each target subgroup. The method of creating sub-entry links for each target subgroup is essentially the same as the method of creating entry links for the target group.
基于此,当目标群组包括多个目标子链接时,目标群组的基本信息包含各个目标子群组的目标子群组名称,目标子群组名称在第二对象创建入口链接时关联于目标子群组,目标子群组名称带有链接标记。Based on this, when a target group includes multiple target sub-links, the basic information of the target group includes the target sub-group name of each target sub-group. The target sub-group name is associated with the target sub-group when the second object creates the entry link, and the target sub-group name has a link tag.
在该实施例中,步骤330具体包括:In this embodiment, step 330 specifically includes:
响应于目标对象对目标子群组名称上的链接标记的触发,显示目标子群组的会话页面。In response to a link marker on the target subgroup name triggered by the target object, the session page of the target subgroup is displayed.
在该实施例具体实现时,本申请实施例的基于对目标子群组名称上的链接标记的触发,显示目标子群组的会话页面的各个情形与上述步骤910-920、步骤1110-1120类似。为节省篇幅,不再赘述。In the specific implementation of this embodiment, the various scenarios in which the session page of the target subgroup is displayed based on the triggering of the link marker on the target subgroup name are similar to steps 910-920 and 1110-1120 described above. To save space, these details will not be repeated.
如图13A所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,对象3在篮球兴趣小组的会话页面中将鼠标停留在对象1发送的带链接标记的群组名称“羽毛球兴趣小组”周围时,会显示羽毛球兴趣小组所包括的三个目标子群组的带链接标记的目标子群组名称,其中,三个子群组的子群组名称分别是“羽毛球兴趣小组1群”、“羽毛球兴趣小组2群”、“羽毛球新人培训”。此时,对象3将鼠标停留在目标子群组“羽毛球兴趣小组1群”的群组名称周围,应用程序平台中会显示该目标子群组的基本信息“群组人数:5;是否已加入:是;群主昵称:AA1”。As shown in Figure 13A, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. When Object 3 hovers the mouse over the group name "Badminton Interest Group" (linked by Object 1) in the basketball interest group's chat page, the linked names of the three target subgroups included in the badminton interest group will be displayed. These subgroup names are "Badminton Interest Group 1," "Badminton Interest Group 2," and "Badminton Newcomer Training." When Object 3 hovers the mouse over the target subgroup "Badminton Interest Group 1," the application platform will display the basic information of that target subgroup: "Group members: 5; Already joined: Yes; Group owner nickname: AA1."
如图13B所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,当对象3将鼠标停留在目标子群组“羽毛球兴趣小组2群”的群组名称周围,应用程序平台中会显示该目标子群组的基本信息“群组人数:32;是否已加入:否;群主昵称:AA2”。As shown in Figure 13B, the group members include Object 1, Object 2 and Object 3. When Object 3 hovers the mouse over the group name of the target subgroup "Badminton Interest Group 2", the application platform will display the basic information of the target subgroup: "Group members: 32; Have they joined: No; Group owner nickname: AA2".
如图13C所示,群成员AA1包括对象3、对象11、对象2、对象4和对象5,基于对各个目标子群组的基本信息的比较,对象3在应用程序平台中对目标子群组“”的链接标记进行双击操作,以触发这一链接标记。此时,在应用程序平台中显示目标子群组“羽毛球兴趣小组1群”的会话页面。As shown in Figure 13C, group member AA1 includes object 3, object 11, object 2, object 4, and object 5. Based on the comparison of the basic information of each target subgroup, object 3 double-clicks the link marker of the target subgroup "" in the application platform to trigger this link marker. At this time, the session page of the target subgroup "Badminton Interest Group 1" is displayed in the application platform.
该实施例的好处是,根据第二对象的设定,将多个群组聚合成一个入口链接进行分享,使其他对象通过一个入口链接,能预览到多个群组的群组名称,并基于在不同群组的群组名称的停留操作,预览到各个群组的基本信息,并触发某个群组的链接标记加入到该群组的会话页面,能提高群组信息的显示效率和传递效率。The advantage of this embodiment is that, based on the settings of the second object, multiple groups are aggregated into a single entry link for sharing. This allows other objects to preview the group names of multiple groups through a single entry link, and based on the interaction with the group names in different groups, preview the basic information of each group and trigger the link to join the conversation page of that group. This improves the efficiency of displaying and transmitting group information.
如图14所示,是应用程序服务器在显示目标群组的会话页面时所执行的流程。具体地,在步骤101中,第一对象的终端在第一页面点击目标群组的链接编辑。在步骤102中,服务器拉取目标群组的群组信息。在步骤103中,第一对象的终端是否在群组内。在步骤104中,第一对象的终端不在群组内,则申请加入目标群组。在步骤105中,判断是否加入成功。在步骤106中,当第一对象的终端在群组内,或者加入目标群组成功,二次确认后打开目标群组的会话页面。当第一对象的终端在第一页面点击目标群组的链接标记,对链接标记进行触发时,服务器先拉取目标群组的群组信息,根据群组信息判断第一对象的终端是否在群组内,其具体实现过程与上述步骤810-820类似。Figure 14 illustrates the process executed by the application server when displaying the session page of the target group. Specifically, in step 101, the terminal of the first object clicks the link to edit the target group on the first page. In step 102, the server retrieves the group information of the target group. In step 103, it checks whether the terminal of the first object is already in the group. In step 104, if the terminal of the first object is not already in the group, it requests to join the target group. In step 105, it determines whether the joining was successful. In step 106, if the terminal of the first object is already in the group, or has successfully joined the target group, it opens the session page of the target group after a second confirmation. When the terminal of the first object clicks the link to the target group on the first page, triggering the link, the server first retrieves the group information of the target group and determines whether the terminal of the first object is already in the group based on the group information. The specific implementation process is similar to steps 810-820 above.
在一些实施例中,确定第一对象的终端在目标群组内,则经过二次确认后打开目标群组的会话页面,其具体实现过程与上述步骤910-920类似。当确定第一对象的终端不在目标群组内,且第一对象的终端申请加入目标群组时,判断第一对象的终端是否加入成功,在确定加入成功后,经过第一对象的终端的二次确定之后打开目标群组的会话页面,其具体实现过程与上述步骤1110-1120类似。为节省篇幅,不再赘述。In some embodiments, if it is determined that the terminal of the first object is in the target group, the session page of the target group is opened after secondary confirmation. The specific implementation process is similar to steps 910-920 above. If it is determined that the terminal of the first object is not in the target group, and the terminal of the first object requests to join the target group, it is determined whether the terminal of the first object has successfully joined. After confirming successful joining, the session page of the target group is opened after secondary confirmation by the terminal of the first object. The specific implementation process is similar to steps 1110-1120 above. For the sake of brevity, it will not be described in detail.
本申请的一个实施例的创建目标群组的入口链接的详细描述。A detailed description of an embodiment of this application for creating an entry link for a target group.
为了提高入口链接的创建便利性、和准确性,本申请实施例提供了一种基于随机数、和编码规则的链接创建方案,能提高链接创建效率,并使不同群组的入口链接各不相同。To improve the convenience and accuracy of creating entry links, embodiments of this application provide a link creation scheme based on random numbers and encoding rules, which can improve link creation efficiency and make entry links different for different groups.
请参照图15,在一些实施例中,当目标群组仅包括单个群组时,创建目标群组的入口链接的过程具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤1510-1540:Referring to Figure 15, in some embodiments, when the target group includes only a single group, the process of creating an entry link for the target group specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 1510-1540:
步骤1510、向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面;Step 1510: Display the target group's session page to the second object;
步骤1520、响应于第二对象在目标群组的会话页面中的链接创建操作,获取目标群组的目标群组名称、和第二对象的终端标识;Step 1520: In response to the link creation operation of the second object in the session page of the target group, obtain the target group name of the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object;
步骤1530、基于目标群组名称、和终端标识,生成群组字符串;Step 1530: Generate a group string based on the target group name and terminal identifier;
步骤1540、如果确定群组字符串满足第一条件,则将群组字符串编码成入口链接,并为第二对象显示入口链接。Step 1540: If the group string is determined to satisfy the first condition, then encode the group string into an entry link and display the entry link for the second object.
下面对步骤1510-1540进行详细描述。Steps 1510-1540 are described in detail below.
在步骤1510中,向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面。In step 1510, the target group's session page is displayed to the second object.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第二对象登录到应用程序平台,要访问自己所在的目标群组的会话页面时,服务器会响应于第二对象的访问请求,向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面。其中,目标群组的会话页面中有用于生成目标群组的入口链接的生成链接交互控件。In this specific implementation, when a second object logs into the application platform and wants to access the session page of its target group, the server responds to the second object's access request and displays the target group's session page to the second object. The target group's session page includes an interactive control for generating an entry link to the target group.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面是一个关键的交互过程,它允许用户访问和参与群组讨论。第二对象(用户B)打开应用程序并登录到应用程序平台。登录过程通常涉及验证用户的凭据,如用户名和密码,以确保用户身份的安全性。登录后,用户B希望访问自己所在的目标群组的会话页面。用户B在应用程序的界面中选择相应的群组或点击群组列表中的群组名称,从而向服务器发送访问请求。服务器接收到用户B的访问请求后,会验证用户B是否有权限访问目标群组的会话页面。涉及检查用户B的终端分数是否达到预定分数,或者确认用户B是否已经通过其他方式获得了访问权限。如果用户B有权限访问目标群组的会话页面,服务器会向用户B的终端发送目标群组的会话页面内容。会话页面通常包含群组的历史记录、当前在线成员列表、消息输入框以及各种交互控件,如发送消息按钮、文件上传按钮等。在目标群组的会话页面中,服务器会包含一个生成链接交互控件。这个控件允许用户B生成一个用于邀请其他人加入目标群组的入口链接。当用户B点击生成链接交互控件时,服务器会生成一个唯一的邀请链接,并将其显示在会话页面上。用户B可以将这个链接分享给其他人,邀请他们加入目标群组。用户B现在可以查看和参与目标群组的讨论,与其他成员实时交流。通过生成和分享邀请链接,用户B可以轻松地邀请其他用户加入群组,扩大群组的影响力和活跃度。应用程序能够向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面,并提供生成邀请链接的功能,从而提升用户的互动体验和群组的活跃度。In some embodiments, displaying the target group's session page to a second user is a key interactive process within the application, allowing the user to access and participate in group discussions. The second user (User B) opens the application and logs into the application platform. The login process typically involves verifying the user's credentials, such as username and password, to ensure user security. After logging in, User B wants to access the session page of their target group. User B selects the appropriate group in the application's interface or clicks on the group name in the group list, thereby sending an access request to the server. Upon receiving User B's access request, the server verifies whether User B has permission to access the target group's session page. This involves checking if User B's terminal score has reached a predetermined score, or confirming whether User B has already obtained access through other means. If User B has permission to access the target group's session page, the server sends the session page content to User B's terminal. The session page typically includes the group's history, a list of currently online members, message input boxes, and various interactive controls, such as send message buttons and file upload buttons. Within the target group's session page, the server includes a link generation interactive control. This control allows User B to generate an entry link for inviting others to join the target group. When User B clicks the generate link interactive control, the server generates a unique invitation link and displays it on the session page. User B can then share this link with others, inviting them to join the target group. User B can now view and participate in the target group's discussions and communicate with other members in real time. By generating and sharing invitation links, User B can easily invite other users to join the group, expanding the group's influence and activity. The application's ability to display the target group's session page to a second party and provide the functionality to generate invitation links enhances the user's interactive experience and group activity.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“城市探索者”的群组,这是一个供户外爱好者分享旅行经历和计划探险活动的平台。用户B(第二对象)是这个群组的成员,他希望通过应用程序访问群组的会话页面。用户B打开“城市探索者”应用程序,并输入他的用户名和密码进行登录。应用程序会验证用户B的凭据,确保他是合法的用户。登录后,用户B在应用程序的主界面中看到群组列表,他点击“城市探索者”群组,向服务器发送访问群组会话页面的请求。服务器接收到用户B的访问请求后,会检查用户B是否有权限访问“城市探索者”群组的会话页面。这可能包括验证用户B的终端分数是否达到预定分数,或者确认用户B是否已经通过其他方式获得了访问权限。如果用户B有权限访问群组的会话页面,服务器会向用户B的终端发送“城市探索者”群组的会话页面内容。会话页面显示了群组的历史记录,包括成员们分享的旅行照片、探险计划和讨论话题。页面上还有一个在线成员列表,显示当前在线的群组成员。在会话页面的某个显眼位置,服务器会包含一个生成链接交互控件。这个控件可能是一个按钮,上面写着“生成邀请链接”。用户B点击这个按钮后,服务器会生成一个唯一的邀请链接,并将其显示在会话页面上。这个链接可以用来邀请其他人加入“城市探索者”群组。向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面,并提供生成邀请链接的功能。这种设计不仅提高了应用程序的互动性和社交性,还帮助用户扩大了他们的社交圈,提升了整体的用户体验。As an example, suppose there is a group called "City Explorers," a platform for outdoor enthusiasts to share travel experiences and plan adventures. User B (the second user) is a member of this group and wants to access the group's session page through the application. User B opens the "City Explorers" application and logs in with his username and password. The application verifies User B's credentials to ensure he is a legitimate user. After logging in, User B sees a list of groups on the application's main interface. He clicks on the "City Explorers" group, sending a request to the server to access the group's session page. Upon receiving User B's access request, the server checks whether User B has permission to access the "City Explorers" group's session page. This may include verifying whether User B's terminal score has reached a predetermined score, or confirming whether User B has already obtained access through other means. If User B has permission to access the group's session page, the server sends the "City Explorers" group's session page content to User B's terminal. The session page displays the group's history, including travel photos, adventure plans, and discussion topics shared by members. There is also an online member list on the page, showing the currently online group members. In a prominent location on the conversation page, the server includes an interactive control to generate an invitation link. This control might be a button labeled "Generate Invitation Link." When user B clicks this button, the server generates a unique invitation link and displays it on the conversation page. This link can be used to invite others to join the "City Explorers" group. The conversation page of the target group is displayed to the second user, providing the functionality to generate an invitation link. This design not only enhances the interactivity and social nature of the application but also helps users expand their social circles, improving the overall user experience.
如此,通过向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面,并在页面中提供生成入口链接的交互控件,应用程序能够显著提升用户的社交互动体验和群组的活跃度。具体而言,当第二对象登录到应用程序平台并访问目标群组的会话页面时,服务器响应其访问请求,展示包含历史记录、在线成员列表以及消息输入框等元素的会话页面。这一过程不仅使用户能够实时参与群组讨论,还通过生成链接交互控件,赋予用户轻松邀请他人加入群组的能力。不仅增强了用户的归属感和参与度,还通过社交分享机制扩大了群组的影响力,进而提升了整个应用程序的用户粘性和活跃度。In this way, by displaying the target group's conversation page to a second user and providing interactive controls within the page to generate entry links, the application can significantly enhance the user's social interaction experience and group activity. Specifically, when a second user logs into the application platform and accesses the target group's conversation page, the server responds to their access request, displaying a conversation page containing elements such as history, a list of online members, and message input boxes. This process not only allows users to participate in group discussions in real time but also empowers them to easily invite others to join the group through the generation of interactive link controls. This not only enhances users' sense of belonging and participation but also expands the group's influence through social sharing mechanisms, thereby increasing the overall user stickiness and activity of the application.
在步骤1520中,响应于第二对象在目标群组的会话页面中的链接创建操作,获取目标群组的目标群组名称、和第二对象的终端标识。In step 1520, in response to the link creation operation of the second object in the session page of the target group, the target group name of the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object are obtained.
第二对象的终端标识用于对第二对象进行标记,以区分第二对象与其他对象终端。The terminal identifier of the second object is used to mark the second object in order to distinguish the second object from other object terminals.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第二对象要创建目标群组的入口链接时,第二对象会在目标群组的会话页面中触发生成链接交互控件。基于此,服务器会接收到第二对象对生成链接交互控件的触发事件,并响应于第二对象在目标群组的会话页面中的链接创建操作,从后台日志中获取目标群组的目标群组名称、和第二对象的终端标识。In this specific implementation, when the second object wants to create an entry link to the target group, the second object will trigger a link generation interaction control in the target group's session page. Based on this, the server will receive the trigger event of the second object's link generation interaction control and, in response to the link creation operation of the second object in the target group's session page, obtain the target group name of the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object from the background log.
在一些实施例中,应用程序中,当第二对象想要创建目标群组的入口链接时,这一过程涉及多个步骤,以确保链接的生成是安全和可追溯的。第二对象在目标群组的会话页面中,点击或触发动态生成链接的交互控件,例如一个按钮或链接生成器。发送触发事件会向服务器发送一个触发事件,通知服务器第二对象想要生成一个入口链接。服务器接收到触发事件后,会响应第二对象的链接创建操作。服务器从其数据库或群组管理模块中检索目标群组的名称。这个名称是群组的标识符,用于在链接中显示和识别群组。服务器从后台日志或用户会话管理中获取第二对象的终端标识。这个标识符是唯一的,用于标记第二对象的终端,以便区分其与其他用户的终端。终端标识不仅用于标记第二对象,还可能用于检测链接的生成和使用情况,确保链接的安全性和可追溯性。服务器使用获取到的目标群组名称和第二对象的终端标识,生成一个唯一的入口链接。这个链接包含了必要的信息,允许其他用户通过它加入目标群组。生成的入口链接被发送回第二对象的终端,显示在会话页面上,或者通过其他方式(如复制到剪贴板)提供给第二对象。In some embodiments of the application, when a second object wants to create an entry link to a target group, the process involves multiple steps to ensure that the link generation is secure and traceable. The second object clicks or triggers an interactive control, such as a button or link generator, that dynamically generates the link on the target group's session page. Sending a trigger event sends a trigger event to the server, notifying the server that the second object wants to generate an entry link. Upon receiving the trigger event, the server responds to the second object's link creation operation. The server retrieves the name of the target group from its database or group management module. This name is the group's identifier, used to display and identify the group in the link. The server obtains the second object's terminal identifier from background logs or user session management. This identifier is unique and used to mark the second object's terminal to distinguish it from other users' terminals. The terminal identifier is not only used to mark the second object but may also be used to detect link generation and usage, ensuring the link's security and traceability. The server uses the obtained target group name and the second object's terminal identifier to generate a unique entry link. This link contains the necessary information to allow other users to join the target group. The generated entry link is sent back to the second object's terminal, displayed on the session page, or provided to the second object in other ways (such as by copying to the clipboard).
作为示例,假设有一个名为“摄影爱好者社区”的群组,这是一个供摄影爱好者交流技巧、分享作品的平台。用户B(第二对象)是这个群组的活跃成员,他想要邀请他的朋友加入群组。用户B登录到“摄影爱好者社区”应用程序,并访问群组的会话页面。页面上显示了群组的记录、在线成员列表以及一个生成邀请链接的按钮。用户B点击生成邀请链接的按钮,触发了生成链接交互控件。这一动作向服务器发送了一个触发事件,表示用户B想要生成一个入口链接。服务器接收到用户B的触发事件后,开始响应用户的链接创建操作。服务器从其数据库中检索“摄影爱好者社区”的群组名称,这是群组的标识符,将用于在邀请链接中显示。服务器从后台日志中获取用户B的终端标识。这个标识是唯一的,用于标记用户B的终端,确保邀请链接的安全性和可追溯性。服务器使用获取到的群组名称和用户B的终端标识,生成一个唯一的邀请链接。这个链接包含了必要的信息,允许其他用户通过它加入“摄影爱好者社区”群组。生成的邀请链接被发送回用户B的终端,显示在会话页面上。用户B可以复制这个链接,通过电子邮件、社交媒体或其他方式分享给他的朋友。As an example, suppose there is a group called "Photography Enthusiasts Community," a platform for photography enthusiasts to exchange techniques and share their work. User B (the second user) is an active member of this group and wants to invite his friends to join. User B logs into the "Photography Enthusiasts Community" application and accesses the group's session page. The page displays the group's history, a list of online members, and a button to generate an invitation link. User B clicks the "Generate Invitation Link" button, triggering the link generation interactive control. This action sends a trigger event to the server, indicating that User B wants to generate an entry link. Upon receiving User B's trigger event, the server begins responding to the user's link creation operation. The server retrieves the group name of "Photography Enthusiasts Community" from its database; this is the group's identifier and will be used in the invitation link. The server obtains User B's terminal identifier from the background logs. This identifier is unique and used to identify User B's terminal, ensuring the security and traceability of the invitation link. The server uses the retrieved group name and User B's terminal identifier to generate a unique invitation link. This link contains the necessary information, allowing other users to join the "Photography Enthusiasts Community" group. The generated invitation link is sent back to User B's device and displayed on the session page. User B can copy this link and share it with his friends via email, social media, or other means.
在步骤1530中,基于目标群组名称、和终端标识,生成群组字符串。In step 1530, a group string is generated based on the target group name and the terminal identifier.
群组字符串是一个随机生成的字符串。其中,群组字符串往往具有唯一性,能对目标群组进行标示,不同群组的群组字符串是不同的。A group string is a randomly generated string. Group strings are typically unique, identifying the target group; different groups will have different group strings.
在该实施例具体实现时,可以使用伪随机数生成算法或者预定加密算法,根据目标群组名称和终端标识生成一个随机串,并将随机串作为目标群组的群组字符串。其中,目标群组的群组字符串需要具有唯一性。预定加密算法包括但不限于包括SHA-256加密算法等。In the specific implementation of this embodiment, a pseudo-random number generation algorithm or a predetermined encryption algorithm can be used to generate a random string based on the target group name and terminal identifier, and this random string can be used as the group string for the target group. The group string for the target group must be unique. The predetermined encryption algorithm includes, but is not limited to, the SHA-256 encryption algorithm.
在一些实施例中,要生成一个基于目标群组名称和终端标识的唯一群组字符串,获取目标群组的名称,例如“摄影爱好者社区”。获取第二对象的终端标识,例如用户的设备ID或唯一的会话令牌。将目标群组名称和终端标识组合成一个单一的字符串。这可以通过简单地将两个字符串连接起来实现,例如:“摄影爱好者社区”+“设备ID12345”。选择一个预定的加密算法,如SHA-256,来生成群组字符串。SHA-256是一种安全的哈希算法,可以生成固定长度的哈希值,且具有良好的唯一性和防篡改性。使用选定的加密算法对组合后的字符串进行哈希处理。例如,使用SHA-256算法对“摄影爱好者社区设备ID12345”进行哈希处理,生成一个唯一的哈希值。将生成的哈希值作为群组字符串。这个字符串是基于目标群组名称和终端标识生成的,具有唯一性,可以用来标识目标群组。在将群组字符串用于实际应用之前,应验证其唯一性。这可以通过检查数据库中是否已经存在相同的群组字符串来完成。如果存在,则需要重新生成群组字符串。将验证后的群组字符串存储在数据库中,与目标群组和第二对象的终端标识相关联。使用群组字符串来标识目标群组,并在需要时(如生成邀请链接)进行引用。In some embodiments, to generate a unique group string based on the target group name and terminal identifier, obtain the name of the target group, such as "Photography Enthusiast Community". Obtain the terminal identifier of the second object, such as a user's device ID or a unique session token. Combine the target group name and terminal identifier into a single string. This can be achieved by simply concatenating the two strings, for example: "Photography Enthusiast Community" + "Device ID12345". Select a predetermined encryption algorithm, such as SHA-256, to generate the group string. SHA-256 is a secure hash algorithm that generates fixed-length hash values with good uniqueness and tamper resistance. Hash the combined string using the selected encryption algorithm. For example, hash "Photography Enthusiast Community Device ID12345" using the SHA-256 algorithm to generate a unique hash value. Use the generated hash value as the group string. This string, generated based on the target group name and terminal identifier, is unique and can be used to identify the target group. Before using the group string in actual applications, its uniqueness should be verified. This can be done by checking if the same group string already exists in the database. If it does, the group string needs to be regenerated. The verified group string is stored in the database and associated with the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object. The group string is used to identify the target group and referenced when needed (such as when generating an invitation link).
在步骤1540中,如果确定群组字符串满足第一条件,则将群组字符串编码成入口链接,并为第二对象显示入口链接。In step 1540, if it is determined that the group string satisfies the first condition, the group string is encoded into an entry link, and the entry link is displayed for the second object.
第一条件用于实现对群组字符串的冲突检测,以判断目标群组的群组字符串是否唯一,是否与其他群组的群组字符串重复。The first condition is used to implement conflict detection of group strings, in order to determine whether the group string of the target group is unique and whether it is a duplicate of the group string of other groups.
在该实施例具体实现时,首先,依据第一条件对群组字符串进行唯一性检测,当随机生成的群组字符串是唯一的,则确定群组字符串满足第一条件。接着,使用URL编码或者自定义编码规则,将群组字符串进行编码,生成目标群组的入口链接,其中,目标群组的入口链接是唯一的。In this specific implementation, firstly, the group string is checked for uniqueness based on a first condition. If the randomly generated group string is unique, then the group string satisfies the first condition. Next, the group string is encoded using URL encoding or a custom encoding rule to generate the entry link of the target group, wherein the entry link of the target group is unique.
在一些实施例中,在生成入口链接之前,必须确保群组字符串的唯一性,以避免与其他群组的群组字符串冲突。根据目标群组名称和终端标识生成群组字符串。这可以通过使用加密算法(如SHA-256)对组合后的字符串进行哈处理来实现。接下来,对生成的群组字符串进行唯一性检测。这通常涉及到查询数据库,确认该群组字符串是否已经存在。如果群组字符串在数据库中已经存在,说明它与另一个群组的群组字符串冲突,不满足第一条件。如果群组字符串在数据库中不存在,说明它是唯一的,满足第一条件。一旦确定群组字符串满足第一条件(即它是唯一的),就可以将其编码成入口链接。编码可以使用标准的URL编码规则,确保群组字符串在URL中安全传输。也可以使用自定义的编码规则,增加入口链接的复杂性,防止被轻易猜测或滥用。将编码后的群组字符串与应用程序的域名或特定的路由路径结合,目标群组的入口链接。例如,如果应用程序的域名是`example.com`,编码后的群组字符串是`abc123`,那么入口链接可能是`https://example.com/join/abc123`。将生成的入口链接显示给第二对象。这可以通过在应用程序的界面中显示一个按钮或链接来实现。第二对象可以复制这个入口链接,通过电子邮件、社交媒体或其他方式分享给其他人,邀请他们加入目标群组。应用程序确保了每个入口链接都是唯一且安全的,有效地防止了群组字符串的冲突,同时为用户提供了一个方便的邀请机制。In some embodiments, the uniqueness of the group string must be ensured before generating the entry link to avoid conflicts with group strings from other groups. A group string is generated based on the target group name and terminal identifier. This can be achieved by hashing the combined string using an encryption algorithm such as SHA-256. Next, the uniqueness of the generated group string is checked. This typically involves querying a database to confirm whether the group string already exists. If the group string already exists in the database, it means it conflicts with another group's group string and does not meet the first condition. If the group string does not exist in the database, it means it is unique and meets the first condition. Once it is determined that the group string meets the first condition (i.e., it is unique), it can be encoded into an entry link. Encoding can use standard URL encoding rules to ensure the group string is securely transmitted in the URL. Custom encoding rules can also be used to increase the complexity of the entry link and prevent easy guessing or abuse. The encoded group string is then combined with the application's domain name or a specific routing path to create the entry link for the target group. For example, if the application's domain name is `example.com` and the encoded group string is `abc123`, then the entry link might be `https://example.com/join/abc123`. The generated entry link is displayed to the second object. This can be achieved by displaying a button or link in the application's interface. The second object can copy this entry link and share it with others via email, social media, or other means, inviting them to join the target group. The application ensures that each entry link is unique and secure, effectively preventing group string conflicts, while providing users with a convenient invitation mechanism.
在一个具体示例中,入口链接的格式可以表示为“:https://example.com/group?token=xxxx”,其中,“xxxx”表示目标群组的群组字符串。In a specific example, the entry link can be formatted as "https://example.com/group?token=xxxx", where "xxxx" represents the group string of the target group.
该实施例的好处是,在各个群组的会话页面中设置生成链接交互控件,使各个群组的群成员可以直接触发生成链接交互控件来生成单个群组的入口链接,提高了操作便捷性。另外,服务器在生成入口链接时,入口链接是基于群组名称、和触发控件的终端的终端标识生成具有唯一性的随机串,将随机串按照预定规则和固定格式编码而成,能使不同群组的入口链接各不相同,还能使生成的多个入口链接具备较好的格式一致性。The advantage of this embodiment is that by setting up a link generation interactive control in the conversation page of each group, group members can directly trigger the link generation interactive control to generate an entry link for a single group, improving operational convenience. Furthermore, when generating the entry link, the server generates a unique random string based on the group name and the terminal identifier of the terminal triggering the control. This random string is encoded according to predetermined rules and a fixed format, ensuring that entry links for different groups are different and that the generated entry links have good format consistency.
请参照图16,在一些实施例中,确定所述群组字符串满足第一条件的过程具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤1610-1630:Referring to Figure 16, in some embodiments, the process of determining that the group string satisfies the first condition specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 1610-1630:
步骤1610、获取预定关系对照表;Step 1610: Obtain the pre-defined relationship lookup table;
步骤1620、将群组字符串、与各个候选字符串进行比较;Step 1620: Compare the group string with each candidate string;
步骤1630、如果确定群组字符串、与各个候选字符串都不相同,则确定群组字符串满足第一条件。Step 1630: If the group string is determined to be different from all candidate strings, then the group string satisfies the first condition.
下面对步骤1610-1630进行详细描述。Steps 1610-1630 are described in detail below.
在步骤1610中,获取预定关系对照表。In step 1610, a predetermined relationship lookup table is obtained.
预定关系对照表用于指示各个候选群组与候选字符串的对应关系。The predefined relationship lookup table is used to indicate the correspondence between each candidate group and the candidate string.
候选群组指的是应用程序平台中所创建的其他会话群组。Candidate groups refer to other session groups created within the application platform.
候选字符串指的是应用程序平台中其他会话群组的群组字符串。Candidate strings refer to group strings of other session groups in the application platform.
在该实施例具体实现时,预定关系对照表是服务器在后台存储的,预定关系对照表中的候选群组和各个候选群组所对应的候选字符串是随着各个群组的入口链接创建不断更新的。应用程序中的各个候选群组的候选字符串都会记录在预定关系对照表中。基于此,在经过授权许可的情况下,可以直接调用服务器所维护的预定关系对照表。In this specific implementation, the predefined relationship lookup table is stored by the server in the background. The candidate groups and their corresponding candidate strings in the predefined relationship lookup table are continuously updated as entry links for each group are created. The candidate strings for each candidate group in the application are recorded in the predefined relationship lookup table. Therefore, with authorization, the predefined relationship lookup table maintained by the server can be directly accessed.
在一些实施例中,预定关系对照表是在应用程序平台中用于管理群组和群组字符串之间对应关系的关键数据结构。预定关系对照表是一个数据结构,它记录了应用程序平台中所有候选群组与其对应的候选字符串之间的映射关系。每个候选群组都有一个唯一的候选字符串,这个字符串是通过特定的算法生成的,用于唯一标识该群组。候选群组是指应用程序平台中已经创建的其他会话群组。这些群组可能有不同的主题、目的和成员。候选字符串是每个候选群组的群组字符串,它是通过结合群组名称和终端标识生成的,并经过加密算法处理得到的。预定关系对照表通常存储在服务器的后台数据库中。每当创建一个新的群组入口链接时,服务器会生成一个新的群组字符串,并将其与相应的群组关联,然后更新预定关系对照表。这种更新是动态的,随着群组的创建和入口链接的生成,预定关系对照表会不断更新,以反映最新的群组和群组字符串对应关系。在经过授权许可的情况下,应用程序可以调用服务器维护的预定关系对照表。这通常通过API请求实现。应用程序发送一个请求到服务器,请求获取预定关系对照表的数据。服务器验证请求的合法性后,会返回预定关系对照表的内容。一旦应用程序获取了预定关系对照表,它可以使用这个表来验证群组字符串的唯一性,确保在生成新的入口链接时不会发生冲突。应用程序还可以使用预定关系对照表来解析入口链接,确定链接对应的群组,从而允许用户加入相应的群组。In some embodiments, the pre-defined relationship lookup table is a key data structure in the application platform used to manage the mapping between groups and group strings. The pre-defined relationship lookup table is a data structure that records the mapping relationship between all candidate groups and their corresponding candidate strings in the application platform. Each candidate group has a unique candidate string, generated using a specific algorithm to uniquely identify the group. Candidate groups refer to other session groups already created in the application platform. These groups may have different topics, purposes, and members. The candidate string is the group string for each candidate group, generated by combining the group name and terminal identifier, and processed using an encryption algorithm. The pre-defined relationship lookup table is typically stored in a backend database on the server. Whenever a new group entry link is created, the server generates a new group string, associates it with the corresponding group, and then updates the pre-defined relationship lookup table. This update is dynamic; as groups are created and entry links are generated, the pre-defined relationship lookup table is continuously updated to reflect the latest group and group string mapping relationship. With authorization, applications can access the pre-defined relationship lookup table maintained by the server. This is typically achieved through API requests. The application sends a request to the server to retrieve the pre-defined relationship lookup table data. After verifying the validity of the request, the server returns the contents of a predefined relationship lookup table. Once the application obtains this table, it can use it to verify the uniqueness of group strings, ensuring no conflicts occur when generating new entry links. The application can also use the predefined relationship lookup table to parse entry links, determine the group corresponding to the link, and thus allow users to join the appropriate group.
在步骤1620中,对群组字符串和各个候选字符串进行比较,以判断群组字符串是否唯一。In step 1620, the group string and each candidate string are compared to determine whether the group string is unique.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序中,确保群组字符串的唯一性是至关重要的,因为它直接关系到群组的标识和安全。应用程序根据目标群组的名称和第二对象的终端标识生成一个群组字符串。这通常通过使用加密算法(如SHA-256)对组合后的字符串进行哈希处理来实现。应用程序需要获取服务器维护的预定关系对照表,该包含了所有已存在的候选群组及其对应的候选字符串。可以通过发送一个API请求到服务器实现,服务器在验证请求的合法性后,返回预定关系对照表的数据。应用程序将生成的群组字符串与预定关系对照表中的每个候选字符串进行比较。如果生成的群组字符串与所有候选字符串都不相同,那么可以确定这个群组字符串是唯一的,满足第一条件。如果生成的群组字符串与任何一个候选字符串相同,那么说明这个群组字符串已经存在,不满足第一条件,需要重新生成。如果群组字符串是唯一的,应用程序可以继续使用它来生成入口链接。如果群组字符串不是唯一的,应用程序需要重新生成群组字符串,并再次进行比较,直到找到一个唯一的字符串。为了提高比较效率,应用程序可以使用数据结构(如哈希表)来存储预定关系对照表中的候选字符串,使得比较过程可以在常数时间内完成。应用程序还可以在生成群组字符串时,立即检查其唯一性,而不是先生成再比较,以减少不必要的计算。In some embodiments, ensuring the uniqueness of the group string is crucial in the application, as it directly relates to group identification and security. The application generates a group string based on the target group's name and the terminal identifier of a second object. This is typically achieved by hashing the combined string using an encryption algorithm such as SHA-256. The application needs to access a predefined lookup table maintained by the server, which contains all existing candidate groups and their corresponding candidate strings. This can be achieved by sending an API request to the server, which, after verifying the request's validity, returns the predefined lookup table data. The application compares the generated group string with each candidate string in the predefined lookup table. If the generated group string is different from all candidate strings, then the group string is unique, satisfying the first condition. If the generated group string is the same as any candidate string, then the group string already exists, does not satisfy the first condition, and needs to be regenerated. If the group string is unique, the application can continue to use it to generate entry links. If the group string is not unique, the application needs to regenerate the group string and compare it again until a unique string is found. To improve comparison efficiency, applications can use data structures such as hash tables to store candidate strings in a predefined lookup table, allowing the comparison process to be completed in constant time. Applications can also check the uniqueness of group strings immediately upon generation, rather than generating them first and then comparing them, to reduce unnecessary computation.
在步骤1630中,如果确定群组字符串、与各个候选字符串均不相同,则确定群组字符串满足第一条件。In step 1630, if it is determined that the group string is different from all candidate strings, then the group string is determined to satisfy the first condition.
在一些实施例中,如果确定群组字符串、与各个候选字符串均不相同,表明群组字符串与其他候选字符串不冲突,群组字符串是唯一的,则确定群组字符串满足第一条件。如果确定群组字符串、与某一个候选字符串相同,表明群组字符串与一个候选字符串冲突,群组字符串不是唯一的,出现了同一个随机串代表与至少两个群组对应,则确定群组字符串不满足第一条件,根据目标群组的目标群组名称和第二对象的终端标识重新生成随机串,并在生成的随机串是唯一的时,将随机串作为目标群组的群组字符串进行编码。In some embodiments, if the group string is determined to be different from all candidate strings, indicating that the group string does not conflict with other candidate strings and the group string is unique, then the group string is determined to satisfy the first condition. If the group string is determined to be the same as one of the candidate strings, indicating that the group string conflicts with a candidate string and the group string is not unique, and the same random string represents at least two groups, then the group string is determined to not satisfy the first condition. A new random string is then generated based on the target group name and the terminal identifier of the second object. If the generated random string is unique, it is encoded as the group string of the target group.
作为示例,假设有一个名为“健康生活社区”的应用程序,用户可以在其中创建和加入各种健康相关的群组。当用户想要创建一个新的群组并生成入口链接时,应用程序需要确保生成的群组字符串是唯一的。用户A想要创建一个名为“素食主义交流”的新群组。他在应用程序中填写群组名称,并提交创建请求。应用程序根据群组名称和A的终端标识生成一个群组字符串。例如,使用SHA-256算法对“素食主义交流”和用户A的设备ID进行哈希处理,生成一个唯一的哈希值作为群组字符串。在生成群组字符串后,应用程序需要获取服务器维护的预定关系对照表。这通常通过发送一个API请求到服务器实现。服务器验证请求的合法性后,返回当前所有的候选群组及其对应的候选字符串。应用程序将生成的群组字符串与预定关系对照表中的所有候选字符串进行比较。这可以通过遍历预定关系对照表,逐一比较群组字符串与每个候选字符串是否相同来实现。如果生成的群组字符串与所有候选字符串都不相同,那么可以确定这个群组字符串是唯一的,满足第一条件。如果生成的群组字符串与任何一个候选字符串相同,那么说明这个群组字符串已经存在,不满足第一条件,需要重新生成。一旦确定群组字符串是唯一的,应用程序将其编码成入口链接。例如,使用URL编码规则将群组字符串编码,并将其与应用程序的域名结合,生成一个唯一的入口链接。应用程序将生成的入口链接显示给用户A。用户A可以将这个链接分享给其他人,邀请他们加入“素食主义交流”群组。获取预定关系对照表,比较群组字符串与候选字符串,判断群组字符串的唯一性,并生成唯一的入口链接。这种设计确保了每个群组都有一个唯一的标识符,防止了群组字符串的冲突,提升了应用程序的可靠性和用户体验。As an example, suppose there's an application called "Healthy Living Community" where users can create and join various health-related groups. When a user wants to create a new group and generate an entry link, the application needs to ensure that the generated group string is unique. User A wants to create a new group called "Vegetarianism Exchange." He fills in the group name in the application and submits a creation request. The application generates a group string based on the group name and A's device ID. For example, it might use the SHA-256 algorithm to hash "Vegetarianism Exchange" and User A's device ID, generating a unique hash value as the group string. After generating the group string, the application needs to retrieve a predefined lookup table maintained by the server. This is typically achieved by sending an API request to the server. After verifying the request's validity, the server returns all current candidate groups and their corresponding candidate strings. The application compares the generated group string with all candidate strings in the predefined lookup table. This can be done by iterating through the predefined lookup table, comparing the group string with each candidate string one by one. If the generated group string is different from all candidate strings, then the group string is unique, satisfying the first condition. If the generated group string is identical to any candidate string, it means that the group string already exists, does not meet the first condition, and needs to be regenerated. Once the group string is determined to be unique, the application encodes it into an entry link. For example, the group string is encoded using URL encoding rules and combined with the application's domain name to generate a unique entry link. The application displays the generated entry link to user A. User A can share this link with others, inviting them to join the "Vegetarian Exchange" group. A predefined lookup table is retrieved, the group string is compared with candidate strings, the uniqueness of the group string is determined, and a unique entry link is generated. This design ensures that each group has a unique identifier, prevents group string conflicts, and improves application reliability and user experience.
如图17所示,是预定关系对照表的结构示意图。具体地,在预定关系对照表中,各个候选群组的候选群组字符串是关键字key,各个候选群组的群组名称是值value,以通过候选群组字符串查找到各个候选群组的群组名称等群组信息。其中,候选群组字符串“K77qzd”用于指示羽毛球兴趣小组,候选群组字符串“7qe31a5”用于指示网球兴趣小组,候选群组字符串“Zk485qz”用于指示篮球兴趣小组,候选群组字符串“Yq142nm”用于指示乒乓球兴趣小组。Figure 17 shows a schematic diagram of the predefined relationship lookup table. Specifically, in the predefined relationship lookup table, the candidate group string for each candidate group is the key, and the group name for each candidate group is the value, so that the group name and other group information of each candidate group can be found through the candidate group string. Among them, the candidate group string "K77qzd" is used to indicate the badminton interest group, the candidate group string "7qe31a5" is used to indicate the tennis interest group, the candidate group string "Zk485qz" is used to indicate the basketball interest group, and the candidate group string "Yq142nm" is used to indicate the table tennis interest group.
该实施例的好处是,利用预定关系对照表将各个群组的群组信息和群组字符串用键值对的形式进行存储,将群组字符串作为查找的关键字,将群组信息作为值,能实现根据群组字符串(或者入口链接)查找并提取各个群组的群组信息,提高了群组信息的查找效率、和群组信息传递效率。另外,还可以利用关系对照表检验每个新生成的群组字符串是否与已经存在的群组字符串相冲突,能确保各个群组的群组字符串(或者入口链接)是唯一的。The advantage of this embodiment is that by using a predetermined relationship lookup table to store the group information and group strings of each group in key-value pairs, and using the group string as the search keyword and the group information as the value, it is possible to find and retrieve the group information of each group based on the group string (or entry link), thereby improving the efficiency of group information retrieval and transmission. Furthermore, the relationship lookup table can be used to check whether each newly generated group string conflicts with an existing group string, ensuring that the group string (or entry link) of each group is unique.
如图18A所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,对象1在打开篮球兴趣小组的会话页面之后,想要生成篮球兴趣小组的入口链接时,对象1会点击会话页面中的“生成链接”按钮,使服务器为篮球兴趣小组创建入口链接。As shown in Figure 18A, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. After Object 1 opens the basketball interest group's session page, if it wants to generate an entry link for the basketball interest group, Object 1 will click the "Generate Link" button on the session page, causing the server to create an entry link for the basketball interest group.
如图18B所示,群成员包括对象1、对象2和对象3,当入口链接生成完毕,会话页面中会显示提示字段“创建成功”,并提供有篮球兴趣小组的入口链接“https://example.comgroup?token=Zk485qz”,此时,对象1可以将入口链接复制,并将入口链接粘贴到应用程序平台中的任意编辑区域内。As shown in Figure 18B, the group members include Object 1, Object 2, and Object 3. Once the entry link is generated, the session page will display the message "Successfully created" and provide the entry link for the basketball interest group: "https://example.comgroup?token=Zk485qz". At this point, Object 1 can copy the entry link and paste it into any editing area in the application platform.
如图19所示,是应用程序服务器在创建目标群组的入口链接时所执行的流程。在步骤201中,第二对象选择目标群组生成分享链接;在步骤202中,将目标群组的群组名称、第二对象的终端标识等信息上传;在步骤203中,生成一个唯一的群组字符串,并以该群组字符串为关键字key,将群组名称等信息存储;在步骤204中,将群组字符串拼接成一个群组链接,展示群组链接。具体地,首先,第二对象在目标群组的会话页面中选择针对目标群组生成分享链接(入口链接)。接着,将存储的目标群组的群组名称、第二对象的终端标识等信息上传到服务器,服务器基于目标群组的群组名称、第二对象的终端标识等信息生成一个唯一的群组字符串,并以该群组字符串为关键字(key),将群组名称等信息作为值(value)进行存储。最后,将群组字符串拼接成一个群组链接,并展示群组链接,其具体实现过程与上述步骤1510-1540类似。为节省篇幅,不再赘述。Figure 19 illustrates the process executed by the application server when creating an entry link for a target group. In step 201, the second object selects the target group to generate a shareable link; in step 202, it uploads information such as the target group's name and the second object's terminal identifier; in step 203, it generates a unique group string and stores the group name and other information using this group string as the key; in step 204, it concatenates the group strings into a group link and displays the group link. Specifically, first, the second object selects to generate a shareable link (entry link) for the target group on the target group's session page. Next, it uploads the stored target group's name, the second object's terminal identifier, and other information to the server. The server generates a unique group string based on these information and stores the group name and other information as the value, using this group string as the key. Finally, it concatenates the group strings into a group link and displays the group link, the specific implementation of which is similar to steps 1510-1540 above. For brevity, these details are not elaborated further.
请参照图20,在一些实施例中,当目标群组包括多个子群组时,创建目标群组的过程具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤2010-2040:Referring to Figure 20, in some embodiments, when the target group includes multiple subgroups, the process of creating the target group specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2010-2040:
步骤2010、响应于第二对象的链接创建请求,显示链接创建页面;Step 2010: In response to the link creation request from the second object, display the link creation page;
步骤2020、基于第二对象在链接创建页面中的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接;Step 2020: Based on the input operation of the second object on the link creation page, determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup;
步骤2030、基于多个子群组链接、和第二对象的终端标识,生成群组字符串;Step 2030: Generate a group string based on multiple subgroup links and the terminal identifier of the second object;
步骤2040、如果确定群组字符串满足第一条件,则将群组字符串编码成入口链接,并为第二对象显示入口链接。Step 2040: If it is determined that the group string meets the first condition, then encode the group string into an entry link and display the entry link for the second object.
下面对步骤2010-2040进行详细描述。Steps 2010-2040 are described in detail below.
在步骤2010中,响应于第二对象的链接创建请求,显示链接创建页面。In step 2010, in response to the link creation request of the second object, the link creation page is displayed.
链接创建页面用于提供给对象将多个群组整合成一个大群组,并创建这个大群组的入口链接,以实现群组之间的聚合、和群组嵌套,使对象可以快速访问多个群组。The link creation page is used to provide objects with the ability to integrate multiple groups into one large group and create entry links for this large group, so as to realize the aggregation and nesting of groups, allowing objects to quickly access multiple groups.
在该实施例具体实现时,当第二对象登录到应用程序平台,想要通过一个入口链接分享多个群组时,第二对象发送链接创建请求,并在应用程序平台触发复合群组链接生成流程。基于此,服务器会响应于第二对象的链接创建请求,在应用程序平台上显示链接创建页面,以使第二对象添加要整合在同一个入口链接中分享的多个群组的群组信息,其中,群组信息包括但不限于群组各自的群组链接(入口链接)、和群组名称等。In this specific implementation, when a second object logs into the application platform and wants to share multiple groups through a single entry link, the second object sends a link creation request, triggering a composite group link generation process on the application platform. Based on this, the server responds to the second object's link creation request by displaying a link creation page on the application platform, allowing the second object to add group information for the multiple groups to be shared within the same entry link. This group information includes, but is not limited to, the group links (entry links) for each group and the group names.
在一些实施例中,当第二对象想要通过一个入口链接分享多个群组时,应用程序需要提供一个链接创建页面,以便对象可以整合多个群组并创建一个大群组的入口链接。第二对象登录到应用程序平台,进入想要创建复合群组链接的界面。对象点击创建链接的按钮或选项,发送链接创建请求。应用程序接收到链接创建请求后,触发复合群组链接生成流程。旨在允许对象将多个群组整合成一个大群组,并创建一个统一的入口链接。服务器响应于链接创建请求,在应用程序平台上显示链接创建页面。链接创建页面提供了用户界面,允许对象添加和管理要整合的群组。对象在链接创建页面上添加要整合的多个群组的群组信息。群组信息包括但不限于群组各自的群组链接(入口链接)和群组名称。对象可以查看和管理已添加的群组列表。对象可以添加新的群组,删除或编辑现有的群组信息。一旦对象完成了群组的添加和管理,可以点击生成链接的按钮。应用程序将收集所有添加的群组信息,并生成一个复合群组链接。复合群组链接允许对象通过一个入口链接访问多个群组。当其他用户点击这个链接时,他们将能够访问所有整合的群组,实现群组之间的聚合和嵌套。对象可以将生成的复合群组链接分享给其他用户,通过电子邮件、社交媒体或其他方式。可以快速邀请他人加入多个群组,提升社交互动的效率。应用程序能够响应第二对象的链接创建请求,显示链接创建页面,并允许对象整合多个群组,创建一个统一的入口链接。In some embodiments, when a second object wants to share multiple groups through a single entry link, the application needs to provide a link creation page so that the object can consolidate multiple groups and create a single entry link for a large group. The second object logs into the application platform and accesses the interface where it wants to create a composite group link. The object clicks the "Create Link" button or option to send a link creation request. Upon receiving the link creation request, the application triggers the composite group link generation process. This is designed to allow objects to consolidate multiple groups into a single large group and create a unified entry link. The server responds to the link creation request by displaying the link creation page on the application platform. The link creation page provides a user interface that allows objects to add and manage the groups to be consolidated. The object adds group information for the multiple groups to be consolidated on the link creation page. Group information includes, but is not limited to, the group links (entry links) for each group and the group name. The object can view and manage the list of added groups. The object can add new groups and delete or edit existing group information. Once the object has completed adding and managing the groups, it can click the "Generate Link" button. The application collects all added group information and generates a composite group link. The composite group link allows the object to access multiple groups through a single entry link. When other users click this link, they will be able to access all the integrated groups, enabling aggregation and nesting between groups. The object can share the generated composite group link with other users via email, social media, or other means. It allows for quick invitations to join multiple groups, improving the efficiency of social interaction. The application can respond to the second object's link creation request, displaying the link creation page and allowing the object to integrate multiple groups into a unified entry link.
在步骤2020中,基于第二对象在链接创建页面中的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接。In step 2020, the subgroup links of each target subgroup are determined based on the input operations of the second object on the link creation page.
子群组链接用于连接到目标子群组的会话页面,使对象快速地导航进入或访问目标子群组的会话页面。Subgroup links are used to connect to the session page of the target subgroup, allowing objects to quickly navigate to or access the session page of the target subgroup.
在该实施例具体实现时,第二对象要创建的入口链接的目标群组是要分享的多个群组的父群组,要通过一个入口链接分享的多个群组则是目标群组的多个目标子群组。基于此,首先,第二对象会在链接创建页面中输入各个目标子群组的群组信息(例如、群组名称、目标子群组的入口链接等)。接着,服务器响应于第二对象在链接创建页面中的输入操作,对第二对象针对各个目标子群组输入的内容进行提取,得到各个目标子群组的子群组链接。In this specific implementation, the target group of the entry link to be created by the second object is the parent group of multiple groups to be shared, and the multiple groups to be shared through a single entry link are multiple target subgroups of the target group. Based on this, firstly, the second object enters the group information of each target subgroup (e.g., group name, entry link of the target subgroup, etc.) on the link creation page. Then, in response to the input operation of the second object on the link creation page, the server extracts the content entered by the second object for each target subgroup, obtaining the subgroup links of each target subgroup.
在一些实施例中,在创建一个能够分享多个群组的入口链接时,第二对象需要在链接创建页面中指定各个目标子群组的详细信息。第二对象登录到应用程序平台,进入链接创建页面。这个页面提供了输入和管理群组信息的界面。对象在链接创建页面中输入各个目标子群组的群组信息。这些信息通常包括群组名称和目标子群组的入口链接。对象可以手动输入这些信息,或者从应用程序中已有的群组列表中选择并添加。服务器响应于第二对象的输入操作,对输入的内容进行解析和提取。服务器识别并提取出每个目标子群组的入口链接,这些链接是连接到目标子群组会话页面的URL。为了确保子群组链接的有效性,服务器可能会对每个链接进行验证。验证过程可能包括检查链接是否指向有效的群组页面,以及对象是否有权限访问这些群组。一旦提取并验证了子群组链接,服务器将这些链接与目标群组关联起来,并存储在应用程序的数据库中。基于存储的子群组链接,服务器生成一个复合群组链接。这个链接包含了指向所有目标子群组的入口链接的信息。复合群组链接可以是一个独特的URL,当用户点击时,会显示所有目标子群组的列表,或者直接导航到这些群组的会话页面。第二对象可以将生成的复合群组链接分享给其他用户,通过各种渠道如电子邮件、社交媒体等。接收链接的用户可以点击它,快速访问所有整合的目标子群组,享受便捷的群组访问体验。In some embodiments, when creating an entry link that can be shared across multiple groups, the second object needs to specify details of each target subgroup on the link creation page. The second object logs into the application platform and accesses the link creation page. This page provides an interface for entering and managing group information. The object enters the group information for each target subgroup on the link creation page. This information typically includes the group name and the entry link for the target subgroup. The object can enter this information manually or select and add it from an existing list of groups in the application. The server responds to the second object's input by parsing and extracting the input. The server identifies and extracts the entry link for each target subgroup; these links are URLs that connect to the target subgroup's session page. To ensure the validity of the subgroup links, the server may validate each link. The validation process may include checking whether the link points to a valid group page and whether the object has permission to access these groups. Once the subgroup links are extracted and validated, the server associates these links with the target groups and stores them in the application's database. Based on the stored subgroup links, the server generates a composite group link. This link contains information about the entry links to all target subgroups. A composite group link can be a unique URL that, when clicked, displays a list of all target subgroups or directly navigates to the conversation pages for those groups. The second object can share the generated composite group link with other users through various channels such as email and social media. Users receiving the link can click it to quickly access all integrated target subgroups and enjoy a convenient group access experience.
为节省篇幅,本申请实施例的基于第二对象在链接创建页面中的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接的过程将在下文中进行详细描述。此处不做赘述。To save space, the process of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup based on the input operation of the second object on the link creation page in this application embodiment will be described in detail below. It will not be repeated here.
步骤2030-2040的具体实现过程与上述步骤1530-1540类似。区别在于,步骤1530的群组字符串是根据目标群组名称和终端标识生成,而步骤2030的群组字符串是根据多个子群组链接和终端标识生成。为节省篇幅,不再赘述。The specific implementation process of steps 2030-2040 is similar to that of steps 1530-1540 above. The difference is that the group string in step 1530 is generated based on the target group name and terminal identifier, while the group string in step 2030 is generated based on multiple subgroup links and terminal identifiers. For the sake of brevity, these details will not be elaborated further.
如图21A所示,当第二对象要为多个群组共同创建一个入口链接时,应用程序平台上会显示出创建复合群组链接流程的页面。在页面中,显示有用于选择子群组的信息录入类型的类型编辑区域、和用于录入子群组的具体信息的值编辑区域。另外,页面中还提供用于删除某一个子群组的群组信息的群组删除控件,和用于增加一个子群组的群组信息录入区域的群组增补控件。此时,第二对象在第一行的类型编辑区域中选择“子群组名称”作为某个子群组的录入信息类型,接着,在第一行的值编辑区域中输入“篮球兴趣小组”。同理,第二对象在第二行的类型编辑区域中选择“子群链接称”作为某个子群组的录入信息类型,接着,在第二行的值编辑区域中输入网球兴趣小组的入口链接“https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5”,以便为篮球兴趣小组和网球兴趣小组创建一个共同的入口链接。As shown in Figure 21A, when the second object wants to create a common entry link for multiple groups, the application platform displays a page for creating a composite group link. The page displays a type editing area for selecting the information entry type for subgroups and a value editing area for entering specific information about the subgroups. Additionally, the page provides a group deletion control for deleting group information from a specific subgroup and a group addition control for adding a subgroup to the group information entry area. At this point, the second object selects "Subgroup Name" as the information entry type for a subgroup in the type editing area of the first row, and then enters "Basketball Interest Group" in the value editing area of the first row. Similarly, the second object selects "Subgroup Link Name" as the information entry type for a subgroup in the type editing area of the second row, and then enters the entry link for the tennis interest group, "https://example.com/group?token=7qe31a5", in the value editing area of the second row to create a common entry link for both the basketball and tennis interest groups.
如图21B所示,当第二对象在第一行的类型编辑区域中选择“子群组名称”作为目标子群组的录入信息类型时,当第二对象点击第一行的值编辑区域,会以弹窗形式展示出应用程序平台中所有群组构成的群组列表。其中,群组列表包括篮球兴趣小组、羽毛球兴趣小组,此时,第二对象在群组列表中选择篮球兴趣小组,则第一行的值编辑区域中会显示“篮球兴趣小组”,使第二对象可以快速地选择要添加的群组,并根据第二对象的选择操作,自动填充“子群组名称”对应的值编辑区域。As shown in Figure 21B, when the second object selects "Subgroup Name" as the data type for the target subgroup in the type editing area of the first row, a pop-up window will display a list of all groups in the application platform when the second object clicks the value editing area of the first row. This list includes groups such as the Basketball Interest Group and the Badminton Interest Group. If the second object selects the Basketball Interest Group from the list, "Basketball Interest Group" will be displayed in the value editing area of the first row, allowing the second object to quickly select the group to add. Based on the second object's selection, the value editing area corresponding to the "Subgroup Name" will be automatically filled.
该实施例的好处是,提供了将多个群组的群组链接打包成一个新的入口链接的方式,实现了多个目标子群组的群组链接的复合,能根据各个目标子群组的群组名称或者群组链接,共同生成一个入口链接,使对象通过点击嵌套链接(入口链接)快速地访问多个群组;使对象可以在分享一个入口链接的情况下,为其他对象分享多个群组,能为对象快速地访问多个群组带来便利,也可以提高群组信息传递效率。The advantage of this embodiment is that it provides a way to package group links of multiple groups into a new entry link, realizing the combination of group links of multiple target subgroups. It can generate a single entry link based on the group name or group link of each target subgroup, allowing objects to quickly access multiple groups by clicking the nested link (entry link). It also allows objects to share multiple groups with other objects while sharing a single entry link, which brings convenience to objects to quickly access multiple groups and improves the efficiency of group information transmission.
由于第二对象在链接创建页面中可以输入目标子群组的子群组名称或者子群组链接,当第二对象所输入的群组信息不同,服务器的处理方式也会存在一定的差异。Since the second object can enter the subgroup name or subgroup link of the target subgroup on the link creation page, the server's processing method will vary depending on the group information entered by the second object.
在一些实施例中,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接包括:In some embodiments, determining the subgroup links for each target subgroup includes:
如果确定第二对象在链接创建页面中输入的是目标子群组的子群组名称,则基于子群组名称,生成子群组字符串,并将子群组字符串编码成子群组链接。If it is determined that the second object entered the subgroup name of the target subgroup in the link creation page, then a subgroup string is generated based on the subgroup name, and the subgroup string is encoded into a subgroup link.
在该实施例具体实现时,如果确定第二对象在链接创建页面中输入的是目标子群组的子群组名称,则需要根据子群组名称生成目标子群组的子群组链接,其具体实现过程与上述步骤1530-1540生成入口链接的方式类似。为节省篇幅,不再赘述。In the specific implementation of this embodiment, if it is determined that the second object entered the name of a subgroup of the target subgroup on the link creation page, then a subgroup link of the target subgroup needs to be generated based on the subgroup name. The specific implementation process is similar to the method of generating the entry link in steps 1530-1540 above. To save space, it will not be described in detail.
如果确定第二对象在链接创建页面中输入的是目标子群组的子群组链接,则对子群组链接进行第二验证,并将第二验证通过的子群组链接用于生成群组字符串。If it is determined that the second object entered a subgroup link of the target subgroup in the link creation page, then the subgroup link is subject to a second verification, and the subgroup link that passes the second verification is used to generate the group string.
在该实施例具体实现时,如果确定第二对象在链接创建页面中输入的是目标子群组的子群组链接,则需要对输入的子群组链接进行格式验证和正确性验证,以确定输入的子群组链接是正确无误的。接着,将第二验证通过的子群组链接、其他目标子群组的子群组链接构成群组链接列表,并利用群组链接列表的多个子群组链接生成群组字符串。In the specific implementation of this embodiment, if it is determined that the second object entered a subgroup link of the target subgroup on the link creation page, the entered subgroup link needs to be formatted and validated for correctness to ensure that the entered subgroup link is correct. Then, the validated subgroup link and other target subgroup links are combined to form a group link list, and a group string is generated using the multiple subgroup links in the group link list.
该实施例的好处是,考虑到了输入的目标子群组的群组信息的不同,分别设置了相应的处理环节,针对输入的子群组名称,将其转化成子群组链接;针对输入的子群组链接,对其进行验证操作,从而生成需要复合的各个目标子群组的子群组链接,以将多个子群组链接复合成一个入口链接,提高群组管理效率。The advantage of this embodiment is that it takes into account the different group information of the input target subgroups and sets up corresponding processing steps. For the input subgroup name, it converts it into a subgroup link; for the input subgroup link, it performs a verification operation, thereby generating the subgroup links of each target subgroup that need to be combined, so as to combine multiple subgroup links into a single entry link and improve the efficiency of group management.
请参照图22,在一些实施例中,对子群组链接进行第二验证的过程具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤2210-2250:Referring to Figure 22, in some embodiments, the process of performing a second verification on subgroup links specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2210-2250:
步骤2210、对子群组链接进行格式验证;Step 2210: Validate the format of subgroup links;
步骤2220、如果确定格式验证通过,则获取预定关系对照表;Step 2220: If the format verification is successful, obtain the predefined relationship lookup table;
步骤2230、从子群组链接中解析出目标子群组的子群组字符串;Step 2230: Parse the subgroup string of the target subgroup from the subgroup link;
步骤2240、将子群组字符串、与各个候选字符串进行比较;Step 2240: Compare the subgroup string with each candidate string;
步骤2250、如果确定子群组字符串、与一个候选字符串相同,则确定第二验证通过。Step 2250: If the subgroup string is determined to be the same as a candidate string, then the second verification is deemed successful.
下面对步骤2210-2250进行详细描述。Steps 2210-2250 are described in detail below.
其中,预定关系对照表用于指示各个候选群组与候选字符串的对应关系,在上述图17中已经示意性描述,不再赘述。The predefined relationship lookup table is used to indicate the correspondence between each candidate group and the candidate string, which has been schematically described in Figure 17 above and will not be repeated here.
在步骤2210中,首先,调用应用程序平台中各个群组的入口链接所要具备的链接格式。接着,根据各个群组的入口链接所要具备的链接格式,对子群组链接进行格式验证,以确定子群组链接的格式是否与链接格式一致。In step 2210, firstly, the required link format for the entry links of each group in the application platform is invoked. Next, based on the required link format for the entry links of each group, the subgroup links are format-validated to determine whether their format matches the standard link format.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序平台中,各个群组的入口链接通常需要遵循一定的格式规范,以确保链接的统一性和可识别性。应用程序平台首先需要定义入口链接的格式。这个格式可能包括协议(如HTTP或HTTPS)、域名、路径以及查询参数等。例如,一个典型的入口链接格式可能是:`https://example.com/group?id=GROUP_ID`,其中`GROUP_ID`是群组的唯一标识符。应用程序将定义好的链接格式存储在服务器的配置文件或数据库中,以便在需要时进行调用和验证。当需要生成或验证入口链接时,应用程序从配置文件或数据库中调用预先定义的链接格式。通过编程语言中的变量或常量来实现,确保链接格式的一致性和可维护性。对子群组链接进行格式验证是确保链接有效性和安全性的关键步骤。应用程序使用正则表达式或其他字符串处理方法,检查子群组链接是否符合定义的链接格式。例如,可以使用正则表达式来匹配链接的协议、域名、路径和查询参数。应用程序遍历每个子群组链接,逐一进行格式验证。如果子群组链接的格式与定义的链接格式一致,验证通过。如果子群组链接的格式不一致,验证失败,应用程序需要通知用户或采取其他措施。对于验证通过的子群组链接,应用程序可以继续使用它们来生成复合群组。-对于验证失败的子群组链接,应用程序可能需要提示用户重新输入或修正链接格式。为了提高效率,应用程序可以自动化格式验证过程,实时反馈给用户链接是否符合要求。这可以通过前端JavaScript验证或后端服务器验证来实现。In some embodiments, within an application platform, entry links for various groups typically need to adhere to certain format specifications to ensure link consistency and identifiability. The application platform first needs to define the format of the entry links. This format may include the protocol (such as HTTP or HTTPS), domain name, path, and query parameters. For example, a typical entry link format might be: `https://example.com/group?id=GROUP_ID`, where `GROUP_ID` is the unique identifier of the group. The application stores the defined link format in a configuration file or database on the server for retrieval and verification when needed. When an entry link needs to be generated or verified, the application retrieves the predefined link format from the configuration file or database. This is achieved using variables or constants in the programming language to ensure the consistency and maintainability of the link format. Format validation of subgroup links is a crucial step in ensuring link validity and security. The application uses regular expressions or other string manipulation methods to check whether subgroup links conform to the defined link format. For example, regular expressions can be used to match the link's protocol, domain name, path, and query parameters. The application iterates through each subgroup link, performing format validation one by one. If the subgroup link format matches the defined link format, validation passes. If the subgroup link format does not match, validation fails, and the application needs to notify the user or take other measures. For subgroup links that pass validation, the application can continue to use them to generate compound groups. For subgroup links that fail validation, the application may need to prompt the user to re-enter or correct the link format. To improve efficiency, the application can automate the format validation process, providing real-time feedback to the user on whether the links meet the requirements. This can be achieved through front-end JavaScript validation or back-end server validation.
在步骤2220中,如果子群组链接的格式与链接格式一致,确定格式验证通过,表明输入的子群组链接符合预定的群组链接格式,需要对子群组链接进行正确性和存在性验证。基于此,按照上述步骤1610的方式获取预定关系对照表。如果子群组链接的格式与链接格式不一致,确定格式验证不通过,并确定第二验证不通过,提醒第二对象重新输入正确的子群组链接。In step 2220, if the format of the subgroup link matches the link format, the format verification is deemed successful, indicating that the input subgroup link conforms to the predetermined group link format, and the correctness and existence of the subgroup link need to be verified. Based on this, the predetermined relationship lookup table is obtained in the manner described in step 1610 above. If the format of the subgroup link does not match the link format, the format verification is deemed unsuccessful, and the second verification is deemed unsuccessful, prompting the second object to re-enter the correct subgroup link.
在一些实施例中,如果子群组链接的格式与定义的链接格式一致,应用程序确定格式验证通过。输入的子群组链接在结构上是正确的,符合应用程序预期的格式。虽然格式验证通过,但应用程序还需要验证子群组链接的正确性和存在性。这是为了确保链接不仅在结构上正确,而且实际上指向一个有效的群组。应用程序按照之前定义的步骤,获取服务器维护的预定关系对照表。这个对照表包含了所有已存在的群组及其对应的群组字符串。应用程序将子群组链接中的群组标识符预定关系对照表中的记录进行比较。如果群组标识符在对照表中存在,并且对应的信息一致,那么验证通过。如果群组标识符不存在或信息不一致,验证失败。如果正确性和存在性验证通过,应用程序可以继续使用该子群组链接来生成复合群组。如果验证失败,应用程序需要通知第二对象,并要求重新输入正确的子群组链接。如果子群组链接的格式与定义的链接格式不一致,应用程序确定格式验证不通过。输入的链接在结构上是错误的,不符合应用程序的预期格式。对于格式验证不通过的子群组链接,应用程序需要提醒第二对象重新输入正确的链接。通过显示错误消息、高亮显示输入框或提供格式指南来实现。为了提升用户体验,应用程序可以提供实时的格式验证反馈,帮助第二对象及时纠正输入错误。通过前端JavaScript验证来实现,实时检查输入的链接格式是否正确。In some embodiments, if the format of the subgroup link matches the defined link format, the application determines that the format validation has passed. The input subgroup link is structurally correct and conforms to the application's expected format. Although the format validation has passed, the application still needs to verify the correctness and existence of the subgroup link. This is to ensure that the link is not only structurally correct but also actually points to a valid group. The application retrieves a predefined lookup table maintained by the server, following the previously defined steps. This lookup table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings. The application compares the group identifier in the subgroup link with the record in the predefined lookup table. If the group identifier exists in the lookup table and the corresponding information matches, then the validation passes. If the group identifier does not exist or the information is inconsistent, the validation fails. If the correctness and existence validations pass, the application can continue to use the subgroup link to generate composite groups. If the validation fails, the application needs to notify the second object and request that the correct subgroup link be re-entered. If the format of the subgroup link does not match the defined link format, the application determines that the format validation has failed. The input link is structurally incorrect and does not conform to the application's expected format. For subgroup links that fail format validation, the application needs to remind the second object to re-enter the correct link. This can be achieved by displaying error messages, highlighting input fields, or providing formatting guidelines. To improve user experience, the application can provide real-time formatting validation feedback to help secondary users correct input errors promptly. This can be achieved through front-end JavaScript validation, checking the format of entered links in real time.
在步骤2230中,由于子群组链接是由一个固定字符串和群组字符串构成的。基于此,按照链接格式,对子群组链接进行拆分,从而解析出目标子群组的子群组字符串。In step 2230, since the subgroup link consists of a fixed string and a group string, the subgroup link is split according to the link format to parse out the subgroup string of the target subgroup.
在一些实施例中,应用程序需要明确子群组链接的格式。链接格式可以是`https://example.com/group?id=GROUP_STRING`,其中`GROUP_STRING`是群组字符串。固定字符串部分包括协议(如`https://`)、域名(如`example.com`)和路径(如`/group`)。应用程序使用字符串处理方法将子群组链接拆分为固定字符串和群组字符串两部分。一旦拆分了链接,应用程序就可以提取出群组字符串部分。例如,如果链接是`://example.com/group?id=abc123`,那么群组字符串就是`abc123`。如果群组字符串包含URL编码的字符,应用程序需要对其进行解码,以获取原始的群组字符串。例如,如果群组字符串是`abc%20123`,应用程序需要将其解码为`abc 123`。在提取出群组字符串后,应用程序可能需要对其进行验证,确保其符合预期的格式和长度。一旦验证通过,应用程序可以将群组字符串存储在内存中,或者直接使用它来访问目标子群组的会话页面。如果在拆分或提取群组字符串的过程中出现错误,应用程序需要捕获这些错误,并提供适当的反馈给用户。例如,如果链接格式不正确,应用程序可以显示一个错误消息,提示用户重新输入正确的链接。In some embodiments, the application needs to explicitly specify the format of the subgroup link. The link format can be `https://example.com/group?id=GROUP_STRING`, where `GROUP_STRING` is the group string. The fixed string portion includes the protocol (e.g., `https://`), the domain name (e.g., `example.com`), and the path (e.g., `/group`). The application uses string manipulation methods to split the subgroup link into the fixed string and the group string. Once the link is split, the application can extract the group string portion. For example, if the link is `://example.com/group?id=abc123`, then the group string is `abc123`. If the group string contains URL-encoded characters, the application needs to decode them to obtain the original group string. For example, if the group string is `abc%20123`, the application needs to decode it to `abc 123`. After extracting the group string, the application may need to validate it to ensure it conforms to the expected format and length. Once validation is successful, the application can store the group string in memory or use it directly to access the target subgroup's session page. If errors occur during the splitting or extraction of group strings, the application needs to capture these errors and provide appropriate feedback to the user. For example, if a link is incorrectly formatted, the application can display an error message prompting the user to re-enter the correct link.
在步骤2240中,针对每个候选字符串,将候选字符串与子群组字符串进行比较,以确定输入的子群组链接中的子群组字符串是否为某个群组的群组字符串。In step 2240, for each candidate string, the candidate string is compared with the subgroup string to determine whether the subgroup string in the input subgroup link is a group string of a certain group.
在一些实施例中,应用程序需要获取服务器维护的预定关系对照表。这个对照表包含了所有已存在的群组及其对应的群组字符串。应用程序从输入的子群组链接中提取出子群组字符串。这通常通过解析链接的特定部分来实现。对于每个候选字符串,应用程序将其与子群组字符串进行比较。这可以通过简单的字符串比较操作来实现。如果子群组字符串与某个候选字符串完全相同,那么可以确定输入的子群组链接中的子群组字符串对应于该候选字符串所属的群组。一旦找到匹配的候选字符串,应用程序可以记录下匹配结果,包括群组的标识符、名称等信息。根据匹配结果,应用程序可以执行相应的操作,例如允许用户访问该群组的会话页面,或者将该群组添加到复合群组链接中。如果子群字符串与所有候选字符串都不匹配,那么可以确定输入的子群组链接中的子群组字符串不对应于任何已存在的群组。应用程序需要通知用户,可能是输入的链接不正确,或者群组不存在。应用程序可以使用数据结构(如哈希表)来存储预定关系对照表中的候选字符串,使得比较过程可以在常数时间内完成。In some embodiments, the application needs to access a predefined lookup table maintained by the server. This lookup table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings. The application extracts the subgroup string from the input subgroup link. This is typically done by parsing specific parts of the link. For each candidate string, the application compares it with the subgroup string. This can be done with a simple string comparison operation. If the subgroup string is exactly the same as a candidate string, then it can be determined that the subgroup string in the input subgroup link corresponds to the group to which the candidate string belongs. Once a matching candidate string is found, the application can record the matching result, including the group's identifier, name, and other information. Based on the matching result, the application can perform appropriate actions, such as allowing the user to access the group's session page or adding the group to a compound group link. If the subgroup string does not match any of the candidate strings, then it can be determined that the subgroup string in the input subgroup link does not correspond to any existing group. The application needs to notify the user that the input link may be incorrect or the group may not exist. The application can use a data structure (such as a hash table) to store the candidate strings in the predefined lookup table, allowing the comparison process to be completed in constant time.
在步骤2250中,如果确定子群组字符串、与一个候选字符串相同,表明输入的子群组字符串是真实存在的、且能指向一个群组,则确定第二验证通过。如果确定子群组字符串、与任意一个候选字符串都不相同,表明输入的子群组字符串不存在、不能指向一个群组,则确定第二验证不通过。In step 2250, if the subgroup string is determined to be the same as a candidate string, it indicates that the input subgroup string actually exists and can point to a group, then the second verification is determined to be successful. If the subgroup string is determined to be different from any candidate string, it indicates that the input subgroup string does not exist and cannot point to a group, then the second verification is determined to be unsuccessful.
在一些实施例中,应用程序将输入的子群组字符串与预定关系对照表中的每个候选字符串进行比较。这个对照表包含了所有已存在的群组及其对应的群组字符串。如果子群组字符串与某个候选字符串完全相同,那么可以确定输入的子群组字符串是真实存在的,并且能够指向对应的群组。当子群组字符串与一个候选字符串匹配时,应用程序确定第二验证通过。输入的子群组链接是有效的,可以用于访问或整合对应的群组。应用程序可以记录匹配的群组信息,例如群组的标识符、名称等。可以用于操作,如生成复合群组链接或允许用户访问群组。如果子群组字符串与所有候选字符串都不相同,那么可以确定输入的子群组字符串不存在,不能指向任何一个群组。当子群组字符串与所有候选字符串都不匹配时,应用程序确定第二验证不通过。这意味着输入的子群组链接无效,无法用于访问或整合群组。对于第二验证不通过的情况,应用程序需要通知用户,可能是输入的链接不正确,或者群组不存在。通过显示错误消息、提示用户重新输入链接等方式来实现。In some embodiments, the application compares the input subgroup string with each candidate string in a predetermined lookup table. This lookup table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings. If the subgroup string is exactly the same as a candidate string, it can be determined that the input subgroup string exists and can point to the corresponding group. When the subgroup string matches a candidate string, the application determines that the second verification has passed. The input subgroup link is valid and can be used to access or merge the corresponding group. The application can record information about the matched groups, such as the group identifier, name, etc. This information can be used for operations such as generating compound group links or allowing users to access groups. If the subgroup string is different from all candidate strings, it can be determined that the input subgroup string does not exist and cannot point to any group. When the subgroup string does not match any candidate string, the application determines that the second verification has failed. This means that the input subgroup link is invalid and cannot be used to access or merge groups. In the case of a failed second verification, the application needs to notify the user that the input link may be incorrect or the group may not exist. This can be achieved by displaying an error message, prompting the user to re-enter the link, etc.
该实施例的好处是,针对输入的子群组链接,对其进行格式验证,并在确定输入的子群组链接符合预定的群组链接格式时,根据预定关系对照表中存储的各个候选群组的候选字符串对子群组链接进行正确性和存在性验证,以确定输入的子群组链接是真实存在的、且能准确无误的指向应用程序中的某个群组的,提高链接创建的准确性。The advantage of this embodiment is that it performs format verification on the input subgroup links, and when it is determined that the input subgroup links conform to the predetermined group link format, it performs correctness and existence verification on the subgroup links according to the candidate strings of each candidate group stored in the predetermined relationship lookup table, so as to determine that the input subgroup links are real and can accurately point to a certain group in the application, thereby improving the accuracy of link creation.
本申请实施例中,链接创建页面具有多个群组信息添加窗口、和一个群组增补控件。In this embodiment, the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group supplement control.
群组信息添加窗口用于提供给对象添加目标子群组的子群组名称或者子群组链接。The group information addition window is used to provide the object with the name of the subgroup or the link of the subgroup to which the target subgroup is added.
群组增补控件用于增加一个子群组的群组信息录入区域,使要复合成的目标群组中的目标子群组的数目增加。The group addition control is used to add a group information entry area for a subgroup, thereby increasing the number of target subgroups in the target group to be merged.
请参照图23,在一些实施例中,步骤2020具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤2310-2320:Please refer to Figure 23. In some embodiments, step 2020 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2310-2320:
步骤2310、基于第二对象对群组增补控件的触发,在链接创建页面中显示增补窗口;Step 2310: Based on the triggering of the group supplement control by the second object, display the supplement window on the link creation page;
步骤2320、基于第二对象在多个群组信息添加窗口、和增补窗口的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接。Step 2320: Based on the input operations of the second object in the multiple group information addition window and supplement window, determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup.
下面对步骤2310-2320进行详细描述。Steps 2310-2320 are described in detail below.
在步骤2310中,当第二对象在链接创建页面所显示的子群组信息编辑区域填充完各个目标子群组的子群组信息之后,仍未将所要包括的目标子群组的子群组信息填写完毕时,第二对象会在链接创建页面上触发群组增补控件。基于此,服务器会检测到针对群组增补控件的触发事件,在链接创建页面上继续显示更多的增补窗口,以使第二对象继续输入所要包括的目标子群组的子群组信息。In step 2310, if the second object has filled in the subgroup information of each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area displayed on the link creation page, but has not yet filled in the subgroup information of all target subgroups to be included, the second object will trigger the group supplement control on the link creation page. Based on this, the server will detect the trigger event of the group supplement control and continue to display more supplement windows on the link creation page so that the second object can continue to enter the subgroup information of the target subgroups to be included.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序平台中,当第二对象在链接创建页面上编辑子群组信息时,可能会需要添加多个目标子群组。如果第二对象尚未完成所有目标子群组的输入,可以通过触发群组增补控件来继续添加更多的子群组信息。第二对象在链接创建页面的子群组信息编辑区域中输入各个目标子群组的信息,这些信息通常包括群组名称和入口链接。当第二对象觉得需要添加更多目标子群组时,会在链接创建页面上触发群组增补控件。这通常是一个按钮或链接,标有“添加更多”、“增补群组”等字样。服务器通过前端JavaScript或其他技术检测到群组增补控件的触发事件。第二对象可以继续在新的增补窗口中输入所要包括的目标子群组的子群组信息。这个过程可以重复多次,直到第二对象完成所有目标子群组的输入。对于每个新增的子群组信息,应用程序会进行格式验证和存在性验证,确保输入的信息是有效和正确的。一旦验证通过,服务器会将这些信息存储在数据库中,与复合群组链接关联起来。当所有目标子群组的信息都输入完毕并验证通过后,服务器会生成一个包含所有目标子群组入口链接的复合群组链接。应用程序能够允许第二对象在链接创建页面上动态添加多个目标子群组的信息,提升了用户界面的灵活性和用户体验。In some embodiments, within an application platform, when a second object edits subgroup information on a link creation page, it may need to add multiple target subgroups. If the second object has not yet completed the input of all target subgroups, it can continue adding more subgroup information by triggering a group add-on control. The second object enters the information for each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area of the link creation page. This information typically includes the group name and entry link. When the second object deems it necessary to add more target subgroups, it triggers a group add-on control on the link creation page. This is usually a button or link labeled "Add More," "Add Group," etc. The server detects the triggering event of the group add-on control via front-end JavaScript or other technologies. The second object can continue to enter the subgroup information of the target subgroups to be included in a new add-on window. This process can be repeated multiple times until the second object has completed the input of all target subgroups. For each newly added subgroup information, the application performs format validation and existence validation to ensure that the entered information is valid and correct. Once the validation passes, the server stores this information in the database and associates it with the composite group link. Once all target subgroup information has been entered and verified, the server generates a composite group link containing entry links for all target subgroups. The application allows second objects to dynamically add information for multiple target subgroups on the link creation page, enhancing user interface flexibility and user experience.
步骤2320的具体实现过程与上述确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接的两种情形类似,为节省篇幅,不再赘述。The specific implementation process of step 2320 is similar to the two cases of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup mentioned above, and will not be repeated here for the sake of saving space.
如图25A所示,当第二对象在链接创建页面所显示的两行编辑区域中输入了篮球兴趣小组和网球兴趣小组的子群组信息之后,还需要录入更多的子群组的群组信息时,第二对象会点击链接创建页面的群组增补控件(图中的加号按钮),此时,链接创建页面会展示一个新的编辑行(增补窗口)。基于此,第二对象在新增的一个编辑行的类型编辑区域选择“子群组名称”,并在值编辑区域输入“羽毛球兴趣小组”,以便使生成的入口链接能同时为其他对象导航到篮球兴趣小组、网球兴趣小组和羽毛球兴趣小组。As shown in Figure 25A, after the second object enters the subgroup information for the basketball and tennis interest groups in the two editing areas displayed on the link creation page, and needs to enter more subgroup information, the second object will click the group supplement control (the plus button in the figure) on the link creation page. At this time, the link creation page will display a new editing line (supplement window). Based on this, the second object selects "Subgroup Name" in the type editing area of the newly added editing line and enters "Badminton Interest Group" in the value editing area, so that the generated entry link can simultaneously navigate other objects to the basketball, tennis, and badminton interest groups.
该实施例的好处是,提供了增加目标群组的目标子群组的群组信息的输入渠道,能灵活地、自由地确定一个目标群组所要包含的目标子群组的数目,提高了群组管理的灵活性和多样性。The advantage of this embodiment is that it provides an input channel for adding target subgroups to a target group, and can flexibly and freely determine the number of target subgroups to be included in a target group, thereby improving the flexibility and diversity of group management.
本申请实施例中,链接创建页面具有多个群组信息添加窗口、和一个群组删除控件。In this embodiment, the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group deletion control.
群组删除控件用于删除某一个子群组的群组信息,以使要复合成的目标群组的目标子群组的数目减少。The group deletion control is used to delete the group information of a subgroup, thereby reducing the number of target subgroups to be merged into the target group.
请参照图24,在一些实施例中,步骤2020具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤2410-2420:Please refer to Figure 24. In some embodiments, step 2020 specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2410-2420:
步骤2410、基于第二对象对群组删除控件的触发,对多个群组信息添加窗口中的一个进行删除;Step 2410: Based on the triggering of the group deletion control by the second object, delete one of the multiple group information addition windows;
步骤2420、基于第二对象在保留下来的多个群组信息添加窗口的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接。Step 2420: Based on the input operation of the second object in the window of the retained multiple group information, determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup.
下面对步骤2310-2320进行详细描述。Steps 2310-2320 are described in detail below.
在步骤2410中,当第二对象在链接创建页面所显示的子群组信息编辑区域填充完各个目标子群组的子群组信息之后,发现有一些子群组并不适合放置在目标群组中,第二对象会在链接创建页面上触发要删除的目标子群组对应的群组删除控件。基于此,服务器会检测到针对目标子群组的群组删除控件的触发事件,在链接创建页面上清除目标子群组所对应的一个编辑行,以及编辑行中的子群组信息。In step 2410, after the second object fills in the subgroup information of each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area displayed on the link creation page, it finds that some subgroups are not suitable for placement in the target group. The second object will trigger the group deletion control corresponding to the target subgroup to be deleted on the link creation page. Based on this, the server will detect the triggering event of the group deletion control for the target subgroup and clear an editing row corresponding to the target subgroup and the subgroup information in the editing row on the link creation page.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序平台中,第二对象在创建复合群组链接时,可能会发现自己添加的一些子群组并不适合包含在目标群组中。这时,第二对象可以通过触发群组删除控件来移除这些不合适的子群组。第二对象在链接创建页面的子群组信息编辑区域中输入或选择各个目标子群组的信息,这些信息通常包括群组名称和入口链接。在完成所有子群组信息的输入后,第二对象可能会审查这些子群组,发现有些子群组并不适合包含在目标群组中。对于每个不合适的子群组,第二对象会在链接创建页面上触发对应的群组删除控件。这通常是一个按钮、链接或图标,标有“删除”、“移除”等字样,位于每个子群组信息编辑行的旁边。服务器通过前端JavaScript或其他技术检测到群组删除控件的触发事件,涉及到发送AJAX请求到服务器,通知服务器需要删除特定的子群组信息。一旦服务器检测到触发事件,它会响应请求,在链接创建页面上清除目标子群组对应的一个编辑行,以及编辑行中的所有子群组信息。删除子群组信息后,服务器会更新复合群组链接,移除被删除子群组的入口链接。确保了最终生成的复合群组链接只包含第二对象认为合适的目标子群组。如果第二对象对子群组的选择满意,可以保存更改。服务器会将更新后的子群组信息存储在数据库中,与复合群组链接关联起来。服务器会生成一个包含所有选定目标子群组入口链接的复合群组链接。-这个链接可以被第二对象分享给其他用户,以便他们访问所有整合的目标子群组。应用程序能够允许第二对象在链接创建过程中动态移除不合适的子群组,提升了用户界面的灵活性和用户体验。这种设计使得用户可以轻松地调整和优化复合群组链接,确保它只包含相关和合适的目标子群组。In some embodiments, within an application platform, when creating a composite group link, a second object may find that some of its added subgroups are not suitable to be included in the target group. In this case, the second object can remove these unsuitable subgroups by triggering a group deletion control. The second object enters or selects information for each target subgroup in the subgroup information editing area of the link creation page. This information typically includes the group name and entry link. After completing the input of all subgroup information, the second object may review these subgroups and find that some are not suitable to be included in the target group. For each unsuitable subgroup, the second object triggers the corresponding group deletion control on the link creation page. This is typically a button, link, or icon labeled "Delete" or "Remove," located next to each subgroup information editing line. The server detects the triggering event of the group deletion control via front-end JavaScript or other technologies, involving sending an AJAX request to the server to notify it that specific subgroup information needs to be deleted. Once the server detects the triggering event, it responds to the request, clearing an editing line corresponding to the target subgroup on the link creation page, along with all subgroup information in that line. After deleting the subgroup information, the server updates the composite group link, removing the entry link of the deleted subgroup. This ensures that the final generated composite group link only includes target subgroups deemed appropriate by the second object. If the second object is satisfied with the subgroup selection, it can save the changes. The server stores the updated subgroup information in the database and associates it with the composite group link. The server generates a composite group link containing entry links to all selected target subgroups. This link can be shared by the second object with other users, allowing them to access all integrated target subgroups. The application allows the second object to dynamically remove inappropriate subgroups during link creation, improving the flexibility of the user interface and user experience. This design allows users to easily adjust and optimize the composite group link, ensuring it only contains relevant and appropriate target subgroups.
步骤2420的具体实现过程与上述确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接的两种情形类似,为节省篇幅,不再赘述。The specific implementation process of step 2420 is similar to the two cases of determining the subgroup links of each target subgroup mentioned above, and will not be repeated here for the sake of saving space.
如图25B所示,当第二对象在链接创建页面所显示的多个编辑区域中输入了篮球兴趣小组、网球兴趣小组、和羽毛球兴趣小组的子群组信息之后,第二对象希望使生成的入口链接能同时为其他对象导航到网球兴趣小组和羽毛球兴趣小组,但不导航到篮球兴趣小组。此时,第二对象会点击“篮球兴趣小组”的子群组信息的编辑行之后的群组删除控件(图中的减号按钮),在链接创建页面删除篮球兴趣小组的群组信息,只保留网球兴趣小组的群组链接和羽毛球兴趣小组的群组名称。As shown in Figure 25B, after the second object enters subgroup information for the basketball interest group, tennis interest group, and badminton interest group in the multiple editing areas displayed on the link creation page, the second object wants the generated entry link to simultaneously navigate to the tennis interest group and the badminton interest group for other objects, but not to the basketball interest group. At this point, the second object will click the group deletion control (the minus button in the figure) after the editing row of the "basketball interest group" subgroup information, deleting the basketball interest group's group information on the link creation page, retaining only the tennis interest group's group link and the badminton interest group's group name.
该实施例的好处是,提供了删减目标群组的目标子群组的群组信息的输入渠道,能灵活地、自由地调整一个目标群组所要包含的目标子群组,提高了群组管理的灵活性。The advantage of this embodiment is that it provides an input channel for the group information of the target subgroups of the target group to be deleted, and can flexibly and freely adjust the target subgroups to be included in a target group, thereby improving the flexibility of group management.
如图26所示,图26是根据本申请的另一个实施例的创建入口链接的整体流程图,在步骤401中,第二对象输入多个群组名称或者群组链接,以及链接标题用于生成分享链接;在步骤402中,将群组名称转换成群组链接;在步骤403中,将多个群组链接构成的列表、第二对象的终端标识、链接标题等信息上传;在步骤404中,生成一个唯一的群组字符串,并将群组字符串作为关键字key,将群组列表等信息存储;在步骤405中,将群组字符串拼接成一个入口链接,展示入口链接。应用程序服务器在创建由多个子群组构成的目标群组的入口链接时所执行的流程。具体地,首先,第二对象会在创建链接页面中输入多个群组名称或者群组链接,以及目标群组的链接标题用于生成分享链接,其具体实现过程与上述步骤2010-2020类似。接着,应用程序的前端服务器会将第二对象输入的群组名称转换成群组的群组链接,并将多个群组链接构成的列表、第二对象的终端标识、终端标题等上传到,应用程序的后端服务器,由后端服务器生成一个唯一的群组字符串,并将群组字符串作为关键字key,将群组列表等信息存储。最后,将群组字符串拼接成一个入口链接,展示入口链接,其具体实现过程与上述步骤2030-2040类似。为节省篇幅,不再赘述。As shown in Figure 26, which is an overall flowchart of creating an entry link according to another embodiment of this application, in step 401, the second object inputs multiple group names or group links, and a link title to generate a shareable link; in step 402, the group names are converted into group links; in step 403, the list of multiple group links, the terminal identifier of the second object, the link title, and other information are uploaded; in step 404, a unique group string is generated, and the group string is used as a key to store the group list and other information; in step 405, the group strings are concatenated into an entry link and displayed. This describes the process executed by the application server when creating an entry link for a target group consisting of multiple subgroups. Specifically, firstly, the second object inputs multiple group names or group links, and the link title of the target group on the link creation page to generate a shareable link, the specific implementation process of which is similar to steps 2010-2020 above. Next, the application's front-end server converts the group name input by the second object into a group link, and uploads a list of multiple group links, the second object's terminal identifier, terminal title, etc., to the application's back-end server. The back-end server generates a unique group string and stores the group list and other information using this group string as the key. Finally, the group strings are concatenated into an entry link, which is then displayed. The specific implementation process is similar to steps 2030-2040 above. To save space, it will not be elaborated further.
本申请实施例的将入口链接显示成带链接标记的目标群组名称的详细描述Detailed description of how the entry link is displayed as the target group name with a link tag in this application embodiment.
由于本申请实施例的入口链接可以存在于会话窗口、群公告、文档等多种场景下,当入口链接和其他文本数据放置在一起时,为了清楚地根据入口链接指示目标群组,往往需要对密集文本数据中的入口链接进行识别和展示。基于此,本申请实施例提供了一种基于正则表达式对入口链接进行识别和展示的方案,能提高入口链接的定位效率,并提高群组信息的传递效率。Since the entry links in this application embodiment can exist in various scenarios such as session windows, group announcements, and documents, when entry links are placed together with other text data, it is often necessary to identify and display the entry links in dense text data in order to clearly indicate the target group based on the entry links. Based on this, this application embodiment provides a scheme for identifying and displaying entry links based on regular expressions, which can improve the efficiency of entry link location and the efficiency of group information transmission.
请参照图27,在一些实施例中,将入口链接显示成带链接标记的目标群组名称的过程具体包括但不限于包括以下步骤2710-2720:Referring to Figure 27, in some embodiments, the process of displaying the entry link as the target group name with a link tag specifically includes, but is not limited to, the following steps 2710-2720:
步骤2710、基于预定正则表达式,在第一页面中定位入口链接,并提取入口链接中的群组字符串;Step 2710: Based on the predefined regular expression, locate the entry link on the first page and extract the group string from the entry link;
步骤2720、如果确定群组字符串关联于目标群组的目标群组名称,则将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称。Step 2720: If it is determined that the group string is associated with the target group name of the target group, then the entry link is displayed as the target group name with the link tag.
下面对步骤2710-2720进行详细描述。Steps 2710-2720 are described in detail below.
在步骤2710中,预定正则表达式用于指示目标群组的入口链接的正确表现形式,预定正则表达式可以理解成是入口链接的正确链接格式。In step 2710, a predefined regular expression is used to indicate the correct representation of the entry link of the target group. The predefined regular expression can be understood as the correct link format of the entry link.
在该实施例具体实现时,首先,服务器在第一页面中检查是否有内容与预定正则表达式匹配。接着,将与预定正则表达式匹配的内容作为定位到的入口链接。最后,按照入口链接所要符合的链接格式进行拆分和字符串提取,得到入口链接中的群组字符串。In this specific implementation, firstly, the server checks if any content on the first page matches a predetermined regular expression. Next, the content matching the predetermined regular expression is used as the located entry link. Finally, the entry link is split and the string is extracted according to the required link format to obtain the group string within the entry link.
在步骤2720中,首先,根据群组字符串在预定关系对象表查找与之相同的候选字符串,并提取与群组字符串相同的候选字符串对应的群组信息,其具体过程与上述步骤2220-2250类似。接着,当存在与群组字符串相同的候选字符串,则确定群组字符串关联于目标群组的目标群组名称,并从提取到的群组信息中解析出群组名称,构建出带有链接标记的目标群组名称。最后,将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称。In step 2720, firstly, a candidate string matching the group string is searched in the predetermined relationship object table, and the group information corresponding to the candidate string matching the group string is extracted. The specific process is similar to steps 2220-2250 above. Next, when a candidate string matching the group string exists, the target group name associated with the group string is determined, and the group name is parsed from the extracted group information to construct the target group name with a link tag. Finally, the entry link is displayed as the target group name with the link tag.
在一些实施例中,应用程序首先根据群组字符串在预定关系对象表中进行查找。这个表包含了所有已存在的群组及其对应的群组字符串。如果找到了与群组字符串相同的候选字符串,应用程序会提取与该候选字符串对应的群组信息。这些信息通常包括群组名称、群组标识符等。从提取到的群组信息中,应用程序会解析出群组名称。这通常是群组信息中的一个字段,直接表示群组的名称。应用程序会将解析出的群组名称与入口链接结合起来,构建出一个带有链接标记的目标群组名称。这通常涉及到将群组名称包裹在HTML的`<a>`标签中,使其成为一个可点击的链接。应用程序将带有链接标记的目标群组名称显示给用户。当用户点击这个链接时,他们将被引导到对应的目标群组的会话页面。In some embodiments, the application first searches a predefined relational object table based on the group string. This table contains all existing groups and their corresponding group strings. If a candidate string matching the group string is found, the application extracts the group information corresponding to that candidate string. This information typically includes the group name, group identifier, etc. From the extracted group information, the application parses the group name. This is usually a field in the group information that directly represents the group name. The application combines the parsed group name with an entry link to construct a target group name with a link tag. This typically involves wrapping the group name in an HTML `<a>` tag, making it a clickable link. The application displays the target group name with the link tag to the user. When the user clicks this link, they are directed to the corresponding target group's session page.
如图28所示,图28是根据本申请的另一个实施例的展示群组名称和群组基本信息的整体流程图,在步骤301中,第一对象的终端在应用程序平台上浏览第一页面,触发对第一页面的入口链接定位和解析;在步骤302中,在第一页面中定位和识别目标群组的入口链接;在步骤303中,对入口链接进行解析,得到群组字符串;在步骤304中,根据群组字符串获取目标群组的详细信息;在步骤305中,获取目标群组的群组基本信息,并展示群组基本信息。应用程序服务器对入口链接进行解析,并将入口链接显示成带链接标记的目标群组名称时所执行的流程。具体地,首先,第一对象的终端在应用程序平台上浏览第一页面。基于此,服务器检测到第一对象的终端针对第一页面的浏览事件,触发对第一页面的入口链接定位和解析,服务器会在第一页面中定位和识别目标群组的入口链接,并对入口链接进行解析,得到群组字符串,其具体过程与上述步骤2710类似。As shown in Figure 28, which is an overall flowchart of displaying group names and basic group information according to another embodiment of this application, in step 301, the terminal of the first object browses the first page on the application platform, triggering the location and parsing of the entry link on the first page; in step 302, the entry link of the target group is located and identified on the first page; in step 303, the entry link is parsed to obtain the group string; in step 304, the detailed information of the target group is obtained based on the group string; in step 305, the basic group information of the target group is obtained and displayed. The process executed by the application server when parsing the entry link and displaying it as the target group name with a link tag is as follows: Specifically, firstly, the terminal of the first object browses the first page on the application platform. Based on this, the server detects the browsing event of the terminal of the first object on the first page, triggering the location and parsing of the entry link on the first page. The server locates and identifies the entry link of the target group on the first page and parses the entry link to obtain the group string, the specific process of which is similar to step 2710 above.
在一些实施例中,服务器根据群组字符串获取目标群组的详细信息,从详细信息中获取目标群组的群组名称,并向第一对象的终端展示群组名称,其具体过程与上述步骤2720类似。最终,从详细信息中获取目标群组的群组基本信息,并展示群组基本信息,其具体过程与上述步骤340类似。为节省篇幅,不再赘述。In some embodiments, the server obtains the detailed information of the target group based on the group string, retrieves the group name of the target group from the detailed information, and displays the group name to the terminal of the first object. The specific process is similar to step 2720 above. Finally, the server obtains the basic group information of the target group from the detailed information and displays the basic group information. The specific process is similar to step 340 above. For the sake of brevity, it will not be described in detail again.
该实施例的好处是,基于正则表达式对入口链接进行识别和定位,提取入口链接中的群组字符串,从而根据群组字符串提取到目标群组的群组信息(目标群组名称、和群组基本信息等)进行展示,能提高入口链接的定位效率,并提高群组信息的传递效率。The advantage of this embodiment is that it identifies and locates entry links based on regular expressions, extracts group strings from entry links, and then extracts and displays the group information (target group name, basic group information, etc.) of the target group based on the group strings. This improves the efficiency of locating entry links and the efficiency of transmitting group information.
本申请实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的实施细节图Detailed implementation diagrams of the group display method in the application of this application embodiment.
下面参照图29,详细示例性说明本申请实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的实施细节。The implementation details of the group display method in the application of this application embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to FIG29.
在步骤2901中,第二对象终端在应用程序平台输入多个群组的群组名称、群组链接请求生成复合群组链接;In step 2901, the second target terminal inputs the group names and group link requests of multiple groups into the application platform to generate a composite group link;
在步骤2902中,应用程序平台通过服务器将输入的群组名称转换成群组链接;In step 2902, the application platform converts the input group name into a group link via the server;
在步骤2903中,服务器将转换的群组链接和输入的群组链接构成群组链接列表;In step 2903, the server combines the converted group links with the input group links to form a group link list;
在步骤2904中,服务器基于群组链接列表、第二对象终端的终端标识等生成随机字符串;In step 2904, the server generates a random string based on the group link list, the terminal identifier of the second object terminal, etc.
在步骤2905中,服务器对随机字符串进行键冲突检测,在检测通过后,将随机字符串和群组链接列表等存储成键值对;In step 2905, the server performs key collision detection on the random string. If the detection passes, the random string and the group link list are stored as key-value pairs.
在步骤2906中,服务器将随机字符串编码成复合群组的入口链接返回给应用程序平台;In step 2906, the server encodes the random string into an entry link for a compound group and returns it to the application platform;
在步骤2907中,应用程序平台向第二对象终端展示复合群组的入口链接;In step 2907, the application platform displays the entry link of the composite group to the second object terminal;
在步骤2908中,第一对象的终端登录应用程序,并访问第一页面;In step 2908, the first object's terminal logs into the application and accesses the first page;
在步骤2909中,应用程序平台将复合群组的入口链接展示为带链接标记的群组名称;In step 2909, the application platform displays the entry link of the composite group as the group name with a link tag;
在步骤2910中,第一对象的终端的鼠标在带链接标记的群组名称周围停留;In step 2910, the mouse of the first object's terminal hovers around the group name with the link tag;
在步骤2911中,应用程序平台显示复合群组包括的多个子群组的带链接标记的子群组名称;In step 2911, the application platform displays the names of the multiple subgroups included in the composite group, with links attached.
在步骤2912中,第一对象的终端的鼠标在一个带链接标记的子群组名称周围停留;In step 2912, the mouse of the first object's terminal hovers around a subgroup name with a link tag;
在步骤2913中,应用程序平台显示子群组的子群组基本信息;In step 2913, the application platform displays the basic information of the subgroup.
在步骤2914中,第一对象的终端对子群组的子群组名称的链接标记进行双击;In step 2914, the terminal of the first object double-clicks the link marker of the subgroup name of the subgroup;
在步骤2915中,应用程序平台通过服务器确定第一对象的终端是否在子群组中;In step 2915, the application platform determines through the server whether the terminal of the first object is in the subgroup;
在步骤2916中,服务器返回检测结果;In step 2916, the server returns the detection results;
在步骤2917中,如果确定第一对象的终端是子群组的成员,显示子群组的会话页面。In step 2917, if it is determined that the terminal of the first object is a member of the subgroup, the subgroup's session page is displayed.
可以理解的是,步骤2901-2907的具体过程与上述实施例中步骤2010-2040类似。步骤2908-2909的具体过程与上述实施例中步骤320类似。步骤2910-2913的具体过程与上述实施例中步骤330类似。步骤2914-2917的具体过程与上述实施例中步骤1110-1120类似。为了节省篇幅,此处不再赘述。It is understood that the specific processes of steps 2901-2907 are similar to steps 2010-2040 in the above embodiments. The specific processes of steps 2908-2909 are similar to step 320 in the above embodiments. The specific processes of steps 2910-2913 are similar to step 330 in the above embodiments. The specific processes of steps 2914-2917 are similar to steps 1110-1120 in the above embodiments. To save space, they will not be described in detail here.
本申请实施例的装置和设备描述Description of apparatus and devices in embodiments of this application
可以理解的是,虽然上述各个流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的表征依次显示,但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头表征的顺序依次执行。除非本实施例中有明确的说明,这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制,这些步骤可以以其它的顺序执行。而且,上述流程图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个步骤或者多个阶段,这些步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时间执行完成,而是可以在不同的时间执行,这些步骤或者阶段的执行顺序也不必然是依次进行,而是可以与其它步骤或者其它步骤中的步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It is understood that although the steps in the above flowcharts are shown sequentially according to the arrows, these steps are not necessarily executed in the order indicated by the arrows. Unless explicitly stated in this embodiment, there is no strict order restriction on the execution of these steps, and they can be executed in other orders. Moreover, at least some steps in the above flowcharts may include multiple steps or multiple stages. These steps or stages are not necessarily completed at the same time, but can be executed at different times. The execution order of these steps or stages is not necessarily sequential, but can be performed alternately or in turn with other steps or at least some of the steps or stages in other steps.
需要说明的是,在本申请的各个具体实施方式中,当涉及到需要根据目标对象属性信息或属性信息集合等与目标对象特性相关的数据进行相关处理时,都会先获得目标对象的许可或者同意,而且,对这些数据的收集、使用和处理等,都会遵守相关法律法规和标准。此外,当本申请实施例需要获取目标对象属性信息时,会通过弹窗或者跳转到确认页面等方式获得目标对象的单独许可或者单独同意,在明确获得目标对象的单独许可或者单独同意之后,再获取用于使本申请实施例能够正常运行的必要的目标对象相关数据。It should be noted that in various specific embodiments of this application, when processing is required based on data related to the characteristics of the target object, such as target object attribute information or a set of attribute information, the permission or consent of the target object will be obtained first. Furthermore, the collection, use, and processing of this data will comply with relevant laws, regulations, and standards. In addition, when embodiments of this application require obtaining target object attribute information, separate permission or consent from the target object will be obtained through pop-ups or redirection to a confirmation page. Only after obtaining the target object's separate permission or consent will the necessary target object-related data for the normal operation of the embodiments of this application be obtained.
图30为本申请实施例提供的应用程序中的群组展示装置3000的结构示意图。该应用程序中的群组展示装置3000包括:Figure 30 is a structural schematic diagram of a group display device 3000 in an application provided in this application embodiment. The group display device 3000 in the application includes:
第一显示单元3010,配置为在应用程序中显示第一页面,第一页面包含目标群组的目标群组名称,目标群组名称带有目标群组的入口链接的链接标记,入口链接由目标群组中的第二对象创建,并在创建时关联于目标群组的目标群组名称;The first display unit 3010 is configured to display a first page in the application. The first page contains the target group name of the target group. The target group name has a link tag for the entry link of the target group. The entry link is created by a second object in the target group and is associated with the target group name of the target group when it is created.
第二显示单元3020,配置为响应于在目标群组名称周围触发的停留操作,显示目标群组的基本信息,所述目标群组的基本信息,所述目标区域为所述第一页面中与所述目标群组名称的显示位置之间的距离小于距离阈值的区域,所述基本信息用于提示所述第一对象是否触发所述链接标记;The second display unit 3020 is configured to display basic information of the target group in response to a dwell operation triggered around the target group name. The target area is an area in the first page where the distance between the display position of the target group name and the target area is less than a distance threshold. The basic information is used to prompt the first object whether the link mark has been triggered.
第三显示单元3030,配置为响应于针对链接标记的触发,显示目标群组的会话页面。The third display unit 3030 is configured to display the session page of the target group in response to a trigger on a link tag.
在一些实施例中,第一页面的目标群组名称通过以下方式确定:In some embodiments, the target group name on the first page is determined in the following way:
如果目标群组的第二对象在创建所述入口链接时已设置对第一对象的终端启用名称显示,则将入口链接的链接标记,构建为目标群组名称。If the second object in the target group has enabled name display for the first object's terminal when the entry link is created, then the link tag of the entry link will be constructed as the target group name.
在一些实施例中,第一页面的目标群组名称通过以下方式确定:In some embodiments, the target group name on the first page is determined in the following way:
将第二对象创建入口链接时为第一对象的终端指定的的群组名称,确定为与第一对象的终端对应的目标群组名称,其中,第二对象创建入口链接时,为不同的对象终端指定不同的群组名称。The group name specified for the terminal of the first object when the second object creates the entry link is determined as the target group name corresponding to the terminal of the first object. When the second object creates the entry link, different group names are specified for different object terminals.
在一些实施例中,第一页面的目标群组名称通过以下方式确定:In some embodiments, the target group name on the first page is determined in the following way:
将多个候选群组名称中、与第一对象的终端的第一对象偏好对应的候选群组名称,确定为目标群组名称,其中,多个候选群组名称为第二对象创建入口链接时与入口链接关联。Among the multiple candidate group names, the candidate group name that corresponds to the first object preference of the terminal of the first object is determined as the target group name. Among them, the multiple candidate group names are associated with the entry link when the second object creates the entry link.
在一些实施例中,第三显示单元3030配置为:In some embodiments, the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
响应于针对链接标记的触发,如果确定目标群组中包括第一对象,则显示目标群组的会话页面。In response to a trigger on a link tag, if the first object is determined to be included in the target group, the session page for the target group is displayed.
在一些实施例中,第三显示单元3030配置为:获取所述目标群组中的各个候选对象的终端的候选终端标识;如果确定所述第一对象的终端的终端标识与一个所述候选终端标识一致,则确定所述目标群组包括所述第一对象。In some embodiments, the third display unit 3030 is configured to: obtain the candidate terminal identifiers of the terminals of each candidate object in the target group; if it is determined that the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object is consistent with one of the candidate terminal identifiers, then it is determined that the target group includes the first object.
在一些实施例中,第三显示单元3030配置为:In some embodiments, the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
响应于针对链接标记的触发,显示询问消息,其中,询问消息用于询问第一对象的终端是否显示目标群组的会话页面;In response to a trigger on a link tag, a query message is displayed, wherein the query message is used to ask the terminal of the first object whether to display the session page of the target group;
响应于对询问消息的肯定应答,显示目标群组的会话页面。In response to an affirmative answer to the query message, the session page for the target group is displayed.
在一些实施例中,第三显示单元3030配置为:In some embodiments, the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
响应于针对链接标记的触发,向第二对象发送授权请求;In response to a trigger on a link tag, an authorization request is sent to the second object;
响应于接收到第二对象的授权应答,显示目标群组的会话页面。In response to receiving an authorization response from the second object, the session page for the target group is displayed.
在一些实施例中,第三显示单元3030配置为:In some embodiments, the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
响应于针对所述链接标记的触发,如果确定所述目标群组中不包括所述第一对象,则向所述第二对象发送所述授权请求。In response to a triggering of the link tag, if it is determined that the first object is not included in the target group, the authorization request is sent to the second object.
在一些实施例中,目标群组的基本信息包括第二对象创建目标群组时设置的信息、和应用程序平台基于基本信息提取规则从目标群组中提取的信息中的至少一个。In some embodiments, the basic information of the target group includes at least one of the information set when the second object creates the target group and the information extracted from the target group by the application platform based on the basic information extraction rules.
在一些实施例中,目标群组包括多个目标子群组,入口链接基于第二对象为每个目标子群组创建的子入口链接合成;In some embodiments, the target group includes multiple target subgroups, and the entry links are synthesized based on the sub-entry links created for each target subgroup by the second object;
目标群组的基本信息包含各个目标子群组的目标子群组名称,目标子群组名称在第二对象创建入口链接时关联于目标子群组,目标子群组名称带有链接标记;The basic information of the target group includes the target subgroup name of each target subgroup. The target subgroup name is associated with the target subgroup when the second object creates the entry link. The target subgroup name has a link tag.
第三显示单元3030配置为:The third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
响应于针对目标子群组名称上的链接标记的触发,显示目标子群组的会话页面。In response to a link tag on the target subgroup name, display the target subgroup's session page.
在一些实施例中,第三显示单元3030配置为:In some embodiments, the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
目标群组的入口链接通过以下方式创建:The entry link for the target group is created in the following way:
向第二对象显示目标群组的会话页面;Display the target group's session page to the second target;
响应于第二对象在目标群组的会话页面中的链接创建操作,获取目标群组的目标群组名称、和第二对象的终端标识;In response to the link creation operation of the second object in the session page of the target group, obtain the target group name of the target group and the terminal identifier of the second object;
基于目标群组名称、和终端标识,生成群组字符串;Generate a group string based on the target group name and terminal identifier;
如果确定群组字符串满足第一条件,则将群组字符串编码成入口链接,并为第二对象显示入口链接。If the group string is determined to satisfy the first condition, the group string is encoded into an entry link, and the entry link is displayed for the second object.
在一些实施例中,第三显示单元3030配置为:In some embodiments, the third display unit 3030 is configured as follows:
获取预定关系对照表,其中,预定关系对照表用于指示各个候选群组与候选字符串的对应关系;Obtain a predefined relationship lookup table, which indicates the correspondence between each candidate group and the candidate string;
将群组字符串、与各个候选字符串进行比较;Compare the group string with each candidate string;
如果确定群组字符串、与各个候选字符串都不相同,则确定群组字符串满足第一条件。If the group string is determined to be different from all candidate strings, then the group string satisfies the first condition.
在一些实施例中,目标群组包括多个目标子群组;In some embodiments, the target group includes multiple target subgroups;
目标群组的入口链接通过以下方式创建:The entry link for the target group is created in the following way:
显示模块(未示出),配置为响应于第二对象的链接创建请求,显示链接创建页面;A display module (not shown) is configured to display a link creation page in response to a link creation request from a second object;
确定模块(未示出),配置为基于第二对象在链接创建页面中的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接;The determination module (not shown) is configured to determine the subgroup links of each target subgroup based on the input operation of the second object in the link creation page;
生成模块(未示出),配置为基于多个子群组链接、和第二对象的终端标识,生成群组字符串;A generation module (not shown) is configured to generate a group string based on multiple subgroup links and the terminal identifier of the second object;
编码模块(未示出),配置为如果确定群组字符串满足第一条件,则将群组字符串编码成入口链接,并为第二对象显示入口链接。An encoding module (not shown) is configured to encode the group string into an entry link and display the entry link for the second object if it is determined that the group string meets the first condition.
在一些实施例中,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接,包括:In some embodiments, determining the subgroup links for each target subgroup includes:
如果确定第二对象在链接创建页面中输入的是目标子群组的子群组名称,则基于子群组名称,生成子群组字符串,并将子群组字符串编码成子群组链接;If it is determined that the second object entered the subgroup name of the target subgroup in the link creation page, then a subgroup string is generated based on the subgroup name, and the subgroup string is encoded into a subgroup link;
如果确定第二对象在链接创建页面中输入的是目标子群组的子群组链接,则对子群组链接进行第二验证,并将第二验证通过的子群组链接用于生成群组字符串。If it is determined that the second object entered a subgroup link of the target subgroup on the link creation page, then the subgroup link is subject to a second verification, and the subgroup link that passes the second verification is used to generate the group string.
在一些实施例中,对子群组链接进行第二验证,包括:In some embodiments, a second verification of subgroup links includes:
对子群组链接进行格式验证;Perform format validation on subgroup links;
如果确定格式验证通过,则获取预定关系对照表,其中,预定关系对照表用于指示各个候选群组与候选字符串的对应关系;If the format validation is successful, a predefined relationship lookup table is obtained, which indicates the correspondence between each candidate group and the candidate string.
从子群组链接中解析出目标子群组的子群组字符串;Parse the subgroup string of the target subgroup from the subgroup link;
将子群组字符串、与各个候选字符串进行比较;Compare the subgroup string with each candidate string;
如果确定子群组字符串、与一个候选字符串相同,则确定第二验证通过。If the subgroup string is determined to be the same as a candidate string, then the second verification is considered successful.
在一些实施例中,链接创建页面具有多个群组信息添加窗口、和一个群组增补控件;In some embodiments, the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group supplement control;
确定模块(未示出)配置为:The module (not shown) is configured as follows:
基于第二对象对群组增补控件的触发,在链接创建页面中显示增补窗口;Based on the triggering of the group supplement control by the second object, the supplement window is displayed on the link creation page;
基于第二对象在多个群组信息添加窗口、和增补窗口的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接。Based on the input operations of the second object in multiple group information addition windows and supplementary windows, the subgroup links of each target subgroup are determined.
在一些实施例中,链接创建页面具有多个群组信息添加窗口、和一个群组删除控件;In some embodiments, the link creation page has multiple group information addition windows and a group deletion control;
确定模块(未示出)配置为:The module (not shown) is configured as follows:
基于第二对象对群组删除控件的触发,对多个群组信息添加窗口中的一个进行删除;Based on the triggering of the group deletion control by the second object, one of the multiple group information addition windows is deleted;
基于第二对象在保留下来的多个群组信息添加窗口的输入操作,确定各个目标子群组的子群组链接。Based on the input operations of the second object in the window that retains multiple group information, the subgroup links of each target subgroup are determined.
在一些实施例中,目标群组名称通过以下方式显示:In some embodiments, the target group name is displayed in the following manner:
基于预定正则表达式,在第一页面中定位入口链接,并提取入口链接中的群组字符串;Based on a predefined regular expression, locate the entry link on the first page and extract the group string from the entry link;
如果确定群组字符串关联于目标群组的目标群组名称,则将入口链接显示为带有链接标记的目标群组名称。If it is determined that the group string is associated with the target group name of the target group, the entry link will be displayed as the target group name with the link tag.
在一些实施例中,目标群组包括第一对象的终端通过以下方式确定:In some embodiments, the target group including the terminals of the first object is determined by the following:
获取目标群组中的各个候选对象终端的候选终端标识;Obtain the candidate terminal identifiers for each candidate terminal in the target group;
如果确定第一对象的终端的终端标识与一个候选终端标识一致,则确定目标群组包括第一对象的终端。If the terminal identifier of the terminal of the first object is determined to match a candidate terminal identifier, then the target group is determined to include the terminal of the first object.
在一些实施例中,第二对象的授权应答通过以下方式生成:In some embodiments, the authorization response of the second object is generated in the following manner:
获取第一对象的终端的终端信誉度、和创建时间戳;Obtain the terminal reputation and creation timestamp of the terminal of the first object;
基于终端信誉度和创建时间戳确定第一对象的终端的终端分数;The terminal score of the first object's terminal is determined based on terminal reputation and creation timestamp;
如果终端分数大于预定分数,则生成授权应答。If the terminal score is greater than the predetermined score, an authorization response is generated.
参照图31,图31为实现本申请实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的终端的部分的结构框图,该终端包括:射频(Radio Frequency,简称RF)电路3110、存储器3115、输入单元3130、显示单元3140、传感器3150、音频电路3160、无线保真(wireless fidelity,简称WiFi)模块3170、处理器3180、以及电源3190等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,图31示出的终端结构并不构成对手机或电脑的限定,可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。Referring to Figure 31, which is a structural block diagram of a portion of a terminal implementing the group display method in an application according to an embodiment of this application, the terminal includes: a radio frequency (RF) circuit 3110, a memory 3115, an input unit 3130, a display unit 3140, a sensor 3150, an audio circuit 3160, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) module 3170, a processor 3180, and a power supply 3190, among other components. Those skilled in the art will understand that the terminal structure shown in Figure 31 does not constitute a limitation on a mobile phone or computer, and may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or have different component arrangements.
RF电路3110可配置为收发信息或通话过程中,信号的接收和发送,特别地,将基站的下行信息接收后,给处理器3180处理;另外,将设计上行的数据发送给基站。The RF circuit 3110 can be configured to receive and transmit signals during information transmission or calls. Specifically, it receives downlink information from the base station and processes it with the processor 3180; in addition, it transmits uplink data designed to be sent to the base station.
存储器3115可配置为存储软件程序以及模块,处理器3180通过运行存储在存储器3115的软件程序以及模块,从而执行对象终端的各种功能应用以及数据处理。The memory 3115 can be configured to store software programs and modules, and the processor 3180 executes various functional applications and data processing of the target terminal by running the software programs and modules stored in the memory 3115.
输入单元3130可配置为接收输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与对象终端的设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。具体地,输入单元3130可包括触控面板3131以及其他输入装置3132。The input unit 3130 can be configured to receive input numeric or character information, and to generate key signal inputs related to the settings and function control of the target terminal. Specifically, the input unit 3130 may include a touch panel 3131 and other input devices 3132.
显示单元3140可配置为显示输入的信息或提供的信息以及对象终端的各种菜单。显示单元3140可包括显示面板3141。Display unit 3140 can be configured to display input or provided information, as well as various menus of the target terminal. Display unit 3140 may include display panel 3141.
音频电路3160、扬声器3161,传声器3162可提供音频接口。Audio circuitry 3160, speaker 3161, and microphone 3162 provide an audio interface.
在本实施例中,该终端所包括的处理器3180可以执行前面实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法。In this embodiment, the processor 3180 included in the terminal can execute the group display method in the application of the previous embodiment.
本申请实施例的终端包括但不限于手机、电脑、智能语音交互设备、智能家电、车载终端、飞行器等。本发明实施例可应用于各种场景,包括但不限于数据安全、区块链、数据存储、信息技术等。The terminals in this application embodiment include, but are not limited to, mobile phones, computers, intelligent voice interaction devices, smart home appliances, vehicle terminals, and aircraft. The embodiments of this invention can be applied to various scenarios, including but not limited to data security, blockchain, data storage, and information technology.
图32为实施本申请实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法的服务器的部分的结构框图。服务器可因配置或性能不同而产生比较大的差异,可以包括一个或一个以上中央处理器(Central Processing Units,简称CPU)3222(例如,一个或一个以上处理器)和存储器3232,一个或一个以上存储应用程序3242或数据3244的存储介质3230(例如一个或一个以上海量存储装置)。其中,存储器3232和存储介质3230可以是短暂存储或持久存储。存储在存储介质3230的程序可以包括一个或一个以上模块(图示没标出),每个模块可以包括对服务器中的一系列指令操作。中央处理器3222可以设置为与存储介质3230通信,在服务器上执行存储介质3230中的一系列指令操作。Figure 32 is a structural block diagram of a portion of the server in an application implementing the group display method of this application. The server can vary significantly due to different configurations or performance, and may include one or more central processing units (CPUs) 3222 (e.g., one or more processors) and memory 3232, and one or more storage media 3230 (e.g., one or more mass storage devices) for storing application programs 3242 or data 3244. The memory 3232 and storage media 3230 may be temporary or persistent storage. The program stored in the storage media 3230 may include one or more modules (not shown in the figure), each module including a series of instruction operations on the server. The CPU 3222 may be configured to communicate with the storage media 3230 and execute the series of instruction operations in the storage media 3230 on the server.
服务器还可以包括一个或一个以上电源3226,一个或一个以上有线或无线网络接口3250,一个或一个以上输入输出接口3258,和/或,一个或一个以上操作系统3241,例如Windows ServerTM,Mac OS XTM,UnixTM,LinuxTM,FreeBSDTM等等。The server may also include one or more power supplies 3226, one or more wired or wireless network interfaces 3250, one or more input/output interfaces 3258, and/or one or more operating systems 3241, such as Windows Server™, Mac OS X™, Unix™, Linux™, FreeBSD™, etc.
服务器中的中央处理器3222可以配置为执行本申请实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法。The central processing unit 3222 in the server can be configured to execute the group display method in the application of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质配置为存储程序代码,程序代码配置为执行前述各个实施例的应用程序中的群组展示方法。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium configured to store program code, which is configured to execute the group display method in the applications of the foregoing embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序。计算机设备的处理器读取该计算机程序并执行,使得该计算机设备执行实现上述的应用程序中的群组展示方法。This application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program. A processor of a computer device reads and executes the computer program, causing the computer device to perform the group display method in the application described above.
本申请的说明书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”等(如果存在)是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便这里描述的本申请的实施例例如能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施。此外,术语“包括”和“包含”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或装置不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或装置固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms “first,” “second,” “third,” “fourth,” etc. (if present) in the specification and accompanying drawings of this application are used to distinguish similar objects and are not necessarily used to describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that such data can be interchanged where appropriate so that the embodiments of this application described herein can be implemented, for example, in orders other than those illustrated or described herein. Furthermore, the terms “comprising” and “including,” and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion; for example, a process, method, system, product, or apparatus that includes a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to those steps or units explicitly listed, but may include other steps or units not explicitly listed or inherent to such processes, methods, products, or apparatuses.
应当理解,在本申请中,“至少一个(项)”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,用于描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,“A和/或B”可以表示:只存在A,只存在B以及同时存在A和B三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,“a和b”,“a和c”,“b和c”,或“a和b和c”,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。It should be understood that in this application, "at least one (item)" means one or more, and "more than" means two or more. "And/or" is used to describe the relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. For example, "A and/or B" can represent three cases: only A exists, only B exists, and both A and B exist simultaneously, where A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the preceding and following related objects are in an "or" relationship. "At least one (item) of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one (item) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, "a and b", "a and c", "b and c", or "a and b and c", where a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
应了解,在本申请实施例的描述中,多个(或多项)的含义是两个以上,大于、小于、超过等理解为不包括本数,以上、以下、以内等理解为包括本数。It should be understood that in the description of the embodiments of this application, "multiple" means two or more, "greater than", "less than", "exceeding" etc. are understood to exclude the number itself, and "above", "below", "within" etc. are understood to include the number itself.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, apparatuses, and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative; for instance, the division of units is only a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed. Furthermore, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, or indirect coupling or communication connection between apparatuses or units, and may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate. The components shown as units may or may not be physical units; that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。Furthermore, the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The integrated unit can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional unit.
集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机装置(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络装置等)执行本申请各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,简称ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,简称RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented as a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application, in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution, can be embodied in the form of a software product. This computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods of the various embodiments of this application. The aforementioned storage medium includes various media capable of storing program code, such as USB flash drives, portable hard drives, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks, or optical disks.
还应了解,本申请实施例提供的各种实施方式可以任意进行组合,以实现不同的技术效果。It should also be understood that the various implementation methods provided in this application can be combined arbitrarily to achieve different technical effects.
以上是对本申请的实施方式的具体说明,但本申请并不局限于上述实施方式,熟悉本领域的技术人员在不违背本申请精神的条件下还可作出种种等同的变形或替换,这些等同的变形或替换均包括在本申请权利要求所限定的范围内。The above is a detailed description of the embodiments of this application. However, this application is not limited to the above embodiments. Those skilled in the art can make various equivalent modifications or substitutions without departing from the spirit of this application. All such equivalent modifications or substitutions are included within the scope defined by the claims of this application.
Claims (22)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202410602103.9 | 2024-05-15 | ||
| CN202410602103.9A CN120980055A (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2024-05-15 | Group display method in application program, related device and medium |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025236933A1 true WO2025236933A1 (en) | 2025-11-20 |
Family
ID=97643816
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2025/088021 Pending WO2025236933A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-04-09 | Group display method and apparatus in application program, and storage medium and computer program product |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN120980055A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025236933A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN104202173A (en) * | 2014-08-11 | 2014-12-10 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Terminal device and group joining control method, server and group invitation method |
| CN104579708A (en) * | 2014-12-26 | 2015-04-29 | 北京奇虎科技有限公司 | Group joining method and device |
| WO2022142504A1 (en) * | 2020-12-29 | 2022-07-07 | 上海掌门科技有限公司 | Meeting group merging method and device |
-
2024
- 2024-05-15 CN CN202410602103.9A patent/CN120980055A/en active Pending
-
2025
- 2025-04-09 WO PCT/CN2025/088021 patent/WO2025236933A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN104202173A (en) * | 2014-08-11 | 2014-12-10 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Terminal device and group joining control method, server and group invitation method |
| CN104579708A (en) * | 2014-12-26 | 2015-04-29 | 北京奇虎科技有限公司 | Group joining method and device |
| WO2022142504A1 (en) * | 2020-12-29 | 2022-07-07 | 上海掌门科技有限公司 | Meeting group merging method and device |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN120980055A (en) | 2025-11-18 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US10992682B2 (en) | Systems and methods for efficient and secure temporary anonymous access to media content | |
| JP6223979B2 (en) | Shared item account selection | |
| TWI412261B (en) | Access rights | |
| TWI406137B (en) | Method and apparatus for social interaction | |
| US10165066B2 (en) | Systems, methods, and apparatuses for implementing an interface to populate and update an entity graph through socially relevant user challenges | |
| US11714693B2 (en) | Data driven API conversion | |
| US20110219036A1 (en) | Social network site including contact-based recommendation functionality | |
| US20130066975A1 (en) | Group Opt-In Links | |
| CN102255913A (en) | Verification-security-level-based audio verification code provision method and equipment | |
| US9426160B2 (en) | Delivering author specific content | |
| Shehab et al. | Recommendation models for open authorization | |
| US20160088063A1 (en) | Interactive Social Platform | |
| JP2018504681A (en) | Method, apparatus, system, storage medium, program, and computer apparatus for providing authentication information on a web page | |
| US20160330190A1 (en) | User security authentication system in internet and method thereof | |
| JP2009054054A (en) | Common attribute information retrieval system, common attribute information retrieval method, and common attribute information retrieval program | |
| WO2025236933A1 (en) | Group display method and apparatus in application program, and storage medium and computer program product | |
| US10719541B2 (en) | Method and system to capture and find information and relationships | |
| Shehab et al. | ROAuth: Recommendation based open authorization | |
| JP7405996B2 (en) | A virtual email system that preserves your privacy | |
| WO2022049601A1 (en) | Method and system for scaling content entitlement checks for a plurality of subscribers | |
| US20090133034A1 (en) | Screened participant class notification for public networks | |
| KR20210053868A (en) | Method for operating content providing server and service providing method using the same | |
| Mármol et al. | Deliverable 3.2 | |
| WO2010099826A1 (en) | Management of user attributes | |
| KR20170143381A (en) | Method for authenticating user with personalized question |